ENGINEERING MECHANICS Statics Tenth Edition in SI Units R.C, Hibbeler SI conversion by S. C. Fan Singapore London New York Toronto Sydney ‘Tokyo Madrid Mexico City Munich Paris Capetown Hong Kong MontrealPublished in 2004 by Prentice Hall Pearson Ecucation South Asia Ple Ltd 23/25 First Lok Yang Rood ‘Singapore 629733 Pearson Education olfices in Asie: Bangkok, Beljing, Hong Kong, ekaarta, Kuate Launpur, Manila, Nesr Detht, Seoul, Shanghel, Singapore, Tuipet, Tohyo, Original edition published by: Prentice-Hall, Inc. Copyright © 2001 R.C.Hibbeler Printed in Singapore 3 07 05 ISBN 013-124-844-8 (pbk) ISBN 013-127-844-4 (hbk) Copyright © 2004 hy R. C. Hibbeler, All rights reserved. This publication is protected by Copyright and permission should be ‘obtained from the publisher prior to any prohibited reproduction, storage in ¢ retrieval system, or transmission in any forsa or ky any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording,’or likewise, For information regarding permission@), write to:’ Rights and Permissions Dopertment.TO THE STUDENT With the hope that this work will stimulate an interest in Engineering Mechanies end provide an acceptable guide to its nnderstanding.“The main purpose of this book is to provide the student with a clear and thoromgh presentation of the theory and applications of engineering ‘mechanics. To achieve this objective, the author hes by no means worked alone; to @ large extent, this book has been shaped by the comments and suggestions of handzeds of reviewers in the teaching profession as well as many of the author's students, PREFACE! New Features Some unique features used throughout this third edition include the following: © Mlustrations. Throughout the book, new photorealistic iustretions have bbeen added that provide © strong connection to the 3-D nature of ‘agincering, in addition, pacticular attention has been placed on providing a view of any physizal object, iis dimensions, and the vectors appicd to it in a manner that can be easily understood. ‘+ Problems. ‘Ihe problems sets have been revised 20 that instructors can, select both design and analysis problems having a wide rangs of cifically. Apari from the author, Wo other professionals have checked alf the roviems for darity and accuracy of the solutions At the end of some chapters, design projects are included, * Review Material. New endofcapter review sections have been added to help students recall and stacy Key chapter points Of course, the hallmarks of the book remein the same: Where necessary, a Strong emphasis is placed on drawing a free-body diagram, and the importance of velecting an agpropriate coordinate system, and associated sign convention for vector components is stressed when the equations of mechanics are epplied, Contents . ‘The book is divided into 11 chapters, in which the plinciples are applied Furst to simple, then to more complicated situations Moat often, each principe i applied first to a particle, then to a rigid body subjected to a coplanar system of forces, ancl finally 10 « general case Of three dimensional force systems acting on a rigid body. vilSpecial Features Chepter 1 begins with an introduction to mechanics and a discussion of waits. The notation of a vector and the properties of a concurrent force eystom are introduced in Chapter 2. Tait theory is then applied to the equilibrium of a particle in Chapter 3. Chepter 4 contains a general discussion of beth concentrated and cistriouted force systems and the ‘methods used to simplify them. The principles of rigid-body equilibrium are developed in Chapter Sand then applied to specific problems involving the ecuilibrium of trusses, frames, and machines in Chapter 6, and to the analysis of internal forces in bears and cabies in Chapter 7. Applications te probloms involving frictional forces are discussed in Chapter 8, and topicsrelated to the center of gravity and centroid are treated in Chapter 9. Hf timw permits, sections conreming more advanced topics, indicated by stars (4) may be covered. Most of these topics are included in Chapter 10 (area ancl mass moments of inertia) and Chapter 11 (virtual work and potential energy). Note that thie materia also provides a suitable reference for besie principles when if is discussed in more advanced courses. Alternative Coverage, At the discretion of the instructor, some of the materia’ may be presented in different sequence with nolossof continuity. For example, it is possible to introduce the concept of a force and all the necessary methods of vector analysis by first covering Chupter2 and Section 42, Then after covering the rest of Chapter 4 (fotce and moment systenis), the equilibrium methods of Chapters 3 and 5 ean be discussed Organization and Approach. Tue contents of each chapter are organized inlo well-defined sections that contain an exolanation of specific topics, ilustrative exemple problems, and a set of homework ploblems, The topics within each section are placed into subgroups defined by boldface titles, The purpose of this is to present a structured ‘method for introducing each new definition or concept and to make the ‘book convenient for later reference and review. Chapter Contents. Each chapter begins with an illustration deman- stating a broac-range application of the material within the chapter. A balleted list of the chapter contentsis provided to give a general overview ‘of the material that will be covered, Free-Body Diagrams. ‘The fst step to solviig most mechanics problems requires drawingia diagram. By doing so, the student forms the habit of tabulating the neCeasary dcta hile foousing on the physical aspects of the problem and its associated geometry. If this sep is performed correctly, applying the relevant equations of mechanics becomes somewhal methodical since the‘data can be taken directly from the diograra. This sep is particulady important when solving equilibrium probleins, end for this reason drawing fres-body diagrams s strongly ernphasized throughout the book. in particular, special sections and examples are devoted to howhow to draw free-body diagrams, and specitichomewerk problerasin many sections of the book have been added to develop this practice, Procedures for Analysis, Found after many of the sections of the book, (Gisunique feature provides the student with alogical and orderly methed tofallow vhen applying the theory. The exzmple problems are solved using, this outlined method in order to clarify its numerical application. It to be understood, however, that ones the relevant principles have been mastered and enough confidence and judgment have been obtained, the student can then develop his or her ov procedures for salving problems. Photographs. Many photographs ate used throughout the book to ‘explain how the principles of mechanics apply to real-world sitaations. In some sections, photographs have been used to show how engineers must first make an idedlized model for analysis and then proceed to draw a free body diagram of this model in order to apply the theory. Important Points. ‘This feeture provides a review or summary of the ‘host important concepts in a section and highlights the most significant ‘points that shoald be realized when applying the theory to solve problems. Conceptual Understanding, Through the use of photographs placed throughout the book, theory is epplied in a simplified way in order to {Mustrate some of its more Important conceptual features and instil the physical meaning of many of the terms used in the equations These simplified applications increase interest in the subject matter and better prepare the student to understand the exaraples and solve problems, Example Problems, All the example problems are presented in a concise manner and in a siyle that is easy to understand. Homework Problems, ® Free-Body Diagram Froblams. Many sections of the book contain inteoductory problems that only require drawing the free-body diagrem for the specific problems within problem set-Thete atsigactents Will impress ‘upon the studeat the importance of mastering this skil as a requireacat Tor a compete solution of any equilbeium problem. © General Analysis and Design Problems. The majority of problents in the. book depict realistic situations encountered ia engineering practice. Some ofthete problems come from actual producs wed in industry end ore stted assuc Is hoped ta thisrealsm Wil bok simulate the students interest in eagineering mechatics end provide a means for developing tne skil to ‘reduee anysuch problem from its physical description toa model or symbolic representation ‘0 which the principles of mectanies may be applied. “Throughout vie book, al problems wse ST uni, Furthermore, ia any eet, an attempt hasbeen made to arrange the problems it onder of ccreasig dieu, {Review problems at the end of each chapler are presented in raacora order.) “The arswers toll but every fur peobiem ate Ited in the Bick of the book, Paeeace + IxPrecace + Stuslent Study Materials: New chapter-by-chapter review includes key points, equations, and check up questions. + Free-Body Diagram Workbook: 75-page workbooks that step siudeats through numerous tree-body dtagrant problems Full explanations and solutions are provided. Student Study Guide States: Dyncantes Students may purchase further Study Guide containing more worked problems Problems ate partially solved and designed to help guide students through difficult topics. Companion Website wwwpearsoned-asia comvhibbeler. ‘This password. protected website provides additional steties/dynemics problems with Solutions. Problems and solutions are supplemented and do not appear in the third edition. Sclutions contain both math and associated free-body ciagrams. Students can use these for practice before quizzes and tosis, as ‘well as self-drit, For instructors: Downloadable version of the powerpoint Sides and Instructor's Solutions Manual are availablePassace + xt Acknowledgments ‘The author has endeavored to write this book so that itwill appeal ta both the student and instructor. Through the years many peopic have helped in 4s development, anc I will abvays be grateful for heir valved suggestions and comments. Specifically, T wish to. personally thank the following. individuals who have contributed their comments to the Statics and Dynanies series Paal Heyliger, Colorado State University Kenneth Sewyers, Lehigh University Jolin Oyler, University of Phesburgl Glenn Belt, University of California Johannes Gessler, Colomdo State University Wilfred Nixon, University of Jowa Jonathan Russell, US. Coast Guurrd Academy Robert Hinks, Arizona Stete University Cap. Mark Orwat, US AMiliimry Academy, West Point Cetin Cetinyska, Clarkson University Jack Xin, Keres State University Pierre Juliea, Coforado State University Stephen Bechtel, Ohio State Tniversity W.A. Curtain, Browne University Robert Oakberg, Montara State University Richard Bennett, University of Teneessee ‘A particular note of thanks is also given to Professors Will Liddell, Jt. and Henry Kuhlman for their specific help. A special note of thanks is givento the accuracy checkore, Scott Hendricks of VPI and Karim Nokra of the University of South Florida, who diigently checked ell of the text and problems, T should also like to ecknowledge the proofreading essiotance of my wife, Conny (Cometic), daring the time it fs taiken to Prepere this manuscript for publication, Lastly, many thanks are extended to ail my students and to members of the teaching profession who have freely taken tho time to send me their suggestions and comments, Since this list is too Jong to mention, it is hoped that those who have given help in this manner will-accept this ‘anonymous recognition, would greatly appreciate hearing trom you if at any time you have ‘any comments, suggestions, or problems related to any matters regarding this edition, Russell Charles Hibbeler [email protected]CONTENTS| ~ General Principles 3 Equilibrium of a Particle 81 1d 12 13 14 Ls 16 24 22 23 24 25 26 21 28 29 Chapter Objectives 3 Mechanics 3 Fundamental Concepts 4 Units of Measurement 6 ‘The International System of Units 7 ‘Numerical Cateulations 9 Generat Procedure for Analysis 13 | 2 Force Vectors 17 Chapter Objectives 17 Scelars and Vectors 17 Vector Operations 18 ‘Vector Addition of Forces 20 Acddition of e System of Coplanar Forces 31 Cartesian Vectors 42 ‘Addition and Subtraction of Cartesian Vectors 46 Position Vectors 55 Force Vector Directed Atonga Line 58 Dot Procuct 68 Chapter Objectives 81 Condition for the Fquitibriom ofaPartide al ‘The Free-Body Diagram 82 Coplanar Force Systems §5 ‘Thice-Dimensfonal Force Sysiems 98 Force System Resulfants 113 42 43 44 45 46 48 49 410 Chapter Objectives 113 ‘Moment of a Foree-—Scalar Forntolation 13 Cross Prodmet_ 118 ‘Moment of a Foree—Vector Formulation 121 Principle of Momerts 126 ‘Moment of a Fores About ¢ Specified Axis 138 ‘Moment of aConple 148. Equivalent System 160 Resultants of a Force and Couple System 102 Further Reduction of a Force and Couple system 166 Reduction of a Simple Distributed Loading 180 attIntermal Forces 325 Chapter Objectives 193 Conditions for Rigid-Body 1a Equilibrium 193 Equilibrium in Fro Dimensions 195 #12 Free-Body Diagrams 185 Equations of Equilibrium 209 #13 Iwo. and Three-Fore Members 218 ‘Equilibrium in Three Dimensions 231 1d Free-Body Diagrams 231 Equationa of Equilibrium 237 Constraints for a Rigld Body | 238 6 —— aL Structural Analysis 257 a2 ——__—_—— 83 Chapter Objectives 257 84 Simple Trusses 257 bo «8S “The Method of Jaints 250 #86 Zorw-Force Members 266 ‘The Method of Sections 273 48.7 Space Trusses 283 : ‘Frames and Machines 287 w88 Chapter Objectives 325 Internal Forces Developed in Structural Members 325 Shear and Moment Equations and Diagrams 342 * Relations Between Distributed Load, Shear, and Moment 350 Cables 360 Friction 379 Chapter Objectives 379 Characteristics of Dry Friction 379. Problems Involving Dry Friction 383 Wedges 404 Frictional Horees on Serews — 405 Frictional Fotees on Flat Belts 414 Frictional Forces on Collar Bearings, Pivot Bearings, and Disks 421 Frictional Forces on Journal Bearings 424 Rolling Resistance 426Center of Gravity and Centroid 437 Comms + xv Virtaal Work 551 aa. 92 93 494 #95 49.6 10.1 10.2 103 104 10s #106 #107 #108 109 Chapter Objectives 437 Center of Gravity and Center of Mass for a System of Particles 437 Center of Gravity, Centse of Moo and Certroid for 2 Body 439 Composite Bodies 461 “Theorems of Pops and Galdinm 475 Resultant of a General Distributed Loading 483 Fluid Pressure 484 Chapter Objectives 499 Definition of Moments of Inertia for Areas 499 Parallel-Axis Theorern for an Area SOL Radius of Gyration of an Area 501 Manents of Inertia for an Arca by Integration 502 Maments of Inertia for Composite Areas 510 Product of inettiz for an Area 518 Moments of Inertia for an Area About Joelined Axcs 522 ‘Mohr’s Circle for Moments ofTnectia 525 Mass Moment of Inertia 535 Cuopter Objectives 551 1 Definition of Work and Viewal Work 551 11.2 Principle of Virtual Work for a Paxticle and a Rigid Body 554 113 Principle of Virtual Work for a System of Conneoted Rigid Bodiss 535 LL4 Conservative Forces 558 ¥ILS Potential Energy 569 41L6 Potential Futorgy Criterion for Equiltxium 570 #ILT Stability of Equilibrium $72 Appendices A. Mathematical Expressions 584 B. Numerical and Computer’ Analysis 586 C. Review for the Fundamentals of Engincering Fxamiration 592 Answers to Selected Problems 611 Index 628STATICS‘The desion of this «acket and gantry structure requires a basic knowiedoe of both statics and dynamics, whieh forms the subject master of engineering mactanics.CHAPTER General Principles Masse seni © To provide an introduction to the basic quantities and idealizations of mechanics, © To give a statement of Newton's Laws of Motion and Gravitation, * To ieview the principles for applying the St system of units. » To examine the standard procedures for performing numerical calculations. To present a generél guide for solving problems. 1.1 Mechanics Mechanics con be defined as taat branch of the physical soiences sonceraed with the state of rest or motion of bodies that are subjected to the action of forces. In general, this subject is subxivided into three branches: rigit-borty meshanics, dejormable-body mechanics, and fluid mechanics. This book treats only rigid-body mechanies since it forms a suitable basis for the design and analysis of many types of structural, mechanical, or electrical devices encountered in engineering, Also, rig body mechanics provides part of the necessary background for the study of the mechanics af deformable bodies and the mechanies of tuids. Rigid-body mechanics is divided into two areas: staties and dynamics Sraties deals with the equilibrium of bodies, that is hase thet are cither aL rest or move with a constant velocity; whereas dynamics Is concerned ‘withthe accelerated motion of bodies. Although statiescan be considered 8 a special ensc of dynamics, in which the acceleration is zero, slaties oserves soparate treatment in enginccring education since many objects are designed with the intention that they remain in equilibrium,4 CHAPTER 1 Goreral Principles Historical Development. The subject of stetics developed very carly {n history because the principles involved could be formulated simply from measurements of geometry and force. For example, the writings of Archimedes (267-2:2s.¢.) deal with the principle of the lever. Studies of ‘the pulley, inclined plane, and wrench arc also recorded in ancient viritings-—al times when the requirements of engineering were limited primarily to building construction. Since the principles of dynamics deperd on an accurate measurement of time, this subject developed much later. Galileo Galilei (15641642) was one of the first major contributors to this field, His work consisted ‘of experimen's using peaculums and falling bodies. The most significant contributions in dynamfes, however, were made by Issac Newton (1642-1727), who is noted for his formulation of the thres fundamenial Jaws of motion and the law of universel gravitational attraction, Shordy after these laws were postulated, imporiant techniques for theit application were developed by Euler, D*Alembert, Lageange, and others 1.2 Fundamental Concepts Before we begin our study of engineering mechanics, it is important to ‘understand the meaning of certain fundamental concepts and principles. Basic Quantities. The following four quantities are used throughout mechanics. Length. Length is needed to locate the position of a point in space and thereby describe the size of a physical system, Once a standard unit of Jength is dofined, ono cin then quantitatively dofine distances and ‘geometric properties of a body as multiples of the unit lenge, ‘Tne. Time isconceived as a succession of events. Although the principles of statics are time independent, this quantity does piay an important role 4 the study of dynamics Mass, Massie a property of matter by which we can compare the action of one body with thet of another, This properly manifesis itself as @ Bravitationel attraction between two bodies and provides a quantitative ‘measure of the sesisianeo of matior to a change in velocity. Force. In general, forceisconsidered as e\‘push” or“pull”exerted by one body on another. This interaction can occur when there is direct contact between the bodies, suc as a person pushing on a wall, or i ean occur through a distance when the bodics are physically separated. Examples of the later type Inchude gravitational, eectrical,and magnetic forces. In any case, a force is completely characterized by its magnitude, direction, and point of application.Idealizations, Models or idealizations are used in mechanics in order to simplify application of the theory. A few of the more important idealizations will now be defined. Others that are noteworthy will be discussed at poinls whero they are needed. Particle, A particle has a mess, but a size tltat can be nogloctod, For example, the size of the earth is insignificant compared to the size of its orbit,and therefore the earth can be nrodeled as a particle when studying its orbital motion, When a body is Wdealized ae a particle the orinciples of ‘mechanics reduce to a rather simplified form since the geometry of the ‘body will not be involved in the anlysis of the problem. Rigid Body. A rigid body can be considered as a combinetion of 2 barge umber of particles in which oil the particles remain ata fixed disianee from ‘oaeanother both before and after applying a toad. As a result, the material properties of any body that is assumed to be rigid will not have to be contidered when analyzing the forees acting on the body. In most cases the actual deformetions occurring in structures, machines, mechentsmns, and tite fikeare telativelysmall, and the rigid-body assumption is suitable for analysis, Concentrated Fore A concentrated force represents the effect of a loading which ig azsumed (0 act at a point on a body, We can represent a load by a concentrated force, provided the area over which the load is, applied is verysmall compared :othe overall size of the body. An example. ‘would be the contact force between a wheel and the ground, Newton's Three Laws of Motion. The entire cubject of rigid body mechanics is formulated on the basis of Newvton's three laws of motion, the validity of which is based on experimental observation, They apply to the motion of a particle as measured from a nonaccelerating rofereace frame. ‘With reference to Fig, I-L, they may be briefly stated as follows, Fist Law. A pattice originally at rest, or moving in a straight Jine with, constant velocity, will remain in this stale provided the particle is not subjected to an unbalanced Forse, Second Law. A partie acted upon by an unbalanced force Fexpetiences an deceleration a thas has thesame direction as the force and a magnitude, that és ditectly proportional to the force.* TF F is applied to a pacticle of ‘mass 7,this uy may be expressed mathematically as Fe im a) Third Law, ‘The mutual forces of action and reaction between two articles are equal, opposite, and collinear, *Staied another ay the unbalanced force song on the pertcl is proportional te the time rate of change ofthe pucticl's acer moacatam. Seco 1.2 Fundamental Concepts + 5 PO ‘Aceeleced mation toweota cas reece AB S taceotB on Acton —reteton Bpit6 + CHAPTER 1 General Principles Newton's Law of Gravitational Attraction; shorly ater fomulating his three laws of motion, Newton postulated a law governing the gravitational attraction between any lvo particles Slaled mathematically, = otra Feomy (2) where F = force of gravitation between the two particles G = universal constant of gravitation; according (0 experimental evidence, G = 66.73(10°!) m3/(cg +3?) ‘my, Mr, = massol each of the two particles 1r= distance between the Iwo particles Weight. According to Eq. 1-2, any tvo particles or bodies have a ‘mutual attractive (gravitational) force acting between hem. In the case of a particle located at or near the surface of the earth, however, the only ravitalionol force having eny sizable magnitude is that between the earth and the particle, Consequently this force, termed the weight, will be the only gravitational force equsidered in our stirdy of mechanics, From Eg. 1-2, ve can develop an approximate expression for finding ‘the weight WW ofa particle havinga mass mt; = at. If we assume the earth to be a nonroiating sphere of corstart densily and having @ miss Mig = M,, then ifr fs the distance between the earth's ceater and the particle, we have mM, w=or3t 7 Letting g = GAfjs? yields Wamg aay By comparison with F = a, we term g the acceleration duc to gravity: Since it depends on r, it can be seen that the weight of a body is mot an absolute quantity. Instead, its magnitude is detertnined from where the measurement was mace, For most engineerlg calculations, however, g i Cetermined at rea level and at a latitude of 45°, whick i considered the “standard location.” 1.3 Units of Measurement “Ihe four basic quantities—force, mass, length and time~are not all independent from one another; in fact, they ate related by Newton's second law of motion, F ~ ma, Because of this, the units used to measure these quentities cannot aff be selected arbitrarily. The equality F = ms is maintained only if three of the four units, called base resis, are arbitrarily defined aod the foucth unit is then derived from the equation,SI Units, ‘Tae International Syotom of units; abbreviated SI after the French “Systeme Intemational d’Unités”’ is ¢ modern verston of the metzic system which has received workwide recognition, As shown in Tzble 1-1, the SI system specifies length in taotors (mn), tlm {n seconds (s), and mass in kilograms (Kg). The unit of foree, called a newton (N), is derived from B= ma Thiss, newton is aqual toa force required to give 1 kilogram of mass an acceleration of 1 m/s? (N = kg-m/s"), if the weight of 2 body located at the “standatd location” is to be determined in newtors, then Eq. 1-3 must be spplied. Here = 8.806 65 m/s?; however, for calculations, the valuc g = 981 m/s? will, be used. Thus, 9.81 myst) (4) ‘Therefore a body of mass 1 kg has a weight of 9.81 Na 2-kg body weighs 19,62 N, and 80 on, Fig. 1-2, W=me (g TABLE 1-1 © System of Units Newne Lenga Tine Mass Force intial ater nd orn a Re Meet Mom Te s) gem (3) Secnion 1.2. Units of Meaturemont + 7 be Hera 1.4 The International System of Units “The Sl aystom of unitsis usod extonsively in this book since itis Intended to become the worldwide standard for measurement, Consequently, the rules for its use and some of its terminology relevent to mechanics will now be provented. Prefixes, When a numerical quantity is cither very large or very small, the units used to define its size may be mocified by using a prefix. Some of the prefixes used in the ST system are shown in Table 1-2. Fach fepresents a multiple or submultiple of a unit which, if applied successively, moves the decimal point of a numesicat quantity to cvery third place, * For example, 4 000 006 N = 4.000 KN(Kilo-newetoa) = 4MiN- (sege-newtor), or (005m = 5mm (milli-meter), Notice that the SI system docs not include the multiple deca (10) or the submultipte centi (6.01), which form part of the metric system. Except for some volurne ande + CHAPTER 1 General Principles aroa measurements, the use of these prefixes is to be avoided In scleme an¢ engineering, Prelix eiga S mega M Kk Submadtiple . 0.001 10? milli m 6,000 001 106 micro # 0,000 000 081 10? an a ‘The Kilogram isthe only bass uni hot J dofned with 9 pret, Rules for Use. ‘The féliowing rules arc given for the proper use of the varfous ST symbok 1. Asymbol is never written with a plural “s,"since tt may be confused with the unit for second {s). 2. Symbols are alvays writien in lowercase letters, with the following exceptions: symbols for the two largest prefixes shown in ‘Table 1-3, siga and mega, are capitalized as G and M,respectively;and symbols named after an individual ere also capitalized, eg, N. 3. Quantities defined by several units which are multiples of one another are separated by a dot to avold confusion with prefix notation, us indicated by N—kg-m/s?~ kg-m-s% Also, m:s (meter-secoad), whereas ms (millisecond). 4, The cxponcntlal power represented for a unit having a prefix refers to both the unl and i prefix, For example, uN? = (IN? = aN: eN. Likewise, mm? represents (mm)? = mm- mm 5. Physical constants or numbers having several digits on either side of the decimal point shonld be reported with a space between every Gree digits rather than with « voma; ©.g.,73 569.213 427. In the case of four algits on cither side of the cecimel, the spackne is optionalt.g,,8537 or 8 537, Furthermore, ahvays try to use decimals and ayold fractions; that is, write 15,25 not 15; ‘When performing calculations, represent the numbers in tenms of thettSecnon 4.4 The International System of Units = base or derived sntts by converting ail prefixes 'o powers of 10, The final result should then be expressed using a single prefix. Also after calculation, itis best to keep numerical values between Q1 and 1000; otherwise, a suitable prefix should be chosen, For exemple, {50(20°) NI[SO(19°°) ma} 3000(10-S) Nem = 3(10-9) Nem = 3mNem 4. Compound prefixes should not be used tg, kus (kilo-micro- second) should be expressed as ms (millisecond) since kas = 107 )(10) s = 100%) s = ims, 8. With the exception of the base unit the kllogram, in general avoid the use of a prefix ia the denominator of composite units, For example, do not write Nimm, but rather kNim; also, nvmg should ‘be written as Mike, 9. Although not expresood in maltiples of 10, tho minute, hour, ete, are retalned for practical purposes a multfples of the second. Furthermore, plane angular measurement is made using radiars (rad), In this book, however, degrocs will offen be used, where 180" = mrad, (50 kN}(60 nm} 1.5 Numerical Calculations Numerical work inengineering practices most often performed hy using. handheld calculators and computers, It is important, however, that the answers to any problem be reported with both justifiable accuracy and appropriate slgnificant figures. In thissection we will diseuss these topics together with some other intportant aspects involved fr all engineering calculations, Dimensional Homogeneity. ‘The terms of any equation used to deseribe a physical process must be dimensionally homogenteous; that & each term must be expressed in the same units, Provided this is the case, all the termsa¥ an equatfon can then be combined if aurnerical values are substituted for the variables Consider, for example, the equation vi + da? where, in SI unis, i the position ia meters, m, 1s time in seconds s,s velocity in mfs,and ais accelerationin m/s”. Regardless of how this equation is evaluated, it maintcins its dimensional homogeneity. 4m the form stated, each of the three terms is expressed in meters,10 CHAPTER 1 General Principles Im, (10/2), (mn/#*)s*,} or solving for a, a = 2s/f — 2u/t, the terms are each expressed in units of m/s? [nn/5", m/s, (ansys]. ‘Since problems in mechanics involve the solution of dimensionally homagencous equations, the fact that all ternts of am equation are represented by a consistent set of untts can he used as a partial check for algebraic manipulations of an cquation. Significant Figures, ‘The accuracy of a number is specified by the uber of significant figures it contains. A significant fignre is any dig, including a zero, provided it is not used to specify the location of the ecima! point for the number. For example, the numbers 5¢04 and 34,52 ‘each have four significant figares, When numbers begla or end with zer06, however, it is difficult to tell how meny significant figures arc in the number, Consider the number 400, Doesit have one (4), or perhaps two (40), or three (400) significant figures’ In order to clarify this sttuation, the umber should be reported using powers of 10, Using engineering ntation, the exponent is displayed in multiples of three in order to facilitate conversion of SE units to those having an appropriate prefix. Thas 400 expressed to one sigaificatt figure would be 0.4(10%), Likewise, 2500 and 0.00546 expressed to three significant figures would be 2.50(10") anc 5a6(107). Computers are often used in engineering for advanced design and analysic. Rounding Off Numbers, For numerical calculations, the accuracy obtained from ‘he solution of a problem generally can naver be better than the aecuracy of the problem data. This is what 's 10 be expected, but often handheld calculators or computers involve more figures in the answer then the number of significant figures used for the data, For this reason, a calculated result should always be “rounded off” to an appropriate number of signiffeant figures. ‘To convey appropriate accuracy, the following rules for rounding offa number to » significant Gguzes apply + Iter + 1 dight Is fess than 5, the 1+ 1 dight and others following. it ere cropped, For example, 2.326 and 0.451 rounded off to 1 ~ significant figures would be 2.3 and 0.45, + ifthe # + 1 digit is cqual to 5 with zeros following it, thea round off the nih digit to an even tuber, For exaraple, 1.248(10°) and 0.8555 rounded off to x = 3 significant figures become 1.24(10°) and 0.866, + tie a+ 1 diglt is greater shan 5 or equal to 5 with any nonzero digits following t,then incvease the ath digit by and drop the n + 1 digit and others following it, For example, 0.723 87 and 565.500 3 rounded off to n = 3 significant figures become 0.724 and 566, Calculations. Asa general rule, to ensure accuracy of a final result when performing calculations on a pocket calculator, always celain a gxenter number of digits than the problem date. f possible, try to work o the computations so that numbers which are approximately equal are not subtracted since accuracy is often lost from this calculation. Ja engineering we generally round off final answers to /hree significant figures since the data for geometry, loads, and other measurements are often reported with this accuracy.* Consequently, in this book the intermediate calculations for the examples are often worked out to four ignificant figmes and the answers are generally reported to three significant figures. *Of cuts, some numbers ancl as m, €or nurnbere clin derived formes are eavet aud ace therefore accurate Io an infate neues of sigafiart Gore, Secrow 1,5 Numerkcal Calculations + 1412+ CHAPTER 1 General Principles Evaluate cach ofthe following and express with ST units having an appropriate prefix: (a) (50 mN)(6 GN), (b) (400mm)(0.6 MNY, (8) 45 MN7/900 Ge Solution First convert cach number le bate units, perform the indicated opera- dons, then choose aa appropriate prefix (See Rule 6 on p.9).. Part (a) (20. mN}(6 GN) ~ (5010) NGA) N] = 300(105) N? . 5) ae 28) (aN) 30000 ong age = 300 KN? Ans. Note carefully the convention KN? = (KN)? = 10° N?(Ruied onp.9). Bue ) , (400 mm)(0.6:MIN)? = [460(107) mn][0.6(10°) NP. = (4001107) m)[0.36(107} N?] = 148(10°) m+ N? = 144 Gm: N? Ans, “We ean abo write MN\/ 1 MN ean = scahian ) 1aa(10P ym? = 144(10%) mT) oeae = 0.144 m+ MN? ar cep AS(HO8NY 900( 70°) ke = 0.05(10) Nk, = 005(10'2) (4 45. MINY/900Ge = = 0,05( 10") kN kg, . = 50 kN Ykg Ans. “Here we have vsed Rules 4 and & on p. 9,Secrion 1,6 General Procedure for Analysis = 13 1.6 General Procedure for Analysis “The most effective way of learning the principkis of engineering, mechanicsis to solve problems, To be successful at this {ts iteportant to always present the work in a logical and orderly manner, as suggested by the following sequence of steps: 1. Read the problemcarefully and tryto correlate the ectual physical situation with the theory studied. 2. Draw any necessary diagrams and tabulate the problem data. 3, Apply the relevant principles, generally ia mathemattoal form, 44, Solve the necessary equations algebraicaly as far as practical, then, making sure they are cimensionaly homogeneous, use a consistent set of units ané complole the solution numerial’y.Report the ansiver ‘with no more significant figores than the accuracy of the given data, S. Study the answer with technical judgment and common sense 19 determine whether or not it gooms reasonsble, ‘When solving problems, do the work a5 neatly as possible. Boizg neat generally worse ilmulates clear end orderly thinking, ‘ad view vers. Statics i the study of bodies that are atrest or more with constant velocity. A particle bas a mass but a size that can be neglected. A rigid body does not deform under load, * Concentrated forees are assumed to act at a point on a body. ‘Newton's three laws of motion should be memorized. Mass is @ property of matter thet docs aot change ftom one location to another, ‘Weight refers to the gravitational attraction of thecarth on a body ‘or quantity of mass, Its magnitude depends upon the elevation at which the mass is located. In the SI system the Unit of foree, the newton, is a derived unit. “The meter, second, and tilogram are base unit, Prefixes G, M, k, m, #, 2 are used to represent large and sntall mumerical quantities. Their exponential size should be kown, along with the rules for using the SI units, Perform mumterical calculations to several significant figures and then report the final answer te three significant figures, Algebraic manipulations of an equation can be checked in pert by verifying that the equation remains dimensionally homogencous. ‘Know the rules for rounding off numbers.44+ CHAPTER 1 General Principles ee PROBLEMS JA. Round off the following numbers to three sigiicant Sgares: (a) 4.65735 m, (6) 55.578 (6) 4355 N. (2768 ke 4:2, Represent cach of tho followiag quantities in the correet Si form asing an aporopriate prefix: (e) 0.600424 ke, (0) 353000) N, (¢) 0002 km. +153. Represent exc of the following combinations of «arts inthe correct Si form using. an appropriate prefix: {a} ins, (6) eke, (¢) esimg, anal (A kn 1-4, Evaluate each ofthe fllowing and express with an ppraprint profs (6) (429 ke, (6) (0002), end © Gm). +S. Repreveat each of the folowing combivastons of units ix the correct SL forsu: (8) kNY/js, (0) Mea, and (6) MN/(ka ms). 1-6, Whatis the weight in newtens of aa abject that has nessa (1) 10kg, (2) 05 g, (A 50 Mg? Express the recut to three significant figures Use ax appropriate profi, 1-7, Evaluate cadh of the following to three significant Ogres and express each answer Ix SL units usiog an appropricte predix. (a) 354 mg(45 kniy(0.035 6 KN), 4b) (06453 gX201 ms) (6) 435 MAINZ? mam. "1-8 ‘Two particles have a mass of 8 kg oud 12 be, respectively: I'they ave 80mm apart, determine the force of gravity acting benween them. Compare this result with the weight of each particle. 19. Determine the mass of ax object that bas a weight ‘of (a) 20 miN, (b) 150 IN, (-) 60 MIN Express the answer to three significort figures, AO Using tho bare uaits of the $I system, chow that Eg. 1-2 [6 + dlmenstonally homogencous equation which gives # in newtons Determine to three significant figures the gravitational force acting between two spheres that are touching each otter. The mass of egch sphere is 200 kg and the redius is 300 mma. TUL. Evaluaic cach of the following to duee significant figures and express each gnswer in SI units «sing an appropriate prefix: (a) (0.631 Mm) f 6.60 ke)’, 6) (35 mm)? (48 keP2 \ : : be | ‘This communications tower is stablized ky cables that exert forces atthe points of connection. In this chapter, we will show how te determine the magnitude and direction of the resultant force at each pointona *® | Force: Vectors (cima scare 4 To show how to add forces and resolve them into components using the Parallelogram Law. «To express force and position in Cartesian vector form and explain hhow to determine the vector’s magnitude and direction. + To introduce the dot product in order to determine the angle between two vectors or the projection of one vector onto another. 2.1 Scalars and Vectors Most of the physica! quantities in mechanics can be expressed mathematically by mesns of scalars and vectors. Scalar. A quaatity characterized by a positive or negative numb called acre, For exsnipic,inass volume, and length are aalar quantities ‘often used in statics, In this book, scalars are indicated by letters in itaie type, sucias the sear A. Vector. A vecioriss quantity that hasboth a magnitude and direction. Jattaties the vector guentities frequently encountered ore position, force, and moment, For hardwritten work,a veetor i generally represented by @ letter wita an arrow written over it, such és A. The magnitude is designated [Al or simply A. In this book vectors wilt be symbolized in ‘boldface type; for example, A is used to cerignate the vector “A.” Its ragnitude, vhieh is always a positive quanti, issymbolized in italic type, ‘writen as [AI, orsimply 4 wlienit is understood that 4 isa positive scater. ‘A veeior is represented gunphicaly by an arrow, which is used todefine ”18 + CHAPTER 2 Force Vectors Line of Aetion Hest Bez its magnitude, direction, and sense. The magnitude of the vector is the ength of the arrows, the directton is detined by the angle between a reference azis and the arrow's Tine of action, and the sense is incicated by the arrowhead, For example, the veetor A shown in Fig. 2-1 has magnitude of 4 units,a direction which is 20° measured counterclockwise from the horizontal als, and a sense whi is upward and to the sight ‘The point O is called the taif of the vectou, the point P the tip or head. 2.2 Vector Operations eetur A and it nega covatepat D Fig 22 aA Soar NulipBoaticn nd Division ® goa Multiplication and Division of a Vector by a'Scalar. The product of vector A and roelar a, yiolding aA, is defined as a voctor having & magnitude lal. The sense of aA Is the same as A provided ais positive; itis apposite to A if ais negative. In particular, he negative of a veclor is formed by multiplying the vector by the scalar (—1), Fig. 2-2. Division of a vector by a scalar ean be defined using the lavs of multiplication, since A/a = (1/a)A.a # 0. Graphic examples of these operations are shown, in Fig. 23. Vector Addition. Two vectors A and B such as force or position, Fig, 2-4a, may be added to form a “resultant” vector R = A + B by using the parallelogram law.To do this, A end B are joined at their tails, Hig 2-4, Parallol Hines drawn from thehead of ezch vector interwect at @ ‘common point, thereby fonmning the adjacent sides of a parallelogram, As shown, the resultant Ris the diagonal of the parallelogram, which extends from the tails of A and B to the intersection of the lines. ‘We can also add B to A using a 7zangle constuction, which is a special case of the parallelogram law, wheteby vector B is added to vector A in a“*boad-to-iail” fashion, i.e, by connecting the head of A to the tail of B, Fig 2-4e, The resultant R extends from the tell of A to the head of B, In asimitar manner, R can also be obtained by adding A to B, Fig.2-4d. BY comparison, itis seon that vector addition is commutative; in other words, the vectors cen be added in either order, ie, R= A +B = B+ A, BA Prllelogsan Law ‘Tiangle contruction ‘Trianglo conseuction o an) @ Vector Addition Hg24As a special case, if the two vectors A and B are collétenr, jc, both have the same line of action, the parallelogram law reduces to an algebraic or sealar addition R = A+ B, as shown in Fig. 2-5 Vector Subtraction. The resultant difference between twio vectors A and B of the same type may be expressed as R =A-B=A + (-B) ‘This vector sum is shown graphically in Hig, 2-6, Subtraction is therefore defined as a special case of addition, so the rules of vector addition also apply to vector subtraction, > “7 Parlielegrn aw Vector Subeaction Hg26 Resolution of Vector. A vector may be resolved into two “compoaen's” having knows lines of action by using the parallelogram Taw, For exemple, if R ta Fly, 2-7a is to be resolved into components acting along the lines « and b, one starts at the lend of R and extends a line paraliel toa until it intersects b. Likewise, line parallel to bis draum from the Head of R to the poin! of intersection with a, Fig, 2~Ta. The two components A and B ere then drawn such that they extend from the tail OF R to the peints of intersection, as shown in Fig, 27h, Stcrou 2.2 Vector Operations + 19 => x = pease Addon of colinezr ves Hg2s ‘Teangle consrection \ Result R a ° —-» Compamente 6 Extend paral Woes trom he nead oF to form components o Reschuton ofa Yetor Hig.2-7 »20 + CHAPTER 2 Fotce Vectors 2.3 Vector Addition of Forces Experimental evidence has shown that a force is a vector quantity since _Te it has a specified magnitude, dircction, and sense and it adds according to the paratielogram law. 1Wo common problerss in statics involve either finding the sesaitant force, knowing its components,or resolving a known force into two components As described in Sec, 2.2, both of those problems require application of the parallelogram taww, Tf more than two forces are to be adder, successive applications of the paralislogvam lavy can be carzicd out in order to obtain the resultant force. ° For example, if three forces F, F, Fy acl at a point O,Fig,2-8, the resultant oF any two of the forces i foxind-—say, Fy + Ky—ane then this resuitant is added to the third forc, yielding the resultant of all three Forces: ic, Fp = (Fy + He) + By, Using the parallelogtam iaw to add mote than IWo forces, as shown here, cen requires extensive geometric and trigonomettic calculation to determine the numerical valves for the magnitude and irectioa of the resuftant. Instead, problems of this type are easily sotved by using the “rectangalarcamponen’ method," waich is explained in Soc. 2.4 Bary Rm “Uwe know the forees F, art Rp that the two chains a and b exert on the hadk, we can fird their resultant force F, by using the paraelogzam law-This requises drawing fines parallel to 2 and 6 fom the Leeds of F, and Fy as shown thus forming 4 parallelogram. na sinilar manncr,if the force F, alongchain ctskuown, thenits two components E, and Py, that act along @ aed b,can be deteemiced from the rarallelogenm lave “Hore we aut otatt ct the head of F- and coxstruet lincs parallel to a and b, thereby foraing the poxallelogian,Section 23, Vector Addition of Forces + 24 PROCEDURE FOR ANALYSIS Problems that involve the addition of two fortes can be solved as follows: Paratlelogratn Lav. + Make avketch showing the vector edition nsing the parallelogram tax, + ‘Two “component” forces add according to the parallelogram la, yielding a resuttant Torce that forms the diagonal of the parallelogram. + If a force is to be resolved into components along two exes Girected from the tail of the force, then start at the head of the force and construct lines parallel to the axes, thereby forming the parallelogram. The sides of the peratletogram represent the components © Label all the known and unknowa force magnitudes and the angies on the sketch and identify the two unknowns. Trigonomeny. «© Rediraw a half portion of the parallelogram to illustrate the triangular head-to-tail addition of the components. © The magnitude of the resultant force can be determined from the lay of cosines, and its disection is determined from the Taw of sines, Fig. 2-9, Cosine tn ‘+ The magnitude of two force components are determined from the CoAT TDA sa ¢ law of sines Fig, 2-9, Fig. 209 > A scalar is a powitive or negative number. A vector is a quantity thet has magniluce, direction, and sense, Multiplication or division of a vector by a scalar will change the magnitude of the vector, Ihe sense of the vector will change if the scalar is negative, As a special case, if the vectors are collinear, the resultant is formed by an algebraic or scalar addition,22 + CHAPTER 2 Force Vectors ‘The screw eye in Fig. 2-10q is subjected 10 two forces, Fy and Fp ‘Determine the magnitude and direction of the resultant force. on 7502 65" @ o @ Fig. 280 Solution Paraltelograet Lew. The parallelogram law of addition is shown in Fig, 2-10b. The two uaknowns are the magnitude of Fy and the angle 6 (heta). ‘Frigouomeny. From Vig. 2-106, the vector triangle, Fig, 2-100, is constructed. Fy is determined by using the law of cosines: Fy =\/ (100 NY + (150 N}* - 2(100N)(150 N) cos 115° = VIDUOT-F 2Z300 = W000 | 0.4226) = 212.6N 13 Ans. ‘The angle 8 is determined by applying the lav of sines, using the computed value of Fp, : g 150N ¢ i Sin 8 = 9 gy (0.9063) : 6= 98° “Thus the direction ¢ (phi) of Fy, measured from the horizontal, is ~ 39.89 + 15.09 = 54.8" <2? Ans.‘See10N 2.3. Vector Addition of Forces » 23 Resolve the 1000-N (~ 100-kg) fore acting on the pipe, Fig. 2-114, into the (a) x and y directions, and (b) x’ and y directions, © Fe @ Solution In each case the parallelogram law is used to resolve F into its two components, and then the vector triangle is constructed to determine the numerical results by trigonometzy. Part (a), The vector addition F = F, + F, is suowa in Fig. 2-11. In particular, note that the Iength of the components is scaled along the x and y axes by fist constructing Lines from the tip of F parallel to the axes in accordance with the parallelogram law. From the vector triangle, Fig 2-216, F, = 1000Ncos 40” = 766 Ans, F, = 1000Nsin 40° = 643 Ans. Patt (b). ‘The vector addition F = Fy + Fy is shown in Fig. 2-11¢. Note carefully how the parallelogram is constructed. Applying the faw ‘of énecand using the data listed on the voctor triangle, Fig. 2-L1e, yielda Fy _1000N 4 in 50° sin 60 sin 5" sin Ans. ©24 + CHAPTER 2 Force Vectors ‘The force F acting on the frame shown in Hig. 2-L2e hes « megnitude of 500 N and is to be resolved into two components acting along members AB and AC, Determine (ie angle 6, measured below the horizontal, so that the component Exe is directed from A toward C sand has s magnitude of 400 N. / oy o Solution @ By using the parallelogram law, the vector addition of the two components yielding the resultant is shown in Fig. 2-12. Note p22 carefally how the resultant force is resolved into the two components E42 end Fe, which have specified lines of action. The corresponding vector triangle is shown in Fig, 2-12e. ‘The angle } can be determined by using the law of sines: 400N _ S00N sing ~ sin 60° sing = (BR) sin 60° = 0.6928, S00N erie > Hence, . be sn f @ = 180" — 60° — 439° = 761° Sy Ans, or han Using this value for 0, apply the law of cosines or the lew of sines and o show that Fag has a magnitude of 561 N. yen tO Notice that F cen also be cirected et an angle@ atove the horizontal, as shownin Fig 2-12¢, and still produce the required componert Fyc. “ Show that in this case 6 = 161° and Fag = 161.N.Section 2.3 Vector Addition of Forces - 25 aes g 52, The ring shown in Fég. 2-132 is subjected to tWo forces, F, and Fp, If it is. required thal thercouttoal force havea magnitudeot 1 kN and be directed vertically downward, determine (a) the magnitudes of and F; provided 4 = 30%, end (b) the magnitudes of F, and if his to be a minimum, 0 N a “hse, hao ° Hg is Sotution 100088 Fan (a. A sketch of the vootor addition according to the parallelogram law is shown in Fig, 2-136, From (he vector triangle constructed in Fig. 2-13c, the unknown magnitudes # and 5 are determined by using the law of sines: An. ° Fy Ans. Fart (6), 1£8 is not specitied, then by the vector triangle, Fig, 2-134, ; may be added to F, in various ways to yield the resultaat 1000.N foree.u particular, due minima: Yength or magnitude of Fy will occur FR 1000 ‘whem its line of actionis perpendicular io F;. Any other direction, such as OA or OB, yields a larger value for J, Hence, when @ = 90" - 20° ='70°, F is minimum. From the triangle shown in Fig 2-13¢. it is seen that i) = 1000 sin 20°N = 940N Ans, By = 1000 cos 70°N =: 342N Ans. °26 + CHAPTER 2 Force Vectors PROBLEMS 24. Detemmine the mageitede of the resultent forse F, = Fy + Kanditsdicection measwed ounterclociovise from the positive x axis, =e 22, Determine the magnitude of the resultant force if: @ Fe =F + Be (0) Fe Prob.2-2 23, Determine the magnitude of the resultant force Fy = R + Banditedirection, mezsured counterclockwise: frome the posttive x axis Fema Preb2-3 $24, Determine the magnitute of the resultant force Fp © Fy + F; and ite direction, measured dockwive from the positive w axis 25, Resolve the forte By into components acting along the wand v axes and determine the maguitudes of the components, 26. Resolve the force I into componen's acting along then and v mes and determine the magnitudes of the ‘components, . ny vrs ” > Fr 300N Fys00N y Pavbs, 4186 22, Theplate is subjected to tne two forces at A and B as shown. If @ = O°, determine the magnitude af the resultant of these two forces and jis directicn mearured, from the hosizontes, “28, Determine the angle 0 for connecting member A to the plate 0 thet the resultant force of Fy and Fp is directed horizontally to the right, Also, what is the magnitude of the restitant force. Peobe.2-7129, Tho vertical force Pacts dawnwosd at A oi the two- membered frame. Detennine the amagritudes of the two components of F directed slong the axes of AB ard AC. Set F = SON. 210 Sol Prob 2-9 with F = 350N, Promems = 27 2:13. ‘The SOON force actiog on the frame ie to be reselved into nwo components acting aloag the axis of the sUtuls AB and AC. IE the component of forve along ACis, required to be 300 N, directed from A to €, determine ‘the mnagoitude of force ecting slong AB ard the angle @ of the S00-N Fores. Pres, 2-910 24 The force acting on the gear tooth Is F = 20 N. Resolve this force into two companents acting slong the lines cr and bh. 22.12. The component of force F acting along line aa is require to be 3ON Determine the magnituce of F and ite ccompanent along line bb. 2A, ‘The post is to be palled aot of the ground usiag, two ropes. and B. Rope A is subjected to a foree of (600 N and is directed al 60° from the horizonial I the resultant force acting on the post is to be 1200 N, vertically upward, dotormine the force T in rope B and the conresponding angle 6, Peub. 2-1428 + CHAPTER 2. Force Vectors 215, Determine the design angle 9(0° = 0 = 90°} for strut AB so that the 402-N horizontal force has a component of SUO-N directed from A towards C. What i the component of foree acting alcng member Ai? Take go 40%, 22:15, Determine the design angle $[0° = ¢ = 90°) Detwcen struts AB and AC so thet the 4D0N horizontal force has a component of 600-N which acts up ta theieft, in the same ditcetion as from B towards A.Take @ = 30°. 27, The chisel exests 6 force of 200.N on the wood dowel rod which i tumiag in @ tathe. Resolve this force into components acting (a) along the and axes end (b) along the xand y axes 248. Two forces are applicd at the ond of w screw oye in order to remove the post. Detexmine the angle (0° $8 = 94°) and the magnitude of force F so that the resultant force ating onthe post is directed vertirlly ‘upward and bas « iegnitude of 750.N. Prob, 218 219. IF, = Fy= 300N determaice the angles # and @ s0 thet the resultant forec is directed along the positive axis and has a magnitude of Fy = 200, Prob, 247 Peob.219922), ‘The track is to be towed using tio ropes, Determine the mognitude of foceee F ond Fy acting on teach rope in order to develop 2 resultant force of S0.N directed along the positive x axis Set # = 50°. Prob. 2-20 2-21. “The truck is to be towed using two ropes, If the resultant force is to be 950N, directed atong the postive x aris, determine the maguitudes of forces By and Fy ‘acting on each rope and the augle of & of Fy 0 that the magnitude of Fy is a minimus. W acts at 20° from the x anisas shown. Prosteus « 29 2.22 Determine the magnitude and direction of the resultant Fg =F +P 1 Fy of the three forces by fist finding me resultant FF, 4%, and then forming Epa P+ By, 223. Determine the magnitude and direction of the resultant Fa F, + Ya +B of the three forces by firs finding the resultant PF -+ Fy and then forming Ree hh. Rem Probe 22203 "224. Resolve the SOON foree into components acting along (2) the x aad y axes, nud (b) the x and y" axes. Prob. 2.21 Preh,2-2430 + CHAPTER? Force Vectors 225. The log is boing towed by two trectors A and 2, ‘Determine the magnitude of the two towing forees Fy ard ‘Xp fits scqnired thatthe resultantforee have amagnitnde Fy = JOEN ane be dizected along the x aris Set = 15° 2.26. If the resultant Fy of the two forces acting om the log isto be dizeted along the positive x ania and have signage of 19 KN, dcteriine the angle @ of te cable, attached to B such that the force Fy in this cable 1s ‘mininom. What is the magnitude of the force in each cable forth cituation? Prob 22526 3 2.27, "Ihe beam is to be hoisted two chains Dotermine the magaitudes of forces Fa and Ky acting, fon each chain in onder to develop a resultant force of 600 N directed along the positive y axis, Set d= 45°, 72-28, ‘The beemistobe hoisted using two chains Ifthe resultant force is to b¢ 600 N. divested along the postive 1 asis, dotermine the magnitudes of forces F, and Fy ‘acting on cach chain and the orientation 0 of Fy 40 that the magnitude of Kp is ¢ minimum. Ky acts at 30° from the y axis as dliown, = Ry 2:29. Thuce ching acton thc bracket such thet they excete aarosultant force having a magnitude of 30D N. If two of he chains are subjected to known forces, shown, determine the orientatios of the tire chain, measured clockwise from, (he pealive x axis s0 that the mignituce of fore F in thie aia a zaininunn, lL forces lic in tae -y plane. What is the mageitude of FY Hint First find the cesultant of the two known forces Force F acis in shi direction 200 Prob, 2-20 2M, “Three eabtes pullon the pipe such that they create a resuttant force having a magnitude of 900 N. If two of the cables are gubjested to known forces as shown in the figure, determin the éiroctioa 0 of the third cable so that the magatwe of force F in this cable is a minim. AU forces lic in the x-y plate, What is the magnitnde of F? Hine: Fiest find the resultant of the two known forets, x Frub.2-30Section 2.4 Addition of 2 System of Coplanar Forces = 31 2.4 Addition of a System of Coplanar Forces When the resultant of more than two forces hes to be obtained, it is easier to find the components of cach foree along specified axes, add these components algebraically, snd then form the resultant, rather than form the resultant of tke forces by successive application of the parallelogram lew as discussed in Sec. 2.3, In this section we wil resolve each force into its rectangular components Ey end F,, which We along the x and y axes, respectively, Fig, 2-L4e, Altaough, the axes are horizontal and vertical, they may in general be directed at any inclination, as Jong as they remain perpendicular to one another, Fig. 2-14b, In either case, by the parallelogram la, we reuuire Feith, and FaR+8 ‘As shown in Fig. 2-14, the sense of direction of each force component srepresented graphically by the arrowhead. For nvualytical work, however, ‘we must establish a notation for representing the ditectional sense of the rectangular components This can be done in one of two ways, Scalar Notation. Since the x and y axes have designsted positive and negative directions the magnitude and directional sense of the rectangular ‘components of e force cen be expressed in terms of algebrate scalars, Kor ‘example, the components of F ia Fig. 2-14a can be represented by positive scalars F, and F, since their sense of direction is wlong the posiive x and -yaxes respectivély.Jn 2 similar menaer, he components of Fin Hig, 2-145 are Fi, and —F%, Here the y component is negative, since By is directed along the negative y axis. tis important to keep in mind that this scalar notation is to be used only for computational purposes, not for graphical representations in figures, Throughout the book, the head of a vector arrow in any figure indicates the sense of the vector graphically, elgebreicsigns are not used for this purpose. Thus, the vectors in Figs. 2-i4a and 2-14 are designated by using boldface (vector) notation.* Whenever italic symbols are written, near vector arrows ia figures they indicate the snagnittade of the vector, which is alvays a positive quantity. “Negative signs are used only in figures with boldface rotation when shawirg equal but oppenite pai of sectors 28 in Fg. 2-2 @ ” Fig 2-1432 CHAPTER 2 Force Vectors Cartestan Vector Notetion, It is elso possible to represent the components of a foree in terms of Cartesian unit vectors, When We do this the methods of vector algebra are easier to apply, and we will sce that this becomes particularly advantageous for solving problems in three dimensions. Tn two dimensions the Cartesian unit vectors { and j are used to cesignate the directions of the x and y axes, respectively, Fig. 2-150." “These vectors have a dimensionless magnitude of unity, and their sense (or arrowhead) will be described analytically by # plus or minus sign, depending on whether they are pointing along the positive or negative Or y exis, Asshown in Fig, 2-15a, the magnitude ofeach component of Fis always a positive quartity, which is reprosonted by the (positive) scalars F, and Fy. Therefore, having established nofation to represent the magnitude and the direction of each vector component, we can express F in Fig. 2-15e os the Cartesian vector, FoRi+ 4) And in the same way, F" ia Fig. 2-156 can be exprested as Fora t F(-D or simply FAH PG if i 7 ¥ Sa Fig. 215 eI ‘Wfor handwritten work, unit vestos: are uuelly indicated using.a circumflex, ogy f and j.Secnow 2.4 Addition of a System of Coplanar Forces + 33 Coplanar Force Resultants. Ether of te Wo methods just described can be used to determine the resultant of several coplanar forces. To do this, each force is first resolved into its x and y components, snd then fhe respective components aré addled using scalar algebra since they are collinear. The resultant force's then. formed by adding the resultant. of the x and y components using the parallelogram Isw. For example, consider the three concurrent forces in Fig. 2-16a, which havex and y components as shown in Fig. 2-168. To solve this problem using Cartesian vector notation, each force is first represented as a Cartesian VoCtOr, en Rast Fy R= -Bl+ Bl Ty- By - Fal ‘The vector resultant is therefore Tr=R+h +h = Rath - Bat Rj + Ba By = Ux ~ Bae + Bit Uy + By — By) = (Fed + (Fay)i It scalar nowtion is used, then, from Fig. 2-166, since « is positive to the right and y is positive upward, we have (4) Fe = Fix — Poe + Poe Gy Tay = Fiy + Bay — By These results are the same as the 4 and j components of Fx determined onthe general case, the x and y components of the resultant of ary number of coplanar forces can be represented symbolically by the algebraic sum of the x and y componeats of all the forees, ic, Fie = 3 Fay @1) ‘When spplying these equations, it is important to use the sign convention establisted for the components; end that is, components having a directions! sense along the positive coordinate axes are considered positive scalars, whereas those having a directional sense along (he negative coordinate ares are considered negative scalars. IF this convention is followed, then the signs of the resultant components ‘will specify the sense of these components, For example, a posit indicates that the component has a directional sense’ which positive coordinate direction, © Fig 2-1634 + CHAPTER 2 Force Vectors Fy ‘The resultant force of the four cable forces acting on the tapportiag bracket can be Sctemmined by aéding algebraically the sepasate x end y components of each cable fotoe. This resultant Fa produces the samie ulting effect on the ‘recket as all four cables. By e wip 26 - Once the resultan! components are determined, they may be sketehed along the x and y axes in their proper directions, and the resuttant force can be determined from veetor addition, #s shown ia Fig. 2-1ée. From (his sketch, the magnitude of Fy is then found from the Pythagorean theorem: that is, ” Fa= VFhat Fhy Also, the direction angle @, which specifies the orientation of the force, is cetermined from trigonometry: ‘The ebove concepts ere illustrated numerically in the examples which follow. IMPORTANT POUNTS: ‘The resultant of several coplanar forces cen easily be determined if an x, y coordinate aystem {s established and the forves eve resolved along the axes * ‘The direction of cach force is specified by the aagle its line of action makes with ore of the axes, or by a sloped triangle, «The orieatation of the x and y axes is arbitrary, and their positive direction ean be specified by the Cartesian unit vectors (and j- > The x and y components of the resultant force are simply the algebraic addition of the components of all the coplanar forces. ¢ The magnitudé of the resultant forec‘is deteunined from the Pythagorean thearem, and when the comporeats are sketched on the xaad yazes the direction can be determine& from trigonometrySect 2.4 Adcition of a system of Coplanar Forces - 35 Determine the x and y components of T and Fy acting om the boom shown in Fig. 2-174. Express cach forer es a Cartesian vector. Solution Scator Notation, By the paralletogran taw, fy is resolved into x and y components, Fig. 2-17b. The wiagnitude of each component is etcrmined by trigonometry. Sinee Fy actsin the —x direction,and Fy acts in the + direction, we have Fy, = 200 sin 30° N = —100N = 100N — Ans. Fy = 200 cus 30° N = 175 = T73Nt Ans, “Ibe force Fy is resolved into its x and y components as shown in Fig 2-17e. Here the sfope ofthe line of ation forthe force isindiented. From this"siope triangle” we could cbtaia the ange 0,e.g,,2 = tast and then proceed to determine the magnitudesof the components in the same manner as for F,. An easier method, however, consists of using, proportional parts of similar trianglss i.e, 2 12 MNT FE 2eon( 2) — 2406 Similarly, 3 Pay = 260%( 5) = 100 Notice that the magniwude of the hortcontal component, Ty, Was obtained by multiplying the force magnitude by the ratio of the horizontal leg of the dlope triangle divided by the hypotenvse} ‘whereas te magnitude of the vertical component, F,, was obtained by ‘muitiptying the force magritude by the ratio of the vertical leg divided by the hypotenuse Hence, using scalar notation, Fig = 240 = 240 N—> Ans my = —100N = 100N | Ans, Custesten Vector Noratton, Having determined the magnitudes and directions of the components of each force, we can express each force as ¢ Cartesian vector. F, = (- 1001 + 173} N Ans, R, = {2401 — 100)}.N Ans 200 er36 CHAPTER 2. Foren Vectors oT y @ » @ ‘The link in Fig. 2-180 is subjected to two forces F, ancl Fy, Determine the mageitude and orientation of the resultant force. Solution | Seiler Notation, This problem can be volved by using the parallelogram lavg, however, here we will resolve each force into its xand yeomponents, Fig, 2-i8b, and sum these components algebraically. Indicating the “positive” sease of the x aad y force components alongside each equation, we have Fa fae= 2S Fax = 600.605 30° N — 406 Sin 45” N -2368N—> +1 ay = BE Fey = 600 sin 3 N + 400 cos 45° N = 582.8NT “The resultant force, showa in Fi ~18c, has a magnitude of Fa = \/Q368 NP + (5828 NE ~69N Ans, From the voctor addition, Fig. 2-18e, the direction angle @ fe f S828N) _ @= ten (28) =619 Ans. Solution tt Cartesinn Yeetor Norartox. From Fig,2-38b, each fotee is expressed as a Cartesian vector {600 cos 30% + 600 sin 30%} N {400 sin 45° + 400 c08 4557} N Fp =F, + Fy = (600-008 30° N — 400 sin 45° NDF + (6ODsin 30° N+ 400 cuss 45° ND] = (236.81 + 582.8) N “Ihe magnitude and direction of Hp are determined in the same manner a8 shown above Compasing the to metheds of solution, note that use of scalar notation is more ellicient since the componeats can be found directly, without first havizigto express each force at a Cartesian vector before adding the components. Later Wwe will show that Cartesian vector analysis is very beneficial for solving three-ditnensionel problems.Secnou 2.4 Addition of a system of Coplanar Forces + 37 “The end of the boom O in Fig. 2-190 is subjected to three concurrent and coplenar forces, Determine the magnitude and orientatioa of the resultant force, A -a0ON a Fig. 219 Solusion Each force is resolved into its x atid y components, Fig. 2-195. ‘Suzming the x components, we have ty = DR Fx = ~400.N + 250 sin 45°N ~ 200(8)N 383.2N = 383.2 N— ‘The negative sign indicates that F, acts to the lefi, ie, in the negative x direction as noted by the small srrow. Summ:ing the y components yields Uf Fry = BE; Fry = 250 cos 45°N + 2003) N 96 8NT } The resultant force, shown in Fig. 2-19¢, has a magnitude of y . 2 & I Fy = \/(C3BRIN} + (29680) 3 awosn | 485 Ans. ‘From the vector addition in Hig, 2-1, the direction angle 9 is 2968 1( 2268) 37 5° aan ° o=tx(2) = 15 avs Note how eonventent It is to use this method, compared to «wo applications of the parallelogram law. °38 + CHAPTER? Force Vectors PROBLEMS 2-41. Determine the « end y components oF the S00N 2.33, Determine the magnitude of foree F ae that the farce, Tesuitant Fz of the three fosces is a5 small as possible. Prob, 2-34 ow Deeb 2-33 "2.32. Detecmine the magnitude of the resultant force und its direction, mesaured clockwise from the positive x axis 23d. Determine the magnitude of the resultant force ‘and its dlroction, measured counterclockwite from the positive x ex's, K=10N t Is. 708 Fe asn se Prob.2-22 Peb23t24S. Three forces act on the bracket, Determine the aguitudeard direction 9 of F sothat the resultant force isdlrected along the postive «” axis and has a magnitude of TKN. 92.3 KF, =300N acd 0 = 20", determine the smmgnitude ani direction, measured eounterciockwise from the x" axig af the resultant forve ofthe three forees acting con tae bracket. Probs.2-38136 2.37. Determine the magnitude and direction é of Fy so. thatthe resultact farce is directed vertieelly ypuard ard has a rargnitude of 800 N, 2-38 Determine the magnitude end direction measured, ‘exuatercladkwise fram the postive x axis of the resultant force of the three focces acting on the ring A. ‘Take Fp= DON and = 2, Prob. 3188 Proseus « 39 2:39, Express F, and Fos Corteslan vectors, 4240. Determine the magsitude of the resultant force and its ditection measured coucterciockwise from the positive x axis F=30KN Prob, 2-390 241 Solve Prob. 2-1 by summing the rectangular or 24) componeats of the forces io obtain the resuitatt force, 2-42 Solve Prob. 2-22 by surunirg the recenguler ot x,ycomponents of the foress toobtain the resultent force. 243. Determine the magnitude and orientation # of Fa so that the resultant farce is directed slong the Positive yaris acd hes a magnitude of 1500. #244 Determine the augnituds and oriestation, measured counterchockwise from the positive y axis of the resultant foroe acting on the bracket, it Fp = GOON and 0 = 26° Probe 2-a4t40 + CHAPTER 2. Force Vectors 245, Determine the x end y components of F and Fy. 2-46, Determine the magnitude of the resultant force ‘and its cirection, measured counterclockwise trem the positive = exis, x F-20008 fetson Probe 6 2-47, Determine the x ont y components of each force acting on the gusset plate of the bridge truss. Show that the realtan force kero, z Jinn rah, 2-47 42.48, If @= 60° aad F=20KN, determine the magaituce of the resultant force and it direction Measured elockwise trom the positive x axis, son 249, Devermine the magnitude and direction 9 of F480 that the resultant force is dicected along the positive x axis and has 2 magtitude of 1250 N. 2-50. Determine the magnitude end direction, measured ‘counterclockwise from the positive x avis of the resultent force acting om the Hing at O,if7, = SCN and 0 = 45° ros 2-49700 2.51. Express ezch of the three forces acting on the fcaluma in Cartesian vector form and compute the magnitude of the resultant foros, Prob.2-5142:82, The doo consusont forces acting on. he screw yepioducs a vesultant farce Fy ~ 0. It Fy ~ 27) end Fy, is to be SU? from Fy as shown, determine the required magnitude of F; expressed in lems of Fi and the angle 8, Promens + 44 254, Express oach of the three forces acting on the bracket in Cartesian vector form with vespect :othe x 2nd yanes Determine the magnitude and ditection @ of F s0 ‘that the vesultent force is directed along the positive x" aris and has a megeitide of Fy = CON, 251. Determine the magnitude of force F 50 that the resullaal Fp of the three forges is as small as possible. ‘What is the minimum magaitude of ¥,? se alan Prob. 2-8 ren, 2-54 2.88, Tho turve constrrent forces scting on the post produce u sultant force Fy = 0. It Fe = $F, and Fe {o be 99° from Ey at shown, determine the required magnitude F expressed in terms of A and the angle 6.42 + CHAPTER 2 Force Vectors 256, Three forces act on the bracket. Detormine the 25% Delemine the magnitude of force F 30 that the magnitude and ovientation 0 of so tha the resuitant resultant force of the three forces Is ay sina as possible fexce is dicected slong the postive w axis and has @ ‘What isthe magnitude of the resoltant force? iagnitude of 50 KN. 287. If F = 150 KN and 9 = 55°, determine the ‘magnitude and orientation meosured clockiwisefrom the positive x exis, of the resultant force of the ce forces acting on the bracket, Prob. 2-58 2.5 Cartesian Vectors Righi-banded enerdinate system, By 20 “The operations of vector algebra, when applied to solving problems in three dimenstons, are greatly simplified if the vectors are fist represented jn Cartesian vector form. Tn this section we will present a general method for doing this; thon in the next section we will apply this methed to solving problems involving the addition of forces. Similar applications ‘will be ilastrated for the position and moment vectors given in later sections of the book. Right-Handed:Coordinate System, A right-handed coordinate system will he used fof developing the theory of vector algebra that follows. A rectangular o Cartesian coordinate system is said to be right-handed provided the thumb of the right hand pointsin the direction ofthe positive axis when the right-hand fingers are curled about this axis ard directed from the positive x toward the positive y axis, Fig. 2-20. Furthermore, according to this rule, the z axis for 4 two-dimensional problem as in Fig. 2-19 would be ditected outward, perpendicalar to the page.Rectangular Components of a Vector. A.vcctor A may have onc, two, or three rectangular components along the x, y; z coordinate axes, depending on how the vector is oriented relative to the axes. In general, though, witen A is directed within an octant of the x y,« frame, Fig. 2-21, thea by two successive applications of the paradelogram fa, we may resolve the vector into components as A= A’ A, and then A’ = Ay + Ay. Combining these equations, A is represented by the ‘vector sim of its three rectangular components, AsA+AS +A, (2) Unit Vector. The dircction of A can be specified using u uait vector. ‘This vector is so named since it has amagnitude of 1. If Ais a vector having amagnitude A # 0, then the unit vector having the same direction 2s A. isrepresented by @) So that A= Aug ey Since A is of a certain type, eg, 4 force vector, it's customary to use the proper set of unlts for its descriptioa, The magattude A also has this samme set of units; hence, from Eq. 2-3, the unit vecior will be dimensionless since the units will cance! out. Fquation 2-4 therefore indicates that vector A may be expressed in terms of both its magnitude and direction separately: iz.,.A (a positive scalar) defines the magnitude of A, aad u, (@ dimensioniess vector) defines the direction and sense of A, Fig.2 22. Cartesian Unit Vectors, In thrce dimensions the set of Cartesian rinit vectors, i, j, K. is used to designate the directions of the x, yz axes respectively. As stated ia Seo. 2, the sense (or arrowhe2d) of these vectors will be described analytically by a plus or minus sige, depending on ‘whether they are pointing along the positive or negative x yor z axes. The positive Cartesian unit vectors are shown in Fg, 2-23, Fig. 2-23 Secon 2.5 Cartesian Vectors + 43 Be 22 Fg 22aa CHAPTER 2 Force Vectors Cartesian Vector Representation. Since the three components of A in Eq, 2-2 actin the positive, j, and k directions, Fig, 2-24, we can write Ain Certesian vector form az AS Alt AGT AK @5) “There is a distinct advantage to writing vectors in this manner, Note that the magnitude and direction of each component vecior are separated, and as @ result this will simplify the operations of vector algebra, particulatly in three dimensions, Magnitude of a Cartesian Vector. It is always possible to obtain the magnitude of A proviced itis expressed in Cartesian vector foam. As shown ia Fig. 2-25,from the colored right triangle, A = \/'A? + 43, and from the shaded right triangle, A’ = \/ Ai + Ad. Combining these equations yields A-Valeabe es Hence, the magnitude of A is equal to the positive square root of the stun Of the squares of ts components. Direction of a Cartesian Vector. ‘The orientation of A's defined by the coordinate direction angles a (alpha), 6 (beta), and y (gamma), measured between the dai? of A and the postive x, », zaxes located at the tail of A, Fig, 2-26, Note that regardless of where A is directed, each of these angies will be between 0" and 180°, ‘To determine a. 6, and y, consider the projection of A onto the x, y, z ‘axes, Fig. 2-27, Referring to the blue colored right triangles shown in cach figure, we have ‘These numbg7s arc known as the direcifon cosines of &. Once they have been obtained, the coordinate direction angles a, B, y can then be determined from the inverse casines, An casy way of obtaining the dircction dosines of A is to forma unit vector in the ditectionof A, Faq, 2-3. Provided A is expressed in Cartesian vector form, A= Ait Ajj + Age (Eq, 2-5), then© 4) where A = \/AE+ AP + Al Gq, 2-6), By comparison with Eqs 2-7, iUis seen that ee I, j, Kk Components of tg represent the direction cosines of Avie, a4 = 008 ai + cos fj + cos yk @s Since the magnitude of « vector is equal to the positive square root of the stm of the squares of the magnitudes of its components, and 1, has a magoitude of i, then from Fg, 2-9 an important relation between the direction cosines can be formulated as cota + cos? p+ cot y = (10) Provided vector A fies in a known octant, this equation can be used 10 determine one ofthe coordiaate direction angles ifthe other two are kaown. Finally, if the magnitude and coordinate direction angles of A are given, A may be expressed in Cartesian vector form as Boag = Acos ai + Acos Bj + Acos yk; Seenou 2.5 Cartesian Vectors + 4546 + CHAPTER 2 Force Vectors 2.6 Addition and Subtraction of Cartesian Vectors “The vector operations of aidition and subtraction of two or more vectors arc greatly simplificd if the vectors arc expressed in terms of their Cartesian components. For example, if A= A,l + Aj + A,k and Wa A+ Aj + Bb, Fig. 2-28, then the resultant vector, B, has components which reproscnt the scalar sums of the , j, k components of Aand B, ic, R=A+B=(4, + Bt (Ay + Bit (A. + BK ‘Vector subtraction, being a special case of vector addition, simply requires a sealar subtraction of the respectivei, j,k components of either Aor B, For exemple, R'~ A-B~ (A, - Bit (Ay— 8) € (A, - BK Concurrent Force Systems. Ifthe above concept of vector addition is generalized and applied toasystem of several concurrent forces, ther the force resultant is the vector sum oF all the forces in the system and can he written as Fig.2-28 [Fe > OF = IAI + 25) + 2K (2-12) (ap Bk Here F;, BF, até BF; represent the algebraic sums of the respective 45 y, 2 OF jj, Kcomponents of cach foree im the system. ‘The exeniples which follow illustrate numerically the methods wed to apply the above theory to the sclution of problems involving force as a vector quantity. “The focce ¥ that the tie-down rope exerts on the ground suppost at O is daccied atong the rope. Ustug the locat x,y 2 axes the ordinate direction angles, fi 7 can be measures. The cosines oftheir values form the components of a unit vecior w which acs in the direction of the cope. If the forse has a magnitude F, then the Force can ba wiitier fn Casterian vector form, a€ Fo Ru~ Feosat | Feoe Bit Fee 7k.Sccnon 2.6 Addition and Subtraction of Cartesian Vectors + 47 Cartesian vector analysis is often used to solve problems in three dimensions The positive direction of the x, yf z axes are defined -by the Cartesian unit veetors 1, j,k. resoectively _ “The magnitude of a Cartesian vector is A = \/A2 + AZ + AB © The direction of 2 Cartesian vector is specified using coordinate direction angles which the tail of the vector makes with the positive x, y, z axes, respectively. ‘The components of the unit vector w~ AJA represent the dircetion cosines of a, f y. Only two of the angles «, f, ¥ have to be specified. The third angle 's determined from the relationship cos*a + cos* B + cos*y = 1. ‘We find the resultant of a concurrent force system, express each force as 2 Cartesian vector and add the f, J, k components of all the forces in the system, Express the foree F shown in Fig. 2-29 es a Cartesian vector. Solution Since only two coordinate direction angles are specified, the third angle cc must be detemninsd from By.2-16; ic, i ! | | i cos!a + co 8 + easy | cod a + cos + cost a5? i | \ i cose = \/1 — (0.5)? = (0:707)' = 205 Hence, two possibilities exist, aamely, a= cos(05] = 6 or = cos"{-05) = 120° By inspection of Fig, 2-29, it is necessary that « = 60°, since Fis in the -+x direction. Using Eq, 2-11, with F = 2008, we have Fcosai + Fees 8] + F cos yk = (200 cos 60° N)i + (200 cos 60° Nj + (200 eos 45° N)k Pera {100.01 + 100.0) + 141.4k}N Ans. By applying Eq. 2-6, note that indeed the magnitude of F = 200N. baVR tht L = (100.0)? + (100.07 + (141.4)? = 200N48 «CHAPTER? Force Vectors Determine the magnitude and the evordinate direction angles of the resultant force acting on the ring in Fig, 2-300, y= (504 A+ 280 EN, B= (505-100) soo | Fy~ 6a) BOK I o @ Fig. 2 folution Since each force is represented fa Cartwsian veetor form, the resultant force, shown in Fig. 2-308, is Eg = BF = Fy + Fy = (Gj 41 80k} Ib +) (50: 100] + 100K} KN = {S01 ~ «Oj + 180%) KN ‘The magnitude of Fe is found from Fq.2-6, 1, Fy = (SO)? + (—40)? + (180) = 191.0 = 191 EN Ars, “The coordinate direction angles @, 8, 7 are Getermined from the components of the unit vector acting in'the direction of Fy. =e 4 280. Fa 1910" 1910"? 191.0 ~ 0.2617 - 0.2094) + 0.9422K ur, i ve that cosa ~ 02617 Ans. + cos = -0.2094 Ans. cosy = 9.9822 y= 19.6" Ans. ‘These angles are shown in Fg. 2-306. in perticular,note that # > 90° since the j component of uy, is negative.Scnon 2.6 Addition and Subtraction of Cartesian Vettors + 49 a—___.____________ Exprest the force K,, shown in Fig. 231 as a Cariesian vector. | Solution ‘The angles of 60° and 45° defining the direction of Fy are not coordinate dizection angles. The two successive applications of the parallelograrn lew needed to cesolve F, into iis x,y, z compouients are shown in Fig. 2-316. By tigonomety, the magnitudes of the components are Fig = 100sin 60° KN= 86.6 EN 1100s 60° KN= S0KN o Realizing that F,, has a direction defined by —j, we bave Fi = (254i — 35.4] + 86.6} KN Ant To show that the magnitude of this vector is Indeed 100 kN, apply Ey.2-6, fe Ver ri Re = VOSA) + (35.4)? + (86.6) = 100kN _ U needed, the coordinate direction angles of F can be determined from the components of the unit vector acting in the direction of Fi. Heace, 0k Hy Ficyy Finy, ity = 0.3841 — 0354] + 0.865k y= 100 kN so thet a, ~ cos1(0.354) = 693° Px = cos D354) = 111° n= cos 40.866) = 300° “These results are shown In Fig 2-31e. Using this sarae method, show that F, in Fig, 2-3le can be weilten jn Cartesian vector form as BR, = {1068 + 184j — 2121} kN Ans. © fg.28150+ CHAPTER? Fores Vactors ‘Two forees act on the hook shown in Fig. 2-324. Specify the coordinate Girection angles of Ff so that the resultant force Fx acts along the positive y exis and has a magnitude of 800 N. Solution ‘Tosolve this problem, the resultant force Kp and its two components, , and F,, wilt each be expressed in Cartesian vector form. Then, a8 shown in Fig. 2-324, it is necessary that Fg = Fi + Fe. Applylag Eq. 2-11, Fy = Ficosay) + Foes 8 + Foosyik + 300 cos 60° Nj + 300cor 120° & = (2121+ 150} — 150k} N Re Alt Fyl + ik Since the resultant force Fg has a magnitude of 800 IV and acts in the +] direction. Fe = (BOON)(+§) = {800} N We require Feo K+ Fe 800] = 212.11 + 150) ~ 150k + Figl + Fag) + Fick 800] = (212.1 + Fiy)i + (150 + By)i + (~150 + Ay )ie ‘To setisfy this equation, the corresponding i, j, k components on the left and right sides must be equal. This is equivalent to stating that the % % z components of Fr must be equal to the corresponding x, 5 z components of (F) +R). Henes, OR 212d + Hy Figs 20 800= 1504+, Fay = SON , O= 1504 %, i, = 1S0N Since the magnitudes of I end its components are known, We can use Eq, 2-11 to Getermine as, Bp, Yo 12.4 . 700 ‘) = 208 Ans, 22d = Moowses a= ow( 650 = FH .cos fy: Ba = cos) (S) 718° Ans, 150 = 700 cos 725, tz = cod (8) = 16 Ans. “These results are shown ia Fig, 2-325.Prowevs + 54 PROBLEMS 259, Determine the magnitude and coordinate 2.42, Determine the magaitude aud the coordinate direction anglee of F, = (6 SOF + 40K}N ard direcrion angles of ihe resultant force, Fy = (401 ~ €5] + 30k} Ny Sketch each fores on aut 92 relerence "2-60, “The cable atthe end of the crane boom exerts a force of 2500 N on the boots. as shonin. Express F as a Cartesian vector BK ¥ 588 Fe 250 Prob. 22 Proh 2-60 2st, Devermine the magnitude aed coordinate direction angles of tae force F acting on the stake. 2463. "Tho stock mounted o« the lathe is subjected toa force of SON Determine the coordinate diceetion ungle j B and express the force as a Carlesian veoios, Prob. 6 Frob.2-@52 + CHAPTER 2. Fores Vectors 2204, Detormine the magnitude aad coordinate diection aagles of de resullaut foro: and sketch this ‘vector on tie coordinate system. 245, Spocify the coordinate direction angles of Fy and FF, and express each force as a Cartesien vector. 2.66, ‘Tho roast is subjected to the threo forces shown, Determine the coordinate divectlon angles ey, 8y, 7, oF , 60 that the resultant force acting on the mast is Fa = {3501} N. 2.67, The mast is subjected to the three forses shown, Determine the coordinate direction angles on Bi. % of 0 that the resultant forve acting on the mine is zex0. Probs,2-6667 #268, Tho cables attached to the screw oye are subjected (o the three forces shown. Express each forve in Cartesian vector form and determine the magnitude and coordinate directioa angles of the resultent force. F-350N 2-69. ‘The beam is subjected (0 the two forecs shown. Tspross cach force in Cartesian vector form and determine the magnitude aad coordinate directionangles of the resultant force. Prob. 2492-70, Determine the magnitude and edordiaate dicection angles of the cesullant force and sketeh this ‘vector on the coordinate systent. Frok 2-70 211, The two forces F, and acting at A have a rerultant forco of By ~ {-100K} N. Determine the magnitude ard coordinate ditcetion angles of Fy 2.72, Derenmine the coordinate dicection augles of the force Fy and indicate taem on the figure, robs 27072 Prosirus + 52 273, The bracket is subjected to the two forces shown, Express eac force lo Cartestan vector form and thest determine the resuliant force Fa, Find the magnitude and coordinate direction angles of the resultant force, t 5, =250N Prob. 2-73 274, "The pole is subjected to the force F, which has components acting along the x,y,z nabs as shown. If the magnitude of F is 3 EN, and 6 = 30° and y = 75", determine the magnitudes of its three components. “278 The pole is subjected to the force F which has components F, = LSKN and F, = LISKN, If 8 = 75°, determine the magoitudes of F and ¥,, robs ANS54 + CHAPTER 2 Force Vectors *2:76. A force Fis applied ot the top ofthe tower at A. If it wtsia the dectfon shown such that one of its ‘amponents iying in the staded j-z plane has amagnitude of 840 N, determine its magnitude F and coordinate direction angles yf. 7 27, ‘Voree forces acton the Nook. If the resultant fosce Fy has a magtitude and direction as shown, determine the magnitide and the coordinate direction aagkes of foree Pa. 28. Determine the coordinate direction angies of Fi and Fy. 2-79, "The bok is subjected to the force F, which bas ‘components acting along te, y, z axes as showe. If the magnitude of F is 80 N, end a = 60" and y= 45", determize the magnitudes ofits corponents Prob.2-79 "280. ‘Two forces Fi and Kp act on the bolt, If the resultant force Fghas 4 magnitude of 50.N ané coordinate direction angles a— TMP and f= 80", a: shown, determine the magnitede of T, and ils coordinate direcdon angles, Peobs. 227778Secon 27 Position Vectors + 55 2.7 Position Vectors Jn thls section we will introduce the concept of position vector. It will bbe shown that this vector is of importance in formulating a Cartesian force vector directed betwean any two potas in space, Later, in Chapter 4, ‘we will use it for finding the moment of a force. 4X} Coordinates, ‘Throughout the book we will use a right-sanded coordinate system to reference the location of points in space, Furthermore, ye will use the convention followed in unary technical books, and thet is to requtte the positive z axis to de directed upward (the zenith direction) 50. that it measures the height of aa object or the altitude of a point. The x » axes thea Hie in the horizontal plaae, Fig, 2-33, Points in spece are located relalive to the orlgia of coordinates, O, by successive measurementsalong the x, 2 axes For example, in Fig. 2-23 the coordinates of paint A are obtained by starting at O ard meacuring x4 — +4m along the x axis, Yq = +2m along the y axis, and zy = —Gm slong the z axis Thus, ‘AC4, 2, ~6),In a similay menner, measurements along the x,y, 2 axes from. Oto B yeld the cocrdinates of B, ie.,B(0, 2,0). Also notice that C(6, ~1, 4). Position Vector. The position vector is defined at a fixed vector which Iceates a polatia space relative to another poiat.For example, fr extends from the origin of coordinates, O,to poiat P(x,» 2), Fig. 234a, then can bbe exprested ia Cartesian veetor form e& reais yjtek Note how the head-to-lail vector addition of the three components yields vector 7, Fig. 2-34b. Starting at the origin O, one travels x in the H. direction, then y in the +4] direction, and finally z in the +k direction to aurive at point P(x, 3, 2) As 2) Foye st ~ x “ yl o o56 + CHAPTER 2 Force Vectors foe ses) a os Mi te "a © ‘The length and direction of cable AB used to support the stack ean be detenmined by rmtaruting the coordinates of points A and Boosing the x,y, 2 ates Ibe partion vector xr along the cable can then be established. "Tho megnitude rceprescnts the length of the cable, aud the direction of the eable is defined by a, B, 7, which are determined from, the componcnis of the wait vector found irom the position vector, w= xr. In the more general case, the position vecfor may be dizected from polat A to point B in spece, Fig. 2-35a. As nated, this vector is also designated by the symbo} x. As a matter of convention, however, we Will sometimes refer to this vector with two subscripts to indicate from and to the polat where it is directed, Thus, r can also be designated as ray. Also, note that r4 aud ry In Fig. 2-35a are referenced wlth only one subscript since they extend from the origin of coordinates. From Fig.2-35a, by the licad:-to-tail vector addition, we require mtr Solving for r and expressing r and rg in Cartestan vector form yields rety—rq—(xat+ gol + Zak) ~ (at € yaj + tale) or r= (xp —2a)i + (3 ~ Yall + (22 — tak GB) ‘Tis, the 5, j,k components of the position vector x ntay be formed by waking the coordinates Of the sail of the vector, A(Si Ya.Za)e and subtracting them from the corresponding coordinates of the head, ‘B(xp. Yee Zn). Agsin note how the head to-tail adcltion of these three camponenis yields «, Le., going fiom A to B, Fig. 2-356, onc first travels (ea ~ 14) in the +i creetion, thea (yq— y4) in the 4 direction, and finally (zz — 24) in the +k diveeti’ n.‘An elastic rubber baad fs attached to points A and B as shown in Vig. 2-360. Determine its length aad its dicection measured from A toward B. ' Ftp. 2-26 Solswon “We first establish a position vector ftom A to B, Fig. 2-360.In eccordance syith Eq.2-13, tho coordinates of the ail A(1 m, 0, ~3m) ar subtracted from the coordinates of the head (2m, 2m, 3 m1), Which yields -2m — Ln} + 2m - Qj + (3m - (~3 mie = (42) + Op m ‘These components of r can elso be detormined directly by realizing ‘from Fig. 2-360 that they represent the direction and distance one must go along each axis in order to move from A to B. i... along the x axis {C21} myalong the y exis (2}} m, and finally along th z exis (6k) m. “The magnitude of r represents the length of the rubber tand. V(-3) + OF + 6P ‘Formulating # unit vector in the dircetion of x, we beve Ans. yaur(Sone sm Thete angles ste measured from the positive aves of a localized coordinate system placed at the teil ofr, point A,as shown ia Fig. 2-36c, Secvow 2.7 Position Vectors + 5758 + CHAPTER? Force Vectors 2.8 Force Vector Directed along a Line F237 “The force F acting along the cheln ean be represented af a Cartesisn vector by fist establishing x y, 2 axes and forming 2 postion vertor r along the length of the Chain, then finding the corresponding unit vector u = r/r thal defines the direction of both the chain and the force. Finally, the ‘magnitude of the forec is combined wth is dioction, E ~ Fu. Qhite often in three-dimensfonal-siatics problems, the direstion of a force {s specified by two points through which its line of action passes. Such situation is stown ia Fig. 2-37, where the force Iv js directed along the cord AR. We can formulate Mas s Cartesian vector by realizing that it has the same direction and sense es the position vector ¥ directed from point.A to point 6 on the cord, Ihis common direction is specified by the amit vector w = ¥/r. Fence, mma) Although we have represented F symbctically in Hig, 2-37, note that it has unity of force, unfike x, which fas Units of length. TANT POINTS + A position yector locates one point in space relative to another point . > The cesies: way to formulate the components of a position vector is to detedmine the distance and direction that must be traveled along ihe a, y,z dlrcettons—going from the tail (o the head of the vector. + A force F acting in the dircction of a position voctor r can be represented in Cartesian form if the unit vector w of the position vettor is determined and this 1s multiptied by the magnitude of the fowe, ia, F = Fu = Pair).Stcrou 2.8 Force Vector Directed along a Line + 59 “The man shown in Fig. 2-38 pulls on the cord with a force of 350.1, ‘Represent this force, acting oa the support A, as a Cartesian vector and determine its direction. Solution Force F is shown in Fig, 2-38b. The direction of this vestor, u, is cetermined from the position vector », which extends from 4 tc B, Fig 2-286. The coordinates of the end points of the cord are A(G, 9, 75 m) and BG m, -2 m, 1.5 nt). Forming the position vector by sabtracting the corresponding x, y, and z coordinates of A from those of B, We have r= @m~O)+ (“2m - Oy + (15 m- 7.5 mk = [i B- 6K] m ‘This result can also be determined directly by noting in Fig, 2-380, that ouc aust go from A [=6k} m, then [-2[] m, and finally [Si} m to gel to B, The magnitade of x, whick represents the length of cord AB, is = fay? +24 Com = 7m Forming the unit vector that defines the direction and sense of both rand yells vena = [1501 ~ LOQj ~ 300k}. Ans, ‘The coordinate direction angles arc measured between r (or F) end the positive axes of a localized coordinate system with origin placed at A, Fig 2.386, From the components of the unit veetor a= cor(2) = 645° Ans cos" (2) <107 Ans eos" 8}. Al poset(S8) uw 7 y fa (om,—2 m, 1.5m) ® Fy 29860 + CHAPTER? Force Vectors ‘The cireular plate in Fig. 2-394 is partially supported by the cable AB, If the force of the cable cn the aook at A is ¥ = 500N, express F as a Cartesian vector, Solution ‘As shown in Fig. 2-396, F has the same direction and eense as the position vector r, which extends from A to B. The coordinates of the end points of the eable are A(O, 0,2 m) and 6(1.107 m,0.707 m, 0}, as indicated in the figure. Thus, (1707 m ~ 0) + (0707 m ~ 0) + (0 ~ 2m)k ~ {2.7071 + 0.301) — 26} m Note how one can calculate these components directly by going from ‘A, {21k} m slong the z axis, then {1.707} m slong the x sxis, and finally {0,707} m along the y axis to get to B, “The magatiude of ris ral (IO + (O07? + (YF = 2.723 m Thus, p17, 07,2 73 * 2.703) ~ 23 = 0.62691 | 0.2597) — 0:7345k ‘Since # = SOON and ¥ has the direction u, we have B= Fu = 500 (0.62608 + 0.2597} — 0.7345k) = (3138 + 130) ~ 367K} N Ans. Using these components, notice that indeed the magnitude of F is 500 Ni = VGisy + Coa = 367)" = 500N Show thet the cbordiuate direction angle y ~ 137°, aud indicate this angle on ihe figureSccnon 2.8 force Vector Diracted along atine » 61 ‘The roof is supported by cables as shown in the pote. If the cables exert forces Fag = L00.N und Fac = 120N on the wall hook at A us showa in Fig. 2-40a, determine the megnitude of the resultant force acting at A. Solution “The resultant force Fy is shown graphically in Fig. 2-406. We can express this force as a Cartesian vector by first formulating Fs and | Rac as Cartesian vectors and then adding their components The directions of Fg and F4c are specified by forming unit vectors tap and wac along the cables. These unit vectors are obtained from the unsociated position vestors xg and rac. With reference to Fig. 2-406, for Fag we have rye = (4m— Ob 4+ O- OY + (O- 4 mje = (al = 4k] ran = V@¥ + (4! = 5.66 tap) 4p 4 Fan~ soox(722) ne 566 *) | Egg = {7074 ~ 70:7K} N For Fae wehave ruc = m= ON + 2m — 0} + (0 4mik = (4 Ak ro= Vai + GP + = 6m ; Kye # 120n() = on($i~25 - $e) = {801 + 40j - 99K) N ‘The resultant fore is therefore Eq = Fag + Fac ~ {70-14 — 70.7kk} N + {801 + 40} — 80) N = {15071 + 40} — 150.7k} N ‘The magnitude of Fy is thus SOE OP + IOP ¥ » aN Ans p20 CH. 2m,0) Fr62 + CHAPTER 2 Force Vectors PROBEEMS 28H Wey (= 4) 42K) me, © (Sk ory {a ~ 2h 5k) my, deemie the magaude snd det ofr = 3t) e+ 3 2-42, Represent the poson vector scting rom polut AG m,5 n,6m) to point B(S m, —2 m, 1 m) in Cartesian actor form. Delermine its ordinate diction angles td fd the Gstonoe between pointe 4 and B. 2-83. A position yeotor extends from the origin to point AG m,3 1,6 m)-Deteemine the angles a, 6, 7 whkh he tail of the vecior makes with the x,y,z axes respectively, *2.84, _Hapress the position vector x in Cartesian vector form then cetermiae its magnitude and coordinate Girection angles. 295. axpcess the position vectox r in Cartesian vector form; then determine its magnitude and coordinate diection angles 286. Express foree F as a Carlesiaa yecton then termine its coordinate direction angles, « OF Prob. 2-86 287, Determine the iength of member AB of the truss boy first establishing a Cartesian position vector from A to Band then determining its maguitude.4248, Ata given instant, the position of a plan at A anda truinat 8 ate measured relative toa radar antenna ‘at O. Deteimine the distance d between A and Bat this instant.To solve the problein, formulate a Position vector, directed from A to Band then delecmine its magnitude. Prob, 2-88 2.89, Tae hinged plate is supported by the cord AB. If the foree fn the cond is F — 240 N, express this force, rected from A toward B, as Cartesian vector, What is the length of the cord? Prowens + 62 2.98, Determine the length ofthe crankshatt AB by first formulating « Cartesian position vector from A to B anc hen deteamining tts mageitude, Peet 2.00 2.91, Detomuine the longths of wises AZ, BD, and CD. ‘The ting at D is midway between A and 8. Prob 29164 + CHAPTER? Force Vectors 9292 Bxgress fore F as a Catesian veclon then 294, Determine the megnitud: and coordinete eterruine its coordinate direction angles irection angles of the resultant force aeting at potat Prada 2-94 293 Express force F as a Catesiaa vectors then 295. ‘The door is hekl opened by ateans of two chains deterrnine its coordinate dicection angies If the tension in AB and CD is Fy= 300N and Fo ~ 250N, respectively, exptess cach ofthese forces in Caccesian vector form Prob, 2-88 Peab.2-95,Promens © 65 2.95, The twe mooring cables exert forpes on the stom 2.98, Tho guy wires are veed io eupport the telephone of aship as shown. Represent each force as as Caitesh pole. Represent the focoe in each wire ia Carteslan veetor ‘vector and determine the ragnitudeard direction of the form. resuitant. 297, ‘Two tractors ull on the tee with the forces 299, Express cach of the forcss im Carlesian veotor shown, Represent eaca force as a Cartesim vector ard form and determine the megnirude and coordinate then determine the magnitide and coordinate direction rection angles of the resultant force. angles of the resultant force, Peab.2-9766 + CHAPTER 2 Force Vectors #2100, Ths gable attached to the actor at B exe:ts a force af 3900 N on the framevork, Express this force ag a Cartesian vector, Puob 2-100 201, ‘The foad at A creates « fores of 200.N in wise AB. Express thls force asa Cartesian veciar acting on A and dizected toward as shown, Fron 2101 2-102. The pipe is supported at its eads by @ cord AR, Ui the cord exerts. force of F = 120 N on the pipe at A, express this force as a Cartesian veetor, 2103, The cond exerts aforce of F = (12 + 9J ~ 8k} KN on the hook. Ifthe cord isd mlong, determixe the location 4,9 of the point of attachment 2, and the height 2 uf the wok. S204 The cord exerts a force of F = 30 EN an the hook. ithe cord is 4m loag,2 = 2m, and the x competent of the force is = 25KN, determine the location x,y of the point of attachment B of the cord tothe ground. robs. 2-1057104205, Bach of the four forces acting a1 hos 3 magnitude of 23 XIU Express each force as a Cartesian vector and determine the resultant force, Prob. 2105, 2106, ‘The tower js held in place by three cables. Hf the ‘force af each cable geting oa the tower isxhown, deterrsine the magnitude and coordinate direction angles «, 8, y of the sesulant fone, Take x = 20m,y = 151. Prob. 2196 Pansieus + 67 2407, The cable, attached to: the chearleg desrick, ‘exerts a force on the destick of F — 3500 N, Express this force as a Cartesian vector, Prob.2.107 *2108. ‘The window is helt open by chain AB, ‘Determine the length ofthe chain, and express the 200N force acting at A dong the chin as a Cartesian vector and determine ii coordinate direction angles.68 + CHAPTER 2 Force Vectors 2.9 Dot Product Fig 2-41 | ET (2)(1) cos = Land lf Occasionally in statics one has to find the angle between two lines or the components of a force parallel and perpendicular to x lise. Ta t¥0 dimensions, these problems can readily be solved by trigonometry since the geometry is ensy to visualize. Ja three dimensions howerer, this is often ult, and conscquenily vector methods should be employed for the solution, The dot procuct defiaes a particular method for “muliiplying” two vectors and is used %0 solve the shove-mentioned problems, “The dot proctuct of vectors A and B, written A-B, and road "A dot y'isdefined as the product of the magnitudes of A andiB and the cosine of the angle @ between their tails, Fig, 2-41. Pxpressed in equation form, A‘B= AB OS? (44 where 0° = 9 = 180°. The dot product is often referred to as the sealar product of vectors since the result is a scalar and not a vector, Laws of Operation «| 1, Commutative law: AB-BA 2. Multiplication by a sealar: a( A+B) = (A) +B = A-(@B) = (A-B)a 3. Distributive law: A-(B + D) = (AB) + (A-D) I is easy to prove tlie first and second laws by using Rq.2-14. The proof of the distributive law is Left as an exercise (see Prob, 2-109), Cartesian Vector Formulation. Pquation2-14 may be used to find the dot product for each of the Cartesian unit vectors For example, 1) (1) cos 90° =0. In a similar manner, isi keke ko 0 “These results should not be memorized; rather, it should be clearly understood how each is abtained, Consider nov' the dot product of two general vectors A and BB which ‘ate expresseccin Cartesian vector form, We have ACB = (Ad + Ajj + AdQ-(Byl + Bg + BK) ABAU) + ABS) + ACEI) + A,BG +i) + ABD + Ay RS“ + ABET) + AB(KeJ) + AB(%)Seenow 29 Dot Product + 69 Cairying out the dot-product operations, the final result becomes BH AD. + ASD, + A, e413 ‘Tins to deterraine the dot product of two Cartesian vectors, multiply their corresponding x, yx components and ston their products algebraically. Since the result a scalar, be careful noi to include any wait vectors fn. ‘the finat result. Applications. ‘The dot product bas two important applications in mechanics. 4. The angle formed between two vectors or intersecting lines. The angle @ between the tails of vectors A and B in Fig 2-41 can be determined from Ea,2-14 and written as Oo won(* B At) oO s0s tar Here A-B ia found from Eq, 215. In particular, notice that if A’B& 6,6 = cos” 0 = 90°, so thal A will be perpendientar to B. 2. The eompouents of a vector parallel and perpendicular to a lee, The componeat of vector A parallel to cr coflinear with the Yine ad in Fig. 2-42 is defined by Ay where Aj = A cos @. This component is sometimes refecred to es ths projection of A onto the line, since a right angle is formed in the construction. lf the direction of the tine “4 isspecitied by the unit vector, then, since w = , we can determine A; directly rom the dot produet (Eq. 2-14); je, . AY Acose= Aw Arwdcond a maa Henes, the scalar projection of & along a line is determined from the dot product of A and the wit vector w which defines the direction of the line. Notice that if this result is positive, then Ay has 2 directional sense which is thesame as u, whereas if Aj isa negetive scalar, then Ay has the opposite sense of direction (0 u. The component Ay represented as a vecter is therefore Ag= Acosé w= (A-uu “The component of A which is perpendicular to line a! can lke be obtained Fig. 2-42,SinceA = Ay+ Ay, then Ay = A — Ap There are to possible ways of obtaining A. One way Would be to determine @ from the dot produc, @ = com {A «w/A), then A, Asin 6, Alternatively if Ay's known, then by the Pythagoreaa theorem we can ako write Ay = VAP= Ag,70 CHAPTER 2 Farce Vectors “The angle @ which is made between the rope aad the connecting beant A can be determined ly using the dot proud Simply fozwaulate position vectors fo naif vectors along the beam, u4 = eafra, sd long. the 1076, 0, = fy/r,. Since @ is delined Sbotmeen tho tails of these vectors we eam solve for 9 using ® = cos tq stefrar) — oF Ngrt Mf the rope exerts a foree K on the joint, the projection of this foree along beam A can be determined hy Est defining the direction of the beam twing the tit vector 04 = Fa/r4 and then forenulsting the force ne a Caiteton vector B= Fer) ~ Fu Applying the dot produc, the projection fs Fi ~ Fou, IMPORTANT POINTS + The dot product used to determine the angle between (vo vectors oF the projection of a vector ia a specified direction, * Ifthe vectors A and B are expressed in Cartesian form, the dot Product is determined by multiplying the respective x,y,z scalar components together snd algebraically adding the results, i, ACB = AiBy + AyBy + Ade » From the‘definition of the dot product, the angle formed between tie tails of vectors A and Bis 6 = cos? (A+B/AB). «The magnitude of the projection of vedior A along a line whose direction is specitied by u ts determined from the dot product Apa Au.Srerion 2.9 Det Product + 71 ¥ = (300) N. Determine the magnitude of the components of this forve parallel and perpendicular to member AB. bp F=(09N @ vie2 © Salton | The magnitude of the component of F slong AB is equal to the dot preduct of F and the unit vector up, which defines the direction of AB, Fig, 2-435. Since B+ + ak ta att oF + oF thea Fan = F cos @ = Frug = (300j) + (0.2861 + 0.857 + 0.429k) = (0)(0.286) + (300)(0.857) + (0)(0.428) : = 257.1N Ans Since the result is a positive scalar, F.q hes the samesense of direction as up, Fig. 2-435, | Expressing Fg in Cartesian vector form, we have | Fog = Faaty = (257.1 N)(0.2861 + 0857] + 0.429K) {735i + 220) + U10K}N Ans. “The perpendicular component, Fig. 2-43b, is therefore Hy = FP - Egy = 300) ~ (73.51 + 220) + 110K) ASL + 80] — 110K} N dis magaiiude can be determined efther trom this vector or from the ‘Pythogorean theorem, Fig. 2-43h: Fi a VF Fay = \/ (300 N}* = (257.1 NF 155N An us = 0.2861 + 0857) + 0.40972 + CHAPTER 2 Force Vactors ‘The pipe in Fig, 2-44 is subjected to the foree of # = 800 N. Determine the angle @ between F and the pipe segment BA, and the magnitudes of the components of F, which are parallel and perpendicular to BA, Soltetion z Augte 1, First we will estabtish position vectors from B to A and B to C. Then we will determine the angle @ between the tails of there ‘two vectors ih Tag = {-2- 3+ Min. Tp = {~3 + 1h cos @ = PRA‘HRC _ (2X0) + (-2K-3) + HG) Taatac 3vi0 0.7379 1 = a25° Ans. Components of ‘The force I is resolved into components as shown in Fig. 2-440, Since Fy = Fuga, we must first fonmulate the unit vector along BA and fore: F as Cartesian vectors. cig CBr B+w) 2 2 aA aa 3 git ak ¥-soon {4} ale) 7589} + 2530k fac Thus . 2, 2.1 Font Wotiga = (15895 + 253.08) (3-3 +4) 0+ 506.0-+ 94.3 7 s90N Ans Since ¢ was calculated in Fig. 2-446, this same result can ako be obiained direetly from trigonometry. Fy 7 800 co 425° N= 590 Ars. ‘The perpendiguiar component can be obtained by trigonometry, 2 Fw Fsing : F 800 00s 425° N = 540N Ans. (Or, by the Pythagorean theoreza, BL = \/F*— Phy = V/ (a0)? — (590) =540N AnsPromiews + 73 PROBLEMS 24109. Given the three vectors A, B. and D, show that A (64D) = (AB) + (AD). 2110. Determine the augle @ between the tails of the Wo vectors 2413, Determine the angle @ derween the y axis of the pole and me wire AB, Pray 2-110 2HLLL, Determine the angle @ between tho tails of the bwe vectors, #26112, Determine the magnitude of the projected component ofr, along rand the projection ofr; along 1. Probe, 211V2 2A 2.414, The force F = {28 ~ 50} + 10k) N gots at the end 4 of tie pipe assembly Determine the magnitude of the components, and fp Wich act along the axis of AB aad perpendicular toi p= sa—feanf Prom. 2-118” + CHAPTER 2. Force Vectors 2-116 Determine the angle 9 between the sides of the ‘riangular plate. "2416, Determine the length of side BC of the triangular plate Solve the problem by finding the magnitude of rge; then check the resull by first fin 8s ras and rc and thea use the cosiae law, Prebs, PLS 2117, Determine the components of F that act along, 20d AC end perpoadiculer 10 it, Point B is located at the ‘midpoint of the rod. 2418, Dewumine the components of F tat uct along, rod AC and perpendicular to it Point B is located 3m. along the rod from end C. Probs. 107118 2149. Ths clamp i wed om @ jig. I tho vortical force acting on the bolt is ¥ = {300k} N, determine the magnitudes of tne eomponents ¥ and ¥, Which act along the OA axis and perpendiculr cot Prob, U9 42526. Determine the projection of the foros F aleng the pole Re fats f+ 10g ba Prob, 2-120ADL Determine the projected componeat af the 80.N osce scting along the axis AB af the pips. Pooks 2421 QHD, Cable OA is used to sopport column OB, Determine the angle @ it makes with beem OC, 2433. Cable OA iz used to support column 8, Determine the angle @ it makes with beam OD, robs, 120/23 Promsus + 75 22.121, ‘The force F sete at the end 4 af the pipe assembly. Determine the magnitudes of the components Fj, aed Fp which ect slong the ans cf AB and perpendicular 10 it, R= 201+ 1-3 Prob, 124 2.125, Tho cables exert forces on the pipe. Determine the magnitude of the projected compeneat of F, along the line of action of F, 2-126, Determine the angle 6 between the two cables attached to the pipe. robs, 2251126,76 + CHAPTER 2 Force Vectors 2427, Determine theangle between cables AB and AC, 92.928, Jf F has a magnitude of $5 N, determine the magaltude of ls projecced componcat acting along the x ans and along catle AC. Probe. 2-1277128 2129, Determine the angle 9 betwees the edges of the sheetemetal bracket. Prob, 2-128 2130, The cables each exert a force of 400 Non the pos. Determine the magnitude of the projected ‘component of K, along the hine of action of 2131, Determine the angle @ between the two cables attached fo the post. Probe. 2130001 +2132, Determine the angles @ and @ made between the axes a of the Fag pale aad AB and AC, respectively, of each cable, Prob. 2-192CHAPTER REVIEW + Parattelogran Law. ‘Two vector add eccording to the parallelogram law. The componenis forms the sides of the parallelogram and the resedfart i the diagonal, ‘To obtain the components or the resultant, show how the vectors add by the lip-to-tail addition using the triangle rule, end then use the law of sines and the law of cosiies to calculate their values. + Cartesian Vectors, -& vector can be resoived into its Cartesian componeats along the 1, y, z axes so that F = B+ Ej + Ek ‘The magnitude of F is determined trom F = \/F}+ 7} 4 72 and the coordinete direction angles a, 6,y are determined by formulating a unit vector in the direction of F, that is u= (FIP) + (BJP) + (FP }k. The components of wu represent cos a, 0s A. cos 7, These thrce angles are related by cos’ a + cos? + cost y ~ 1,80 that only two of the three angles are independent of one another. * Force and Fosttion Vectors, A positon vector is directed between two points Tt ean be formulated by finding the distance and the direction one has to travel along the x,y, 2 axes from one point (dhe tall) to the other point (the tip). Ifthe fine of action of 2 force passes through these two points then it acts in the sere, irection w as the position vector. The force con be exprested es @ Cartesian vector using F = Fu = F(tir), ‘© Dot Product, The dot product between two vectors A and B is defined by AvB = ABos@. If A acd B are expressed os Cartesian vectors, thea A-B = A,B, + A,B, + A,B, in statics the dot product is used to determine the angle between the tails of the vectors 6 ~ coo”! (A+B/AB), Its eao used to determing he projected component of a vector A onto an axis defined by its unit vector u, so that A = Aces? = A-u. Guoree Review + 777a + CHAPTER 2 Foice Vectors REVIEW PROBLEMS 2.133, Dolorminethomsgritude ondeooudiaats direction angles of By 0 that the resottant of the three fexces acts along the positive y axis and has magnitude of 600 IN. 2134, Determine the ragnitude and cooedinate direction angles of F so that the resultant of the three focees is 2ez0, = 0N Prob 2-1330134 24195, Detennlne the designangle 6 (0 < 90°) between the (wo strats so that the 500-N horizontal fore has a component of 60XN directed from A toward C. What is the component of force ceting along member BA? Prob,2-138 *EAS6, “The force ¥ has & magnitude of 80.N and acts fal the midpoint C of the thin rod. Fxpress the force as @ Cartesian vector. Feo 2136 2497. Two fomes Fy and Fz act on the hook. If their ines (of action are at an angle @ spart and the magnitude of each force is F = A= F, determine the magninude of ‘the cosultant force Ry and the sngle betwoon Fy and Fy. Prob2-1372438. Determine the angles @ and ¢ between the wie segments —s6m— 9/6 Prob 2138 243%. Detesnine the magnitudes of the projected ‘conmponents ofthe force FF direction of the cables AB and AC. robs 2499 [601 + aj ~ 40} Nin me. Rewew Promisus + 79 42-140, Determine the magnitude of the projected ‘component of the 100-N force acting lung the wus BC of the pipe, Prob, 2-140 2444. The boatis tobe pulled auto the shore using two ropes. Ifthe resultant force is to be 400 N, directed slong the keel ae, as shown, determine the magnitudes of forces ‘Tand P acting ix each rope and the angle @ so that P is a minirem.T acts at 30° from the keel as shown, Peab,2-141Whenever cabies ate used for liclsting loads, they must be selected so that they da nit fal when they are elaced at their points af attachment, i this chaptet, we will shaw how to calculate cable Taadings for such cases.CHAPTER Equilibrium of a Particle * To introduce the concept of the free-body diagram for a partie. * To show how to solve partice equilibrium problems using the equations of equilibrium 3.1 Condition for the Equilibrium of a Particle A particle is in eqatltbritan provided itis at rest if originally at zost or hus constant velocky ff origin ia motion. Mest often, however, the term “equilibrium” cr, more speciicaly, “static equilibrium” is wsed fo describe an object at 'rest, To. maintain equilibrium, itis necessary to satisfy Newton's firt law of metion, which requices'the resuliet force acting oa a particle to be equal to zero. This condition may be stated mathematically as BN=0 4) where 2K Is the vector sun of all dhe forces acting on the particle Not ent is Eq. 3-1 @ necessary condition for cyuifibriun, it is abo a sufficient condition, Thisfollows from Newton’ssecondtaw of motion wich can be wrtton as SF = ma, Since the force system sxtsfiog Eq, 3-1, thon sma = 0, and therefore dhe particle's aeceTeration a ~ 0. Corsequeatly the pallice indeed moves with constant velouy or remains at rest. al22 CHAPTER 2 Equilibrium of a Particle 3.2. The Free-Body Diagram ‘To apply the equation of equilibrium, we must account for aff the known aad unknown forces (2F) which act on the particle. The best way to do this is to draw the pactice’s free-body diagram. This diagram is simply a sketch which shows the particle “fee” from ils sureoundings with all the forces thet act on it Before presenting a formal procedure as to how te draw a free-body iagram, we will first consider two types of connections often cacountered in particle equilibrium problems. Springs. Ifa tinear elesite spring is used for support, the Fengits of the spring will change in cirect proportion (o the force acting on it, A characteristic that defines the “elasticity” of a spring is the spring constant of stiffness &. The magnitude of force cactted om a linear elastic spring which has a stiffness k and is deformed (elongated or compressed) a istance s, meusuced from its unloaded position, it » [Poe B2) ‘Here s is determined from the difference in the spring's defermed length Tand ite undeformed length by i.c.,s ~ 1 — fy. Its is positive, Fpulls” on the spring; whereas ifs is negative, F must “push” on it. For example, the spring shown in Fig. 3-1 has an undeformed length fp = 0-4 m and stiffness K=SO0N/m. fo stretch it so that 106m, © force F~ ks = (500 Nim} (0.6m — 9.4 m1) = 100.N Js needed, Likewise, to compress it to a length 7= 02m, a force F = ks = (S0N/m)(0.2m — 0.4m) = =100N is required, Fig.3-1. Fly stSecriow 22 ‘The Free-Body Diagram + 83 Cables and Pulleys, ‘Throughout this book, except in Sec. 74, all cables (orcords) are assumed to have vepligible weight and they cannot stretch, ‘Aloo, a exble can suppor! any a tension or “palling” force, and this foree always acts in the dicoction of the-cable. In Chapter 5 it willbe chown that the tension force developed in 2 continious cable waich passes over a frictionless pulley must have a constont magnitude to keep the cable in equilibrium. Hence, for any angle 9, shown in Fig. 3-2, the cable is subjected to a constant tension 7 throughout its length. PROCEDURE FOR DRAWING A FREE-BODY DIAGRAM Since we mus! account for all the forces acting on the particle when applying the equatioasof equilibriim, the importance of first drawing a free-body diagram canact be overe:nphasized.To construct a free- body diagram, the following three steps are necessary Draw Onttined Shape, Imagine the particle to be isolated or cut “free? from its surroundings by drawing its outlined shape. Show Alf Forces, Indicate on this sketch all the forees that act ort the particle, These forces can be active forces, which tend to sot the particle in motion, or they can be reactive forces which are the result of the constraints or supportsthal tend to prevent motion, Tosezount for all these forces, it may help to trace around the partide’s boundary, carefully aoting each force acting on it. Identify Bach Force, ‘The forces that are known should be labeled ‘with their proper magnittdes and directions. Letters are used to ides and directions of forees that are unknowa, CCocsider the spool having a selgkt 17 which io suspended from te erate ‘boom. Lfwe wish to obtain the froesin cables As anc.AC then we can consider the free-body diagram of tering at A since thene frees at onthe ring. Here thecables AD ever aresulant force of Woon the ting and the corsiiion of exquilibriem suse co obinin Ty an To, ai , | cates a was Fest > & 4 ‘eb in qian tee, Miah wate tree Sbietur soho neta ts acy Steg ct ody dng at ose eS carimesunc wy Alice agora Sfowtan se sony os esr on Sebo som fe sgh Wont oe Teche fo uiion este thas rn eyed so TS npn or hay em bebicetbe sours be isa, Mecposed” end must be contilered ae @ requirement for oquliteums,24s CHAPTER 3 Equillbrlum of a Particle “The sphere in Fig. 3-3a hes a mess of 6 kg and is supported as shown. Draw a free-body clegiam of the sphere, the cord CE, and the knot ac. ” Solution Sphere, By inspection, there ate only two forces acting on the sphete, xamely, ite weight and the force of cord CE The sphere has 2 weight of kg (9.81 mis?) = 58.9 N. The free-body diagracn Isshown in Fig, 3-3. Hee(Focectert CEactngonsghee) Corel CH Wher the cord CE is isolated from its surroundings, its free-body diagram shows .only two forces acting on it, namely, the force of the sphere and the force of the knot, Fig. 3-3c. Nottee that, ce shown here {s equal but opposite to that shown in Fig. 3-2, a EB consequence of Newton's third law. Also, Fog and Fre pull en the cord ‘and keep it in tension so that it doesn’t collapse. For equitibrium, Fee = Pre: S59N (weigmorgriviy stingorsther) {not ‘The knot at C fs subjected to three forces, Fig. 3-3d. They are 0 caused by the cords CBA and CE and the spring CD.As required the free-body dingram shows all these forces labeled with their smepaitudes and directions. It js important to recognize that the weight of the sphere does not ditectly act on the knot. Instead, the cord CE subjects the knot to this force. Rgc(Farce of nt acting on cond C5) ex (Fore f eo CBA ating cn ict) @\c a. ep (ree oC sping acting oa kat) * Be Foe: of cod CB axing on kay Ee (Fote of space acting en cord CE) @ © Fg osSecnon 2.3 Coplanar Force Systerns 85 3.3 Coplanar Force Systems Ti. particie is subjected to a system of coplanar forces that fie in the x-y plane, Fig. 3-4, then each force can be resolved intoits iand J eomponents, For equilébrium, Hq.3-1 can be written as BR=0 ERI t ERj<0 For this vector equation to be satisfied, both the x and y components must be equal to zeto, Hence, BBO 6 “These sealar equations of equilibrium require that the algebraic sion of the x and y components of all the forces acting on dhe particle be equal to 7210. AS a result, gs. 3-3 can be solved for at most two Unknowns, generally represented as angles and magnitudes of forces shown on the pirlice’s free-body diagram, K, R Ee Ryo Scalar Notation, Since cach of the twoequilibriun cquations requires the resolution of vector components along a specified x or y axis, we will use scalar notation fo represent the components when applying these equations. When doing this, the sense of direction for each component is accounted for by an algebraic sign which conresponds to the arrowhead direction of the component along each axis Ifa force has en umkrtown magnitade, then the arrowhead sense of the force on the free-body dingramcem be assumed. Since the magnitude ofa force is aways positive, then ifthe solution yields a negative scalar, this indicates that the sense of the fore acts in the opposite direction.86 + CHAPTER 3 Equilibrium of a Particle ‘The chains exert theee forces om he ringat A, Te rig wil not move, oF will nove with constant velocity, provided the summation of these fereee along the wand aleog the yaxison the free body diagram ie zore, IE one of the theee forece is krowm, the mngnitudos of the ‘oer to forces can be oftslned em the 190 ‘equations of equittiu, Hig 35 For example, consider the free-body diagram of the particle subjected to the two forces showin in Fig. 3-5. Here itis asstmed that the unknown force Facts (o the right to maintain cquilibrium. Applying the equation cof equilibrium along the x axis, we have AEH = 0; 4+P410N=0 Roth terms are “positive” since both forces actin the positive x direction, When this cquation is solved, # = —10N. Hete the negative sign tes that F must act to the left to hold the particle in equilibrium, Fig, 3-5. Notice that if the +x axis in Fig.3-5 was directed to the left, ‘both terms in the above equation would be nogative, but agein, after solving, F = “ION, indicating again F would be directed to the left, PROCEDURE FOR ANALYSIS. Coplanar force. equilibrium problems for a particle can be solved using the following procedure, Hree-Hody Diagram, ‘Establish the, y ares in any suitable orientation, * Label all the Enown end unknown force inagnitudes and directions on the diagram, + “The sense of a force having an unknowr magnitude cam be assumed, Baquations of Equilibriam, Appi the equations of equilibrium BA, = 0 and Z, = 0. * Componosts arc positive if they are directed along. positive axis, and negetive if they are directed along a negative axis. = Jf more than two unkaowas exist and the probiom involves spring, apply # = ks to relate the spriag force to the deformation sof the spring: . @ [the solution yields a negative result, this indicates the seuse of the force is the reverse of that shown on the free-body diagram,Secon 23 Coplanar Force Systeme - 87 Determine the tension in cables AR and AD for equilibrium of the 250-kg engine shown in Fig 3-62, Solution Free-Body Diagram, ‘To solve this problem, we will investigate the equilibrium of the ring at A because this “particle” is subjected to the forves of bath cables A aad AD. First, however, uote that the engine has a weight (250 kg)(9.81 mis) = 2.452 KN which is supported by cable CA. Therefore, ag shown in Fig. 3-6b, there are three concurrent forwes acting om the ring, The forces Tp and Tp have unkuown Magnitudes but known directions, and cable AC exerts a downward force on A equat to 2.482 kN. Te BASEN o Equations of Equilibria, ‘The two unknown magnitudes Ty and 7, can be obtained from the two scalar equations of equilibrium, ZF, = 0 and ZF, = 0. To apply these equations, the x, y axes are established on the freo-body diggram ard Ty mnsi be resolved into its x ond y components, Thus, + EF, = 0; Tacos 30" ~ Th = @ +128, = 0, Tysin 30° ~ 2452 KN @ Solving Eq, 2 for Ty end substituting into Eq, 4 to obtain Ty yields Ans, Ans “The accuracy of these results of course, depends on the accuracy of the data, ie, meastroments of goometry and onds. For most engineering work involving a problem such as this, the data as measured to three significant figures wontd be sufficient. Also, note that here we have neglected the weights of the cables, a reasonable assumption since ‘they would be small in comparison with the weight of the engine. Py a688 + CHAPTERS Equilibrium of a Particle ag WF the sack at A in Fig. 37a has a weight of 20N (~2 kg), determine the woight of the sack at # and the force in each cord needed to hold the system in the equilibrium position showa. Solutton Since the weight of 4 is known, the unknown tension in the two cords EG and EC can be determined by investigating the equilibrium of tke ring at E. Why? Free-Rody Diagraet. There are three forces acting on Eas shown in Fig. 3-76, Equatious of Equilibrtum, Establishing the x, y axes and resolving each force onto its x and y components using trigonometry, we have eo ASE 0 Tag 88a 30° ~ Tex 08 45% = 0 w HERE Tye cos Teesinds?-20N-0 2) Solving iq. 1 for Tas f terms of Tze and substituting the result into Eq. 2 allows a solution for Tc. One: then obtains Tee from Bq. 1. The 20 results are o Fic 38.6N Ans. Tig = 546N Ans. 3868 Using the calculated result for Tec, the equilibriwn of the xing at C can aow be investigated to determine the tension in CD and the “is ‘weight of RB. q Free-Body Dlagrava, As shown in Fig. 3-7¢, Tue = 38.6 N “pulls” on. Wve €, The reason for this bocomes clear when one draws the free-body diagram of cord CE ane applies both equilibrium an¢ the principle of zetion, equal but opposite fore reaction (Newton's third law),Fig. 37d, @ (ace oteon 8 Equetious of Eqnilibrlem. Hstablisbing the x, y axes and noting the scdag ons 3) ea ‘components of Tep ate proportional to the slope of the cord asdefined S860 by the 3-4-5 triangle, we have + ore of ing E— seingen ow EC) Ast eg, 386 cos 45" N — @) BSR =0,5 (DTep + 38.6 sin 45° N — Wy = 0 (a) sedans eset (Force a ng (ped actog none) Coresatcerd £0 Solving Eq. 3 and substituting the result into Eq. 4 yields singonsen ae o Ans, Tig 7Seevion 2.2 Coplanar Force Systems + 88 Determine the required length af cord AC in Fig. 38a so thet the Sp, ampis suspended in the position shown. The trneformed length of spring, AB isla = OA, and the spring has a stliness of kay = 300Nima, WsmsN o Solution Fas Ii the force in spring AB is known, the stretch of the spring can be found using F ~ ks, From the problem geomeuy, itis then possible to calculate the required length of AC. Free-Body Diagraan, The lamp has a weight W = 8(9.81) = 78.5N. ‘Ihe free-body diagram of the ring at A 's shown in Fig 3-85, Equations of Equilibrium. Using the x y axes, AER, <0; Tay ~ Tac. 00530? = 0 HER =O Tac sin 30° = 785N =0 Solving, we obtain Tac = 157.9 N Tap = 1360N ‘The stretch of spring AB is therefore Tas = kava 136.0 N = 300Nim( 42) 80 the stretched tength is “The horizontal distance from C 10 B, Fig. 3 $a, requires 2m = fyceos 30? +0853 m hye = 132m Ans.90 + CHAPTERS Equilibrium of a Particle PROBLEMS QL, Determine the maguitudes of F, and F, so tint 33, Determine the magnitude and angle 0 of Fe that particle P i in equilibrium. pariice Pisin equilitriam. ro Prob. 3 3, Deteumine the magnitude and direction @ of Fo 2-4, Determine the magnitude and angle 0 of Fno that Unt the particle isin equilibrium. the pertisle is ia equibstum. ion 2 Peo, 342-5. The members of a trues are pia-connecied. st joint O. Determine Ge magnitudes of and — for equilibrium, Set @ = 60°. 3,_The members of a truss are pin-coahected at joinc ‘O:Detormine the magnitude of fy and its angle @ for um, Sat Fy x 6 EN. Probe 2516 2-7. ‘The device shown is used to sirsigiten the frames ‘of wrerked outes. Determine the tension of each segment of the chain, Le, AB aad BC, if the force which the hydraulic cylinder DB exerts on potnt # 1 3.50 KN, as shown. on 230 8 Prab.3-7 Prowims + 94 #38 Determine the foro in cables AB ond AC secescany 10 support the 12-kg teaffic light. Peel. 38 3.9, Cords AB are AC can each sustain ¢ maximum tenlon of 8000 NE. Tf the druru has a weight of 9000 N (~ 900 kg), determine the smallest angle @ at which they an be atttehed (0 the drum. Prob. 3992 + CHAPTER 2 Equilibrium of a Par 310, ‘The SUN (% 9042) erate i hoisted using the ropes AB and AC.Each rope cen withstend a maximum tonsion of 9500 N beforeit breaks If AB always remains horizontal, determie the smalls! angle @ to which the crate can be hoisted. Prob, 3-10 311, ‘Two electrically charged pith balls each having a mast of 02 g, are stepended froma light thrands of equal leagth, Determine the resultant horizontal force of repulsion, £, acting on each balt if the measured distance between them is 7 = 200mm, $2112. Tre conciele pipe elbow has a weight of 2000 (= 200 keg) and the center of gravity is located at point ; Determine the force in the cables AB ard CD aeedec to support it, ” Peghy3-12 343. Determine the stretch in exch spring for ‘equilibrium of the 2-kg block. The springs aze shown in the equitibrium postion, 3.44, The unstretched Jengta of spring A# is 2 m. If the block s held in the equilibrium postion shown, determine the mats of the block at D. Probs 214348 The spring ABC bas a ottiness of SOD Néin and an ‘uastetched length of 6 m. Determine the horizontal fone F applied to thecocd which attached to the soma pulley B so thal the displacement ofthe pulley From the wallis@= 5 a. *34G, The spring ABC has a stiffness of 300 Nam and sanuneeretcted length of 6m. Detemmine the displacement of tho cord from the wall whon a foree F = 175 N is applied to the cord, Prob, ISG 347. Determine the maximem weight of the flowerpot that can be smppocted without exceeding a cable tension of 250 Nin eithor cable AB or AC. Peab. 317 3418 ‘Themotor at B winds up the cord attached tothe 351N (+ 32 kp) crate with aconstant speed, Detersine ‘the fore in cord CD expporting the pulley and the angie Yor equilibrium, Neglect De sizeof the palloy at C. Proaims 6 93 349, ‘The cos BCA snd CD con cach support a ‘aximum load of 500 N (re 50 kg), Determiae the maximum weight of he crate Ura can be hoisted at constant ‘ociysand the ongle@ for equim, eobs, S48019 4320, Determine the forces fm cables AC and AB needed to hold the 20g ball D in equilitrivm. Take F = 30N and d = 1m. 321 The hall D has a mass of 20 ke. If @ force of #=100N ic applied horizontally to the sing at A, termine the largest dimension d $0 that the force in cable AC is 210.4 + CHAPTER 3. Equillbrium of a Particle 322 ‘The block hes a weight of 20 N (= 2 kg) and is being hoisted at unifoom velocity. Determine the angle @ for equilibrium ard the required force in each ord, 3.73. Determine the maximurm weight W of the blode ‘hat con be suspended in tho position shown if each cord can support asmaxtseuma (ension of 80 0. Aso, wa is the ‘angle # for equilibrium? Prot. 3.2223 Determine the magnitude and direction @ of the equilibrium force Fay exerted along Tink AB by the tractive appuratve chown. The suspended mass in 10 kg. Neglect the size of the pulley at A. 325, Blocks D and F weigh 5 N (~ G5 kg) each snd bloek £ weighs 81N (~ 0,8 kg). Detcunine (he s2g s for quilibrina, Neglet the size of the pulleys, 3.26. Il blocks D and ¥ weigh SN (~ O5 ke) cath, datermine the weight of block £ if the sag s = 03 m. Neglect the size of the pulleys. Prob, 328/16 3.27, “The lit sling i used to hoist a container having # ‘ase of $0) lg, Doterming tho forcein cach of the cebios (AB and AC 4s a fuiction of @. If the maximum tension allowed in eac cable is 5 EN, determine the shortest lengths of eables AB and AC'that ca be tsed for the lift ‘Tae center of gravity of tho contoincr ia located st @,2328, The load has a moss of 15 kg and is lifted by the pllly system shown, Determine the farce F in the cord fsa function of the angle ¢, Plot the function of foree versus the angle @ for D = 6 = 90" Pronuens + 95: 3630. The 400: (= 40-4g) uniform tank is spspended by means of a 3-m-loag cable, which fs attached to the sides of the tank and passes over te smal pulley located at O. If the cable can be attached at either points A and Bor C and D, devermine which attachment products the {eds euuount of tension in the cube. What Is this tension? 329, ‘The picture has a weight of 50 N (~ 5 ke) ond is to be hung over the smooth pin 8. Ifa string is attached te the frame at points A and C,and the maximum force ‘the string can support fs 75 N detemine the shortest string that can be safely used. 250ma— Peo 3-29 Prob. 90 331. A vertical fowe P = 10N is applied to the ends of fhe 02 m cord AB and spring AC. If the spriag hss an netretehed length of O2 m, determine the angle @ for ‘equilibyium, Take k = 150 Nis. 2332, Determine the unstretched leagtb of spring AC Wa force 7 = 80 N causes the angie 6 = 60" for equilibrium. Cord AB is 02 m long. Take & = 500 Nim. P Probe, 50296 + CHAPTER 3. Equilibrium of a Particle 153.33, A “scale” fs constructed with a 1.2-m-long coud, and the 5O-N (= 5-kz) block D.'The cord is fixed to a pin at A and pastes over two small pulleys. Determine the ‘weight of the suspended block B if the system is in equiltbeium when $= 0.65 un. pos Prot 3-38 93.34, A caris to ke towed uslg the cope arrangement shown. Ths towing forve required is 3900 N. Determine the minimum length { of rope AB so that the tension in either cope AB oF AC does not exceed 3750 N, Hint: Use the equilibrium condition at point 4 to determine the required angle ¢ for attachment, then determine # usicg, trigonometry applied to tiangle ABC. 3:35, ‘The spring ims astiffaess of & = 800 Nim and an stretched length of 200 ram, Determine the force in cables BC and BD when the spring is held in the position shown, 4.96. The sling BAC ip wed to lit the 1000N (~ 100g) loed with coustent velocity, Detemnine the fore: In the sling anc plot its value 7 (ordinate) as {function of its orientation 8, whese 0 = 6 = $0". rab, 3-365}, The 45 KN (= 45 kg) lamp xure Is suspended from two springs, each having an uasiretched lengts of 12 m and stiffness of & = 75Nim. Determine the angle 0 for oquilibeiwa. ab, 3-37 3.38, The pail and its cantents have # mass of 60 kg, If the cable is 15 m long, determine the distance y of the pulley for equititium. Neglect thesize of he puiey et A. Fro 498 Preaueme + 97 33% A 4kg sphore rests on the smooth parabolic surface, Determine the norma} force ik exerts on the svrlace and the mass ng of block 5 needed tq hold itt the equilfbrivm position shown. 73.40, The 30-ks pipe is supported at A by a system of five oords. Determive the lowe in each cord for equilibria, Prob. S4098 3.4 CHAPTER 3 Equilibrium of a Particle Three-Dimensional Force Systems For particle equilibrium we requize IF=0 @4) Ef the forces are retoived into their respective {, j, k components. Fig 3.9, then we have SEI + ER] + ERK =O ‘To ensure equilibriuma, we must therefore require that the following three scalar component equations be satisfied: : G5) “These oquetions repsesSut the algebrale sums of the x, 3, 2 force components acting on the particle. Using them we can solve for at most three unknowns generally represented as angles or magnitudes of forces shown on the particle's free-body diagram.Stenou 3.4 Thre +8 ‘Tae ring at A is subjected the fores from the hook as well ss forees from each of the thee chains Ifthe electromagnet adits load hae a weight W, then the hook force wil be ‘Wyand the threo zeta equation of equlibyiuan can be appicd to the Weecbody diageaea of the ring ia order to determine the cin frees, Fy Be and Fp PROCEDURE FOR ANALYSIS ‘Three-dimenstonal force equilibrium problems for a particle can be solved using the following procedure. Free-Body Diagram. + Bstablish the x,y, 2 axos in any suitable oriontation, © Label alithe known andunkaown force magnitudes and directions on the diagram. ‘The sense af a force having an unknown magnitude can be ascumned. Equauions of Equitibrian. + Use the scalar equations of equilibrium, SF, = 0, %F, = 0, LF; ~ 0, incases where itis easy to resolve oack force intoiits + 35 components, + If tho throo-dimonsional. goomotry appears diffioult, thon first express each force as a Cartesian vector, substirute these vectors into SF = 0, and then set the i j, k components equal to zero. * Ifthe solution yields a negative result, this indicates the sense ofthe force is the reverse of that shown on the free-bxy diagram.100 + CHAPTER 3 Equilibriuen of a Particle ia A 90.N load is suspended from the hook shown in Fig. 3-102. The load is supported by wo cables aad a spring having a silffness k = ‘00 Nim. Determine the force in the cables ent the stretch of the spring for equilibrium, Cable AD lies in the x-y plane and ceble AC rete ese pane, Solution “The stratok of the «pring can be determined once the foros in the spring is detormined. Free-Boidy Dlagrax. The counection at A is choson for the equilibrium analysissines the cable forces are concurrent at this point, ‘The froo-body diagram is shown in Fig, 3-10b, Equations of Equiltbritin, By inspection, cach forse can easily be resolved inio HS x, y x components, and therefore the three scalar equations of equilitrium can be ditectly applied. Considering components directed along the positive axes as “positive,” we have BR = 0 Frosin W? -- Sfc = 0 @ BR, =0; ~Fip 00s 30" + Fy = 0 @® BE=0; in, - ON =0 @) Salving Eq. 3 for Fe, then Eq. 1 for Fp, aad finally Eq, 2 for Zs, yields Fig, 3-10 Fo =150N Ans. Fy =20N Ans Fy = 208N Ans. ‘The stretch of the spring is therefare i Fy = han 208 N = S00. Nim (S42) Sp 0416 Ans.Section 3.4 Three-Dimensionsl Foree Systems + Determine the magnitude and coordinate direction angles af force F in Fig, 3-110 that are required for equilibrium of partie O. Solation Free-Rody Diagram, Four forces act on particle O, Big. 3-11b. Fauations of Equilibviens Bach of the forces can be expressed in Cartesian yector fori, and the equations of equilibrium can be applied ta determine the x, y x components of F, Noting that the coordinates of B are B(-2m, —3m, 6 m), we have = (200) N F, = (- 800K} N == 3f + bk | 82 (8) 7 Saw {2001 — 300j + 600K) N Rit Fy + Rk F For equilibrium BF =o H+ Rt RGEW0 400} ~ 800k — 200; ~ 300) + 600K + Rit Rj + Rk = Equating the respeetive i, j, k companeals to zero, we have BE -200+ A= 0 #,=200N BB = 0: 400 - 300+ =O F,=~100N BR = 0; -800+ 6004+ =0 £= 200N ‘Thus, {200i — 100j + 200%] P= Vi2o0) + 100 + Q00F -300N An. F_ 200, 100, , 200 up F300 Ans. Anis ~ can (22) ane re The magnitude and orrect direction of F are shown in Fig. 3-11c. rps 101102 + CHAPTER 3 Equilibrium of a Particle Detecrnire the force developed in each cable used to support the 40-KN (= 4-tonne) crate shown in Fig. 3-124. Solution Free-Body Diagram, Asshown in Fig, 3-125, the free-body diagram Cf point A is consitiered in order to“expose” the three unknown forces in the cables. Zqucsions of Byullibriwn, Yira we wilh express each force in Cartesian vector form. Since the coordinates of points B and C are B(_3 m,n 8 m) and C{~3 a, 4 m, 8m), we have F =F 31 = af 4 Be | POU ae ae + = ~O318F pi — 042A F aj + O8H8Fak =SI-+ dj + 8k | te= R= sk__ OTL ap + a O51 Fel + 0.424Faj + GABAA CK En = Fi W = (-40k} kN Equilibrium requires RE =0; Fy +B + Fp + W=0 r, “O18Fp5 ~ ODF yj + O88 yk — O.318Fei + OADFG * +0.818Fek + Foi — 40k | Fe ‘Equating the respective i,j, k components to zero yields Lo Bre =O; 0318 - O.518Fe + Fy = 0 0) aa EB, = 0; OAR, + OMAR = 0 @ amr BR =o O.818F5 + OS48Fe — 40 = 0 o . wean Sy Equation 2 states that Fy = Fo. Thus, solving £.3 for Fy and Fe » and substituting the result into Ea. 1 to obtain Fp, we heve : Fp = Fro=23.6N Ans. Hip 3.12 : Fp = 152 kN Ans,Secon 2.4 Three-Dirnensional Force Systems + 103 be ‘The 100-kg crate shown in Fig. 3-13a is supported by three cords, one of whici is connected to a spring. Determine the tension in cords AC and AD and the stretch of the spring, Solution Free-Body Diagram, The force in each of the cords ean be determined by investigating the equilibriuin of point ."The free-body Gagram is shown in Fig. 3-136, The weight of the cate is W = 100(981) = 981. Equations of Equilibrite, Each vector on the tree-body diagram is first expressed in Cartesian vector forin, Using Fg. 2-1 for Ky and noting point D(-t m,2m,2_m) for Ep, we hae Epo Fal ® Fe = Fo 005 120°1 + Fo.e0s 135% + Fe cos 0" = ~O5Fel ~ O70TK§ + O5Fek H+ 42k : th- lars oy OF ¥+ 0+ OY rx | om = 0333 pi + 0.667F xj + 0.667F pK W = (-98k} N 5 a Equibbrium requires UU’ 2E= 6 Fete + ¥p+W=0 : Fal ~ OSS ~ OFF) + OSFek ~ 0323Fh + DEFRA Wes8N + 0.667Fipk - 981k = 0 ® Fquating the respective i, j, k components to 2e10, p33 BR =O; Fp ~ 05Fe — 0353 = 0 @) XE, = 0 O01: + 0687 Fy = 0 @) BE = 0; OSfe + 0.667% ~ 981 = 0 @ Solving Hg.2 for Fp in terms of Fr and substituting into Eq. 3 yields Fo. Fp is determined irom Tq. 2. Finally, substituting the results into Eg, 1 gives Fa, Hence, Fo = S13N Ans, Fy = 867 N Ans. Fy = 093,7N ‘The stretch of the spring is therefore Foks, 6937 = 1300s 5 = 040m Ans,104. CHAPTER 3 Equilibrium of @ Particle PROBLEMS BL, Determine the magnitude and diroction of Fy required to Keep the concurrent force system jn equilibrium. acbn3m 342. Determine the magaitudes of Fj, Ty, and F; for equlibrfum of the particle. Pron 2 3.42 Determine the magnitudes of F, Fz, and F, for cequilibrinm of the particle. Prob. 3.8 1344 Determine the magnitude and direction of the {force F zoquired to keep the concurront force system in equitorium, Fys0s Ke Prep, 34Promeus © 105 JAS. The throc cables are used to support the SOON 3.47, Determine the stretch in cach of the twa springs Iamup, Deteraine the force developed in each cable-for required to hold the 20%g crate in the equilibrium equiibriom. position shawn. Fact spring has a2 vmstcetched length of 2m anda stiffness of k = 300 Nim. Prob 3-45 45.48. Htthe bucket and ss contents have a total weight cof 200 (~ 20 kp), determine the force in the supposting 346, I cable AB is subjected to a tension of 700 N, eables DA, DB, and DC. determine the tension ia cables AC and AD and the magnitude of the vertical force F. * | osm—4 Peab. 3-46 ead. 3.48105 + CHAPTER 3 Equilibrium of a Particle 93-49, ‘The 2500-N crate is to be hoisted with constant velodly -from the hold of a stip using the cable ‘rrangement showa. Determine the tension in each ofthe three cables for equilibrium. Prob.3-49 43.50, ‘The Iam hes a mass of 15 kg and is supported bya pole AO and cables AB and AC, If the force in the pole acts along is axis, determine the forces in AO, AB, and AC for equiitrium. ASI, Cables AB tnd ACem suctaina maxim tension of $00 N, and the pole con support 2 maxioun compression of 500 N, Deternune the maximum veight of the lamp (hat can besuppo:ted in the position shown. The force in the pole axs along the exis of the pole, xg robs, 50/51 3:62. Detesnine the tension in cables ABAC, aud AD, Tequited tohold the 300-N (~ 30-kg}crate in equliorium, Prob. 3-82 35% ‘The boom supports a bucket ard conteats, which havea total massof 300 eg, Detorminethe forces developed in sis A and AE ard the teasion in eable AB for equilbrivin. The force in cach strut acts along, axis Pro, 5-3364, Determine the force in each of the three, cables ‘needed lo lift the tractor which hes a mass of 8 Mg. Pro 284 355, Determine the force acting along the exis of each, of the three strats needed to support the SOX-ke block. Frok 3-45 "2.56. The SO-kg pot fs supported irom A by the three cables. Determine the force acting in each cable tor equilibrium. Take d “2.5, Promens + 107 2.57. Determine the height d of cable AB 0 that the force in cables AD and AC is one-half ae great us the force in cable 4B, What isthe force in each cable for this case? The flowerpot has 2 mass of 50 kp, 3.86 "Tae 400.N (= 40:kg) chandelier is supported by tee whes as shown Determine the force in each wire for equibbrium, 3-59, If each wire cia sustain ¢ maximum tension of 600.N before it fails, determine the greatest weight of the chandelier the wires will cyfport inthe position shown, Probe. 3-589108. CHAPTER 3 Equilibrium of a Particle *3.40n, ‘Deecoblesare used to supporta 900-N (= 90Kg) 3-62 _A smell peg P rests on a spring that is contained ring. Determine the tersion in each cable for equilioriura, inside the smooth pips. When the spring is compressed 1 so that s = O15 m, the spring exerts an upward forse of 60N on the pog. Determine the point of attachment AQ, 0) of cord PA so thet che tension in cords PB and PC equals 30 N and 50 N, respectively, 261. The 860-N (= 80-kg) oylindar is supported by three chains as showa, Determine the forcein each chain «3-443. Detertine he force in each cablenneeded to support for equitforinm. Take d = 1m. ‘he 7500.N (= L,75oate) platiorm. Set d = 2 m.Carre Rees +500 '9-64 The400-N bollis suspended from the hofizontal 3.65. _Detemtine the tension developed in cables OD ringusing Pave splngseack having an unstretchedlengih aad OB and the strut OC, required to support the kg (of0.5 m and stifiness of 1000 Nim. Determine the veriical crate. The spring OA has an aastetched length of 08m distance A from the ing to point 4 for eguifioriam, aada stitfness Koa = 1.2.kN/m. The force inthe strat ats slong the axit of the strat. rh 64 CHAPTER REVIEW + Bguilibriam. When a partide is at rest or moves with constant velocity, itis in equilibrium. This roguires that all the forces ecting on the partide form a zero force resultant. In order to account for all the forces, it is necessary to draw a free-body diagram. This diegram is an outlined shape of the particle that shows all the forces, Rsted with their knowa or unknown magnitudes and directions + Fo Dimensions. Tao two scaler equations of force equilibrlum ZF, = 0 end ER, = 0 ean be applied when referenced from an established x, y coordinate system, If the solution for a force magnitude yields a negative scalar, then the force ects in the opposite direction to that shown on the frec-body diagram. If tho problem involves a linear clastic epring then tho stretch or compression + of the spring can be related to the force applicd to it using F = ks, * Three Dimensions. Since three-dimensional geometry ean be difficalt to visualize, the equilibrium equation EF — 0 should be appliod using a Cartosian vector analysis This requires first expressing each force on the free-bocy dlagram as a Cartesian vector. When the forces ure Summed end set equal to zero, then the i j, and k components are also zero, so that BF, = 0, ZF, = 0 and BF, =0,410 + CHAPTER 3 Equilforium of a Particle REVIEW PROBLEMS 3-66, The pipe is bold ia place by the vice, Ifthe bolt ‘exerts 8 force 0f250N on the pipe inthe direction shows, detecrmine the forces £4 and Fg that the smooth contacts at A and B exert on the pipe. Prab. 3-66 3.67. When ys 2210, the eprings sustain 2 force of 300 Nb. Determine the magnitude of the applied vertical forces F and ~K required to pull poi A sway from point Ba distance of y = 0.2 m, The ends of cords CAD and CBD are attached to tings al Cand D. $468 When y is 7ro, the springs are each stretched O15 m, Determine the dolanee yifa force of F — 300 Nis anplied to points A and 2 as shown, The ends of cords CAD and CED are attached to rings al Cand D. 349. Romeo tries to reach Juliet by climbing with consteat velocity up a rope which is knotted at point A. Any of the theee segments of the rope can sustain a maximum force of 2 kN before it breaks. Determine if ‘Romeo, who hes « muss oF65 ky, caa dim the rope, and ifso, cam he along with his Jubet, who has 2 mass of 60 kg, clitub down vith constant velocity? Prats 349 3-70, Determize the magnitudes of forces Ki, Ho, and Ry necessary to hole the force F = {94 — §j ~'Sk} kN in equilibeiue, (m4, 20) Prab.3-703.71, Troma attemptsto pall helog at C by'vsing the three topes Detemnine the direction@ in which he shoutd poll on his rope with a fore of 490 N, so that he exerts araxima foree on the log. What is the force on the log for this ease? Ale, determine the direction in whieh he should pullin order to maximie the feres in Uae rape attached to B, What i this maximum force? Prob 1 ‘mB-TZ._Thering of negligiblesize is subjected to vertical force of 200.N Determine the required length foteord AC ‘such that the tension acting in AC is 1€0.N. Also, what is tho force acting in cord AB? Him Use the equifbsium ‘condition te determine the required angle ¢ for attachment, then determine / using trigonometry applied to ABC. Rewew Prosicus + 114 373. Detemnine the maximom weigh! of tieengine that can be supported without exceeding 2 tenston of 990 N in chain AB and 960 Nin chain AC. Prob. 73 344, Determine the fore in cach cable needed to support the 500-N (~ 50-kg) load, _—y Peeb.3-74 37S, “Thejeintotaspace franc ssabjected to four member forces Member OA Les inthe x y plane and member O28 liesin the y—z plane, Determine the fores acting in each of the members required for equilibrium of the joint. Prue 2-72 | rab28This utiity pole subjected to many forces, caused by the cables and the weight of the transformer. In some cases, it 5 important to be able to simply this system to a Single resultant force and specfy where this resuitant acts on the pole.* To discuss the concept of the moment of a force and show how to calculate jt in two and three dimersions. ‘+ 0 provide a method for finding the moment of a ‘orce about a specified axis, + To define the moment af a couple + 70 present methods for determining the sesultants of nonconcurrent force systems. * To indicate how to reduce a simple distributed loading to a resultant force having a specified location. 4.1 Moment of a Force—Scalar Formulation ‘The moment ofa force about 2 point of axis provides a measure of the tendency of the foree to cause a body to rotate about the poiat or axis, For example, consider the horizontal force Fp, which acts porpendicular to the handle of the wrench and fs located a distance dy from point 0, Fig, 4-la, It is seen that this forse tencs 10 cause the pips to turn about the 2 axis. The larger the force cr the distance dp, the grester the turning effect. This ‘cudeney for rotation caused by Rs is sometiines called a Jorgue, but mos: often itis called the moment of a force or simply the mortent (Mo), Note that the mosnenit axis (2) is perpendicular to the shaded plane (v-y) which contains both Fy and dy and that this axis interaveis the plane at point 0. 113Ma CHAPTER 4 Force System Rasultants ® Fig. 42 ‘Now consider applying the fores F, to the wrench, Fig. 4-19, This foree will of rotate the pipe about the z atis. Instead, it tends to rotate it abont the x axis, Keop in mind that although it may act be possible to actually “roiaic” or turn the pipe in this manner, K, stil crestes the tendency for rotation aad so the moment (Mg), is produced, As before, the force and distance d, lie in the shaded plane (yz) which is perpondicular to the moment axis {a}, Lastly, if a foree F, is appliee to the wrench, Fig. Lc, no moment is produced about point O. This results in a luck of tuning since the line af action of the force passes through O and therefore no tendency for rotation is possible. ‘We wil aow generalize the above discussion and consider the Cores F and point O which lie ia a shaded plane as shown in Fig. 42a. ‘The morient Mg about point O, or about an axis passing through O and perpendicular to the plane, is a vector quantity since it has a specified magnitude and direction, Magnitude. ‘The magnitude of Mo is we [Mo = Fa (1) where dis referred to us the movie! arm or perpendicular distance from the axis at point © to the line of action of the foree. Units of moment magnitude consist of force times distance, eg, N-m. Direction. The direction of Mo will be specified by vsing the “right. baud rule:"To do this the fingers of We right band are cusled such that they follow the sense of rotation, which would occur if the force could rotate about point O,Fig.4-2e, The dumb then pots along the moment axis 50 that it gives tae direction and sense of the moment vector, which is upward and perpendicular o the shaded plane conteining F and d. In three dimensions, Ma is illustrated by a vector arrow with a curl on it to distinguish it from a force vector, Fig. 4-2¢, Many problems fa mechanics however, involve coplanar force systems that may be conveniently viewed in two dimensions. For example, « two-dimensional view of Fig. (2a is given in Fig. 4-25. Here Mg is simply represented by the (counterclockwise) curl, which indicates the action of ¥. The arrowhead on this curl is used to show the sense of rotation caused by Using the righchand rule, however, realize that the rection and sense of the moment: vector in Fig. 4 2b are specified by the thumb, which points out of the page since the fingers follow the curl. In particular, otic’ that dus cur? oF sense of rotailon can always be detenniveed by observing in wiilch direction tke force watid “orbit” about point O (counterclockwise if Fig. 4-25). In two dimensions wo will oftea rofer to finding the moment of a force “about a point” (0). Keep in minc, however, that the moment ahueys acts about ar axis whieh is perpendicular to the plane containing F and 4, aad this axis interscots the plane at the point (0), Fig. 42a,StcTon 4.1. Moment of 3 Force—Sealar Formulation Resultant Moment of a System of Coplanar'Forces. ILasystem of forces liesin an 5-y plane, then the moment produced by cach force about point O will be directed along the z axis, Fig. 4-3. Consequently, the resullant moment Mg, ofthe system ewa be determined'by simply adding the mornents of all forces algebraically since all the moment vettors are collinear. We can write this veclar sum symbolically as Lt Mp, = Fa ey Here the counterclockwise eurl written alongside the equation incieates that, by the stalar sign convention, the moment of any force will be positive if it is directed along the +2 axis, whereas a negative moment is directed slong the —z axis ‘The following examphs illustrate numerical application of Eqs 41 and 42, By pushing dowm on the pry bar tbe load on the ground at A cam be lifted. The turning effect, caused by the applied fort, is due to the moment about A.To produve this ‘moment with minimum effort ve instizetively know that the force skotlé be applied to the end of the bar: however, the direction in which this force is applied is also important. This fs beoaise moment isthe procuct of the foree and the moment a7. [Notice that when the force i at an angle @ < 90°, then the mement arm distance is shorter tran when the force is epplied perpendicular to the bar @ ~ 00% c,d! < a. leno tho greatest moment produced when the force isferthest from point A and applied perpendicular to the ais of die bar 80 28 10 mextwze the moment arm. 15 “The moment of a forve Joss nol always ‘cals § rotation, For example, the fore F tends (orotate the beam clockwise about ils supportalA witha moment Af, = Fd, Tae Actual rotation would accir ifthe support at B were removed. Ia the same manner, F fexeules = tendengy to rotate the bem, somterclockwise about B vith # moment Mg = Fig, Hse the suppot! at A preveuts the rotation,116 + CHAPTER A Force System Resultants — ag ; For each case illusirsted in Rg. 44, determine the moment of the force about point O. Solution (Scolar Analysis) ‘The line of action ef each force is extended as a dashed line in order to establish the moment atm d. Also illustrated 's the tendency of rotation of the member as Caused by the force. Furthermore, the orbit of the force is shown as « colored curl Thus, Fig. 44a Hig. 44b Hig. 4c Hig 4d Hie 4e My = (100.N)¢2m) = 200N+m) Ans. Mo = (S0.1N)(0.15m) > 37.5N-mQ Ane My = (GO N}(4 m+ 2005 30" m) ~ 229N-d Ans My = (ON)(Lsin 45° m)=424N-m5 Ans, Mo = (TKN)(4m ~ 2m) =2L0KN-M4} dns ° ©Secnow 1 Moment of a Force—Scalar Formulation + 147 the moments of the S00:N force acting on the frame in Sig +5 cbout points 4, B C, and D. Solution (Scalar Ainatysis) Tn general, M = Fé, where d is the moment arm: or perpendicular disiance from the point on the moment exis to the fine of action of the foree. Henee, Ma = 800 N(25 mj = 2000N-mJ Ans ‘Mg = 800N(L5 mj = 1200N-my Ans Mc = 800N(O} = 0 (line of action of ¥ passes throwgh C) Aye ‘My = SOON(O5 m) = 400N-m4 Ans “The curis indicate the sense of rotation of the moment, which is defined by the direction the force orbits about each point. ‘Determine the resultaa! moment of the four forces aeting on the rod shown in Fig, 4 6 about point O. Softies Assuming that positive moments act in the +k direction, ie, counterclockwise, we have ty, = BFA; Mz, = ~SON(2m) ++ 6O'N(O) + 201N(3 sin 30° m) 40 N(4 m + 3cos 30° m) My, = ~334N-m = 334m) Ans, For this calculation, note how the moment-arma distances for the 20-N and 40-N forces are established from the extended (dashed) lines of action of each of these forces. Big ts Fp 6118 + CHAPTER 4 Force System Resuitants 4.2 Cross Product C=AxE ‘The moment ofa force will be formulated using Cartesian vectors in the neat section, Before doing this, however, i is first necessary to expand our knowledge of veotor algebra and introduce the cross-product method of vector multiplication, ‘The cross product of two vectors A and B yields te vector C, wisisl, is written C=AxR and is reed “C equals A crass B” Magnitude, The magritude of C is defined as the product of the magnitudes of A and B and taesine of the angle between their tails (0 = 6 = 180°). Thus, C — ABsin 2. Direction. Vector € has a direction that is perpendicular to the plane containing A and B such that C ts specified by the right-hand rule; i. corting the fingers of the sight hand from vector A (cross) to vector B, the thumb then points in the direction of C, as shown in Fig. 4-7. ‘Knowing both the magnitude and direction of C, we can write C= AX B= (ABsInO)Ug (4H) where the scalar AB sin 0 defines the magnitude of C and the unit vector Uc defines the direction of C. The terms of Eq. 4-3 are illustrated graphically in Tg. 4-8, a ReteLaws of Operation, 1. The commutative [aw is riot validsic., AXKB¥BXA Rather, AXH=-BXA ‘This is shown in Fig, 4-8 by using the right-hand ak, The coss product B x A yields a vector that acts in the opposite direction to Cie, BX A= —C. 2. Multiplication by a scalar a{A X B) = (a4) X B= A X (0B) = (A X Bla ‘This property is easily shown slace the magnitude of the resultant sector ([a] AB sin 9) and its dlreciton are the same in each case, 3. The ictributive lav: Ax (B+ D)= (Ax B)+(AxD) ‘The proof of this identity is left as an exercise (see Prob. 4-1). 1135 important fo note that proper order of the cross products must be maintained, since they arc not commutative, Cartesian Vector Formulation. Equation 4-3 maybe used to find the cross product ofa pair of Cartestan unit vectors, For cxampk, tofindi x J, the magnitude of the resultant veetoris ()(/)(sin 90") = (1)(1)(1) = 1, and ite direction is determined using the tight-hand role. As shown in Fig +10, the resultant vector points in the tk direction, Thus, Xj = (1k. [na similar manner, ixi=o ix] kxk=0 ‘These results should not be memorized: rather, it should be clearly understood how cach is obtained by usiag the right-hand zule and the definition of the cross produc. A simple scheme shown in Fig, 4-11 is helpful for obtaining the same results when the need stises. If the circle fs constructed as shown, then “crossing” two unit vectors in a comntercfockwise fashion eound the circle yields the pasitive third unit vector; og. kX i= j. Moving clockwise, a negative unit vector is obtwined; 8,4 Kk Stcnon 42. Cross Product, Rpt Kee Big 411 110CHAPTER 4 Force System Racultante Consider now the cross procuct of two general vectors A and B which are expressed in Cartesian vector form. We have AX B= (Ad + A,j+ Ads x (BL + Bj + BY) = ApByli 4) + ABE j) + ABE XI) + A,B XA) + A,BG XD + ABU 1 + AB(KX I) + A,B X J) + A;B(ic x Carrying out the cross-produet operations and combining terms yields AXM= (ADA BIA DAB HABA VBE (1A) This equation may also be written in amore compset determinant form 8 : 1 ij k AXB=|4, Ay 4,| (45) R By B,| ‘Thus, to find the cross product of any two Certesiaa vectors A and B, it fanecessary to expand a determinant whose first row of elements consists of the unit vectors i,j and k and whose second and third rows represent the x,y, z components of the two vectors A. and B, respectively.* **A determinant having three rows aad three colonmns can be expanded using three rinars. nck of which is muliplied by cne of the three terms inthe Fist wow. There are folwrelements in each miner, 02, Ay defintion, shi notation represents the terms (Asia ~ Assay), which ie snaply the procul af tbe two olements ofthe arene snsting domnverd tothe tight (Aqa;) mlm the product ofthe two cements inersected by the ariw slanting downwatd to the left (Ayan), Fora 3 x 3determingns, such as Bq. 4-5, she three salaoes ean be generared in accordaice wth the folowing shee: vo “Foe shoment ba HAR AB) ‘Adding the results and noting tht the felessest matt Include she minus sign yield the fexpanced form of A % BE given by Ba. 14 For element 2148, - AB) Focalement = MAB, — 4,2)Secnox 432 Moment of a Force—Vector Formulation m 43 Moment of a Force—Vector Formulation ‘The moment af force F about point O, or actually abovt the moment axis passing through O aad perpendicular to the plane containing O and F, Fig, 4-122, can be expressed using the vector cross product, namely, Mg =x F (4-6) Here r represents a position vector dravwn jrom 0 to any polnt lying on the line of setion of F. We will now show that indees the nioment Mo, when dotermiaed by this eross product, has the proper magnitude and direction, Magnitude. ‘The magaitude of the cross product is‘defined from Eq. 4-3.s Alo = +P sin 6, where the angle 0s measured between the tals of rand F. To establish this angle, r nus be treated as. sliding vector so that 6 ean be constructed properly, Fig. 4 12b, Since the moment arm d= rein, then Mg ~ rF sin @ = F(r sin 6) = Fa which agrees with Eg. 4-1, Direction. ‘The direction and seuse of Mo in Eq, 4-6 are determined by the right-hand sue as it applies (o the cross product, Thus, extending r to the dashed position and curling the right-hand fingers from r toward F, “r cross K? the thumb is directed upwerd or perpendicular to the plane containing rand Pand thisis in thesane directon as Mg, the moment of the force about point O, Fig. 4~12b, Note that the “curl” of the fingers, like tho curl around the moment vector, indieates the sonso of rotation caused by the force, Slnce the cross product is nct commutative, it is important that the proger order of r and F be maintained in Eq. <6, Momect xs Moment axis @ © Fg 412122. + CHAPTER 4 Force System Rawitents Fg ats Principle of Transmissibility. Consider the force F applied at point A in Bg. 4413, Ihe moment created by F about 0 is Mo = ra * Fy however, it was shown that “r”can extend from O to any point on the Fine of actiost of F, Consequently, F may be applied at point B or C, and the same moment Mg = ts X F = te X F will be computed, As a result, ¥ hhas the properties of a diding vector and can therefore act al any port along Hts fe of action anid st create the same moment about point O, We refer to this as the principle of savtsnusstbidity, and we Will disovss this property further in Sec. 4.7. Cartesian Vector Formulation. If weesteblish , , x coordinats axcs, then the position vector r end force F can be expressed as Cartesian vectors, Fig. 4-14. Applying Bq. 4-5 we have (71) where reff. tepresent the x, 2 components of the pesition vector drawn from paint O to any point oa the line of action of the force Fy Fy Fy represent (he x, 35 z components of the force veclor TF the dotenminant is expanded, then like Eg. 4f we have Mo = (ye — BM ee — eR + (Gey — EDK (+8) ‘The physical meaning of these three moment components becomes evident by studying Fig, 4-14e, For example, the i component of Mo is, Mement To: se) _/ Pa Rg 14Seertan 4.3 Moment of a Force—Vector Formulation = 123 determined from the moments of E,, Fy and'F, about the x axix Th particular, note that F, does no? create a moment of tendency to cause turning about the x axis since this force is paraifel to the x axis The line of action of F, passes (rough point B, and so the magnitude of the seoment of F, about point A on the x axis is 7, By the right-hand rule this component acts in the negative I direction. Likewise, F, contributes amonieat component of rfl Thus, (Mo), = (ryFy — 185) as shown Faq.4-8.As an exercise, establish the J and k components of Mg in this nianner and show that indeed the expanded form of the determinant, Eq. +8, represents the moment of F about point 0. Once Mg is determined, realize that it will always be perpendicidar (o the shaded plane containing vectors r and ¥, Fig, 4-14. Te will be shown in Example 44 that the computation of the moment using the cross product has distinct advantage over the scalar formulation when solving problems ia three dhmensfons. Thc 's because ‘generally casier to establish the position vector to the foree, rather than determining the moment-arm distance d that must be directed perpendicular to the line of setion of the force. Resultant Moment of a System of Forces. If a body isacted upen by a system of forces Fig, 4-15, the resultant moment of the forces about point O can be determined by vector adcition resulting from successive applications of Eq. 4-6, This resultant can be written symboliatly es Mz, = 2(eXF) #9) tnd fe shown ia Fig. 415, {f wepull oncable BC with a force I at any pete along ‘he cable, the moment ofthis foree about the base of the utley pele at A will always be the same, Thisisa consequence of the principle of transmissibilty. Nove that the momieat 2tm,or perpendicular distance om Ate the cable, i 7, and 40 Mg = te?- In threo ‘dimensions ts detance often difficult te determine, ‘and 20 we can use the vector cross product (0 obtain te moment fa amore direct manner. For example, DLs = tay X B= tye X EAs required, both of tnese ‘vectors dre directed from point 4 toa peiat on the lie of adien of the force.124 + CHAPTER 4 Force System Resukants Oy Wig 436, 401,320) todok Condmo MasraxF= 32 49-20 40 ‘The pole in Fig. d-l6a is subjected to & 60.N force that is directed from C to B. Determine the magnitude of the mement created by this force about the support at A, y Solution {Vector Analysts) ‘As shown ia Fig. 4-165, cither onc of twe position vectors can be used for the solution, since My = tg X F or M4 = 1 X F. The position ‘vectors are represented as rg = {I+ 3) 4 2k}m and i= {31+ 4j}m ‘The force has a magnitude of 60 N aad a ditection specified by the unit vector ur, directed from C to B.'Thus, (1-912 G- 4+ Fe (60N)up = con = {401 = 20} + 404} ‘Substituting into the determinant foomulation, Fy. 47, and following the scheme for determinant expansion as stated in the foomote on page 120, we have = [3(40)—2(—20)}i-[1(40)—2(—40}} j + [1{-20)—3(-40)}x or oj ok Ma ste X P= 400 -40 20 49 = [4(40)-0(~-20)]t-[3(40)-0(—40)]} + [3(-20) -4(—40) kc In both cases, My = {1601 — 120] + 190K) Nem ‘The magntiudg of Mis therefore Mg = +f (160)? + (120) + (100 = 224Nsm Ans, As cxpected, MI, acts perpendicular to the shaded plane containing vectors E, tp, and tc, Fig, 4-16e, (How would you find its coordinate direction angles @ = 44:3, B = 122", y = 634°Y) Had this problem been worked using scalar approsch, where My = Fa, notice the ifficuty that can atise im obtaining the moment atm @,Stcttay 4.3 Moment of = Force—Vector Formulation + 425 ‘Theo forces act om the rod shown in Fig 417n. Determine the resultant moment they create about the fange at O and determine the coordinate ditection angles of the moment axis. Fosition vectors are dizected from point O to cach force as shown in Fig 4-175. These veetors are y= (9) m rg = [4+ 5} — 2} m “The resultant moment about O is thefefore ¥y = (04 40)—300 May = 2X F) XK tm XK + aX @ ig kl) hoa ow ft ak =/|0 5S O]4+|/0 5 O]+]4 5 -2 -0 40 20) lo 50 0] }30 40-30) = [5(20) ~ 40(0)]i — [Oj] + [0(40) — (—60)(5)]k + [oi ~ 0 + 0K] + [5(-30) — (40)(—2) — [4(—30) ~ 80(—2)]j + [4(4O) ~ 80(5)] = {301 — 40j + 60k} Nem Ans. | | i | Whe moment axis is directed along the line of action of Mg, Since ¥ | the magnitude of this moment is Mp, = \/ G07 + (40)? + (60)? = 78.10 Nom ® the ualt sector which defines the direction of the mameut axis is M, Wi — 40j + Ok a pe EL OR sett ~ ost23j + 0.7602 i fro Meg = (3 Gj 460K} Nem} hy = 308%) | “Ans wae Ans. * | Ans, o ‘These results are shown in Fig, 4-i7¢. Realize that the thiee forces Bg ht7 tend to cause the red to rotate about this aais in the maaner shown by the curl indicated on the moment vector. poo126 + CHAPTER 4 Force System Resutants 44 Principle of Moments F R Hy 418 5 A concept often used in mechanies is the principle of moments, which is sometimes referred to as Yasiguon’s theorem since it was originally developed by the French mathematician Varignon (1654-1722). states that themoment of aforce abou apointis equel ta the sum ofthe moments of te force’s components abou: the potnt. The proof follows dircetly from the distributive law of the vector cross product. To show this, consider the force F and two of its rectangular components, where I = F, + Fa, Fig. 448, We have My = eX Rpt rX R= eX (Rt h) = 0X F ‘This concept has important applicetfons to the solution of problems and Proof of theorems that follow, since it is often easier to determine the moments of a force's components rather than the moment of the force inelt, ‘he guy cable exes a force F dn the pole and this estes a moment about the bese ALA Of Hy = a. tthe force is replaced by ts two caraponeats K, and By 2 point 2B vere the cable acts on the poe, then the sim of tae momeats ofthese two ‘components about will yed the same restliant moment For the calculation F, will ‘teate zero moment ebott A and so Ma = Fh. This sen application o he principle 2 moment. In aiion we ean apply the principle of irannnissbity ae lie the Torce to where isin of action intersects the grotind at Cla this case E, wih este zero moment about A,ard 20 Ady = Ab IMPORTANT POINTS » “The moment of a force indicates the tendency of a body to tum about an axis passing through a specific point O. © Using the right-hand rule, the sense of rotation is indicated by the fingers, and the thumb is directed slong the moment axis, or ine of action of the moment, 2 The magnitude of the moment is determined from Mg = Fd, where d is the perpendicular or shortest distance from point O te the line of action of the force F. * In three dimensfons use the vector cross product to determine the moment, ie, My =r X F, Remember that r is directed jrom point © to any point on the line of action of K. = ‘the principle pf moments states that themoment of a force about a point iz equal to the sam of the moments of the force's components about the point, This is a very convenient method to ‘use in two dimensionsStcnow 4.4 Principle of Moments = 127 ‘A.200-N force acts on the bracket shown in Fig, 4-192, Determine the moment of the force about point A. Sobtton | ‘The moment arm d can be found by trigonemetsy, using the construction shown in Fig 4-196. rom the right triangle BCD, CB = d = 100.005 45° ~ 10.71 me = 0.07071 m ‘Thus, Mg = Fd = 200N(O.07071 m) = 144 Nemoh j According to the right-hand! vale, My is directed in the +k direction since the force tends (0 rotate oF orbit couserctocksvise about poiut A, Hence, reporting the moment as a Cartesian vector, we have t My = {141k} Nom Ans Solutions It The 200-N force may be resolved into x and y components, as shown im Fig, 4-19e, In accordance with the principle of moments, the ‘moment of F computed about poiat A is equivalent to the sura of the moments produced by the two fore components. Assuming counterclockwise rotation as positive, ie, in the +k direction, we can | apply Pq. 4-2 (M, = 3d), Ja which case | aM = (200 sin 45°N}(0.20 ma) ~ (200 c08-45°N)(0.20 ma) = 141 Nem moses Thus My By comparison, itis seen that Solution II provides a mere convertent method for analysis than Solution I siace the moment arm for each component force is easier to estabiish. 141k} Nem Ans °128 + CHAPTER 4 Force System Resultants “The force F acts st the end of the angle bracket shown in Fig. 4-200, Determine the moment of the foree about point 0. Solution I (Scalar Analysis) ‘The force is resolved into ils y and y components as shows in Fig, 4-208, and the monreuts of the components are computed about point Q. Taking positive moments as counterclockwise, ie.,in the +k direction, we have [+Mo = 400 sin 30° N(Q2m) — 400cos 30° N(O.4 m) = 986 N-in = 98.6N-m) or Mg = {98.64} Noa Ans. ——* solunion 1 {Vector Analysts) 02m Using a Cartesian vector approach, the force and position vectors shown int Fig, 20 can be represented a5 00 sin 2D" N p—04a— r= {041 - 0.39} m 40 00 24° N F = {400 sia 301 ~ 400 cos30")} N o = (200,01 — 346.49} N ‘Tho moment is therefore i iy Mg=rx¥=|04 -02 0 200.0 3464 0 x = Gi = Oj + [0.4(—346.4) - (-0.2)(200.0)}k = {-98,6} Nem Ans. By comparisos, it is seen that the scalar analysis (Sofution 1) provides a more conventent method for analysis than Sotution LI since the direction of the moment and the moment am for each component force aro eagy to establish. Hence, this method is generally Fig 20 recommended for solving problems displayed in wo dimensions. On the other hand, Cartesian vector analysis is generally recommended only for solving three-dimensional problems, where the moment arms and force components are often more difficult to determine.PROBLEMS 44, 1 A, B, and Dae given veeton, prove the Gabative jaw for the wGcor stone produc, Ley, ANB ED) ~ (AXE) +(AXD). 42, Prove seal A EXO the triple (AX B)*C. product identity 4-3. Given the three nonzero vector A, B, and ©, show thatif A+ (BX C} = 0, the three vectors must lie In the ‘same plane, ‘44. Determine the magnitude and directional sense of the moment of the force at A about point 0. 45, Determine the magnitude und directional senco of the mement of the force at A about potre P. Promems + 129 +48, Determine the magn/tude and directional sense of ‘the resultant moment of the forees about point O, 49, Determine the magnitude and directional sense of ‘the resultant moment of the forces about point ?. I sm $00N A We bet Pros 5 446, Determine the magnitude and directional seuse of the moment of the force at A about point O. 47. Determine the maguitude and directional sense of the moment of the force at A ebout point P. \ son I uh — a Peobs. 4-617 Probe 4919 4410. ‘The wrench is used to loosen the bolt. Determine the moment of each force about the bolts exis passing through paint 0, [> pmol — a, wo Prob. 4-10120+ CHAPTER 4 Force Systam Rasultants 441, Determine the magnitude and dircctionalsense of fuld. Determine the-momnent of e2ck force about the the resnitant moment of the forees about point O, bolt iocates at A, Take Hy = 200 N, Ke = 250, IS, UC Fy = 150 N and Fe = 225 N, determine the resultant morient absot the bolt located at A. Peab. Peobs. $1415 12. Determine the moment aboulpaint A ofechot “416 “The power polesupports the three lines, each line the three forces zcting on the bear, exerting = vorical force on the pole due 10 Its weight as shown, Determine the resultant moment at the base D dime to all of these forces, If itis possible for wied or ice losnap the fines, detezmine which line (3) whea removed create(s) a condition for the greutest moment abort the dase, What is this resultant mone a || 4 ] zasaN ] as 30000 2000 ‘ | ae j12m 413, Determine the moment about point 2 of each of fhe thres forces acting on the beam. 30" Role all Prob 12013 Prob. 4-164412, A force of 80 NV acts on the hendle of thé papor cutter at A. Determine the momeat created by this force about the hinge at 0, if@ = 60", At wnat angle @ shovid the force be applied so thet the morzeat it creates about point Os amaximam (clockwise)? What is this macimem moment? Prob. 4-17 418, Determine the direction (0° = 8 = 180°) of the fore F= 200 N so that It produces (a) the masimam momect about point and (b} the minimam moment sbott pout A. Compute the moment in each case. Prob. 1 Promeus + 131 4.19, ‘The bub of the wheel ean be attached to the azle either with avgative offvet (eft) or wita padldve offset (tight). Ifthe tire is subjected to bota « noxenat and radial load as shown, determine the resultant moment of these Joads about the axle, point O for both cases, a an Cae cue? Prob. 419 +420, ‘Ihe boom bas «length of 9 ma weight of 1000, and mass eecter at G,Cthe maximum momen: thet cab be developed by the motor at A is Af = 3010) Nm, determine the maximum load W, having a mess center at that cam be ited. Take 6 = 30°. Prob. 4-28422 + CHAPTER 4 Force Syctem Resuitante 4201, The tool at A isused to hold a power lawnmewer blade stationary while the mat is beieg tonsened with the merch, Ifa force of 50 N is applied to the wrench wt B in the direction shown, determine the moment it creates abovt the mut at C. What is the magniinde of force F at Aso that it clestes the opposite moment about C? Prab. 4-21 4.22, Determine the moment of each of the three foros bout pointsA, Solve the problem firs! by usingexch force as a whole, and then by usiig the principle of moments. Prot, 422 423, ds part of an acrobatic stunt,a man supports a gi ‘who has a Weight of S00.N (= 50 ke) and is seated on a chair on top of the pole, Ifher center of gravity is st G, and if the maximun. counterclockwise moment the man ‘cen osert on the pole al A is 250 N-m, dotormine the maximum angle of dit,@, which will not aflow the gil a fll, iz, so her clockwise moment cbout A does not exceed 350.N-m, ” Prob. 423, 3424, The two boys push om the gate with forces of Fy ~ 120 N and Fy — 200 N as shown, Determine the roment of each forse about C. Which Way will the gate rotate, clockwise or counterclockwise? Neglect the thickness of the gate 428, "Twa boys push on the gate as shown. If the boy at Bexerts aforce of Fy ~ 120 N, determine the magnitude fo te force Fg the boy ata mus exert in order to prevent the gate from turning, Neglect the thickness of the gate. Probe, 42505426, The towiing exerts a foreo of P ~ 4kN at iho end of the 20-m-long crane boom. If @ = 30°, determine the placemeat x of the hook at 4 50 shat zhis forse creates & axinum moment about point O. What jp this moment? 4.27, The towiine exerts 2 force of P = 4kN at the end, of the 20-n:- tong crane boom. Hx = 25.m, delermine the position @ of the boom so that this foree creates a ‘maximum moment about point O. What is this moment? robs, 26007 4.28, Determine the direction 8 for 0" s 0 = 181° of the fowe Fso that F produces (a) the maximum moment about point a and (b}the minimum momeat about poiat A, Cakulale the moment ia each caso. 429, Dotermiac the morcent of th fox F about point A a5 4 function of @. Plot the resuies of 4 (otdinare) 0 (abscissa for 0° = 0 = 180. Fe 4008 3m Probe, 4289 Promeus + 133 420, The total hip ceplacemont it subjected to a force of F = 120, Determice the moment ofthis force about the neck et A. and at the stem B 1208 431, Tho cince ean be adjusted for aay angle 0 6 = 90° and any extension 0S x= Sm, For § suspended mass of 120 kg, determine the moment cewiloped at A as a function of x and 0. What values of both x snd @ dovolop the maxiznam potsible moment AT Compute this moment, Neglect the size of she pulley at 8.14 CHAPTER A. Force Systom Rosuitants #432, Deletmine the angle @ at which the SQO-N force suis act af so that the Moment of thistorce about point Bisequa to zero, 433, Sogments of dill pie B for en oll wellare fighianed a prexerihed amonat by ming 2 st of tongs “which grip tho pipo, aad a hydraulic oyndor (aot showa) to regulate (he force F applled (9 the fongs This fore acts along the ‘able vihich passes around the small pulley P. Ifthe eabie ‘is orginally perpersientr tothe tongs as shown, determine the magritude of force F which mast be apotiad co that the moment about the pipe i Mf = 2000 Nm. In onder (© ‘maintain thissame moment vhat mégnitude of ¥ isrequired ‘when the tongs rotate 30° 0 the dashed position? Note:The fingle DAP is no SEP in this postion. Prob. +33 434. Determine the moment of tie force at A about point Q. Kpress the result as 2 Cartesian veotor. 435, Deternine the moment of the foree at 4 about point P. Express the result at a Cartesian vector, = {601~30} 206} Prods $3035 36, Determine the moment of the force Fat A about point O, Repress the result as a Cartesian vector. 437, Determine the moment of the force Fat A abou paint P. Express the rest vector.Promems + 135 438, Thecurvedrod liesin the xy plancandnas aradius. 4-41. The curved rod has radius of 05 m, Ifa force of of 3 m. If & force of F = 80N ais at its end as shown, 60 N acis at ils ead as shown, deermine the moment of etecrrine the moment of this force about point C. this force about point C 4:39, Tho curved rod lies in the -y plane and has a radius of 3m. Ia force of F = 80N acts at ils end as shown, Actecmiue the momsat of this farce about point 2. Prob, 4-41 Prehs 4389 “449, "The force I= {6001 + 300} - 600K} N acts at 442. A force F having a magnitude of # ~ 100N acts the end of the beam, Determine the moment ofthe force along the disgonal of the parallelepiped, Detenminé the about point A. imoment of F about point A, using Ma = ty X ¥ anc Masi XE Probes436 + CHAPTER 4 Force System Resultants 448, Determine the smallest force F that mast be applied along the rope In order to cause the cirved roc, wheh has a radius of 05 m, 10 fait atthe sapport C. This requires & moment of M= 8) N-m to be developed at €. 446 Strut AB of the Lourdianeter batch door exerts a fore of 40 Non point 8. Determine the moment of this force about point O. Prob. $43, ‘444, ‘The pipe assembly is subjected tothe 80-N force. 447, Using Cartesian vectac analysis, determine the Determine the moment of this force about point A resultant moment of the three forces about the bass ol “The pipe ase is subjected to tho 80 frco, WS St¥EH AL ALT F,~ (4001 300} 120K) N, Determine the mament of this force about point B, ya {1001 (00j— 6OnI Bye (stu) Poo tat$448. A force of F— {61 —2f + ARYEN produces a (41 + 5] — 14k} KNem shout" the gin of coordinates, point ©, If the force acts at z point having an x coordinate of + = i m, determine the y aie 2 coordinates Probes 49, The fowe P= {G++ 10K] N creates a ‘moment about point O of Ms = {141 + 8] + 2k}N-m, the fowe passes through 2 point heviag an x eoordinale of 'm.determine they and z coordinates cf the point Alo, realizing that Mo ~ Fd, determine the perpenctcular distance d from point @ 10 the line of action of F Proiems © 437 24.50, Using a ting collar the 75-N force can act in the vertical plage at various angks 6 Determine the magnitude of the moment 4 produces about point A,plot the result of M (ordinate) versus @ (abscissa) for OF = 0 = 180°, and specify the angles thet give the138+ CHAPTER 4 Force Systom Resultants 4.5 Moment of a Force about a Specified Axis Recall that whea the moment of a force is computed about a point, the moment and its axis aro efivays porpendicnlar to the plane containing the forve and the moment arm. In some problems it is important to find the component of this moment along a specified exis that passes through the point. To solve this problem sither a scaler or vector analysis can be ved, Scalar Analysis. Asa numerical example of this problem,consiéer the pipe assembly shown in Fig. 4-214, witieh lies in the horizontal plane and is subjected to the vertical force of F = 20N applied at point A.'The moment of this force about point O has a aragnitde of = (20NXOSm) ON-m, and a direction defined by the right- hand rule, as shown ia Fig, 4-212. Tais moment tends to tura the pipe about the Ob axls.For practical reasons, however, It may be necessary to determine the component of Mo about the p axis, M,, since this omponent tends to wasere the pipe Lrg the Bangs a! O. Prom Fig, 4-2La, M, has a magnitude of Af, seme of rection showmby fhe vector solution. Rather than performing this ¢wo-step process of first finding the momen! of the force about point y Bs and then resolving the mortent along tHe y axis, it is also possible to solve this problem directly. To do so, it is necessary to determine the perpendicuiay or moment arm distance from the line of action of Fto the y axis, From Pig. 4-212 this distance is 0.3 m. Thus the mognttede of the rnioment of the force abou! the yaxisisagain M, = 0.3(20N) = and the dfrection is determined by the right-hand rule as shown. Ja general, then, if the line of action of @ force F is perpendiculer to any specified axis ae, the magnitude of the moment of F about the axis can be determined from the equationSECON 45 Moment of a Force about a Specified Axis « (#10) Here d, is the perpendictidar or shortest distance trom the force line of getion Lo the axis. The direction is determined from the thumb of the ht hand whea the fingers are curied in accordance with the direction “OF rotation a8 produced by the fore. In particular, realize that a force will not contribute @ moment about « specified axis if the force tine of action is paraliel 10 the axis or its line of action passes throtgh the axis. a Ifa horizontal force F's applied to the handle of the flox-headed wren, it tends to tam tae socket at A about the z axis Ths effect is caused by the moment of F about the axit The mariunum mament is deterrined when the wrench isin the horizontal plane £0 that fll leverage from the handle can he acsleved, ie, (Mun ~ Fd. € the Rendle is mot in the horizontal position, thon fhe reoment about the x axis is delerralued fom M,~ Pd", where d’ is the perpendiculor distance from the lore bac of action to ihe asis We can abo derenmine this moment by first fading the moment of F about 4, hig = Fé, then fnaiag the projection or component of this moment along g ie. My * Afy 0068. Vector Analysis. ‘Ihe previous two-step solution of first finding the moment ofthe force abouta point ou the axis and then finding the projected component of the moment about the axis can also be performed sing a vector ‘analysis, Fig. 4-21b. Hore the moment about point O is first determined fom Mg = t4 & F = (0.34 + Oj) X (-208) = {—8 + O}N-m. The component orprojection of this moment along the y axis is then determined from the dot product (Sec. 2.9), Since the unit vector for this axis (or Tine) is then My = Mo: ug = (—8t + Gf): f=GNem. This result, of course, isto be expected, since it represents the § component of Mo 139140 + CHAPTER 4 Force System Resultanis some Fpaar A vector analysis such as this is perticularly advantageous for finding the moment of a force about an atis when the force components of the approprlate moment arms are difficult to determine, For this reason, the above two-step process will now be genoralized and applied to « body of arbitrary shape, To do so, consider the body in Fig. 4-22, which is subjected to the force F seting at point A, Here we wish ta determine the effect of Fin tending to rotate the body about the aa’ axis This tendency for rotation Js measured by the moment component M,. To determine M, we first compute the moment of F about any arbimrary point O that lics on the aa’ atis, In this case, Mg is expressed by the cfoss product Mg = 1 X F, were rls directed from © to A. Flere Mg acts along the moment ax's BH, and so the component or projection of ‘Mg onto the aa’ axis is thon M,. ‘The maguituds of M, is determined by the dol product, M, = Mp cos6 = Mo" vgwihere u, is a unit vector that defines the direction of the aa’ axis Combining these two steps as a general expression, we have My = (r X F)- ug Since the dot product is commutative, we can also write oy yp XD) Tn vector algebra, thiscombination of dot and crass product yielding the scalar Ad, is called the éripie scalar product. Provided x, 3, © axcs are established and the Cartesian components of each of the vectors can De determined, then the triple sealar product may he written in determinant form as ijk Wy= (igi tial + tak} |r re le FF or shaply (om) swhoro . tas tpste, Fapresent the x, y, = components of the unit ’ vector defining the direction of the aa’ exis tetlpts roprosent the; » ¢ components of the position vector drawn from any potut O on the an’ axis to eny pot A on the line of action of the foroe FFF; represent the x, y, z components of the force vector.Stevan 4.5. Momant of a Foree about 2 Spectiied Axis When M,is evaluated from Eq. 4-11, it will yield a positive or negative scalar. The sign of this scalar indicates the sense of direction of M, along the aa! axis If itis positive, then M, will have the same sense as Ug, whereas if itis negative, then M, will act opposite to ‘Once M, § determined, we can then express M, 2 a Cartesian vector, namely, faq = [Oy* (er X FJ, (4-12) Finally if the resultant moment of a series of forces isto be consputed about the ae! axis, then the moment componenls of each force are added together algebraically, since each component lies along the same axis, ‘Thes the magnitude of M, is M, = Baye (e X F)] = ur B) The examples which follow illustrate a aumetical application of the above concepts. ‘Wind blowing on the face or ths iefic sign creates « resultant force F that tends to tip the sign over due to the moment A, created about the a ~ a acs The momeat Of F about a point 4 that lies on the axis is M, = TX F, The projection of this ‘moment along the axis, whose dltestion i defined by the unit vector ,. is M, = a,+(t X ¥). Had this moment keen enleulated using sealar methods, ten the ‘perpendicular distance from the fore line of aetion to the a — aaxis would bave to be determined, which inthis case would be a moro diffettttark. IMPORTANT POINTS + The moment of a force about a specified axis can be determined provided the perpencicular distance d, from both the force fine of action and the axis can be determined. M, = Faq I vector analysis s used, M, == ug" (t X F}, where u, defines the irection of the aris and x is directed from any point on the ax’s {0 any point on the line of action of the force, 2 Tea, is calculated as 2 negative scalar, then the senseof direction of M, is opposite to Ue 2 The moment M, expressed as a Cartesian vector is determined from My — May m142. + CHAPTER A Fores system Resultants “The force F = {—40t + 20j + 10k} N acts at point A shown in Fig, 4-Za. Determine the moments of this force about the x and a axes, Soltion | (Vector Analysis} ‘Weccan solve this problem by usiag the position vector r4. Why? Since ty = {31+ 4j + 6k} m and u, =i, then applying Eq. 4-13, 1 09 0 Maha XB)=|-3 4 6 40 20. 10 . ‘= MA(10)--6(20)}--O[(—3)(40)—-6(—40) }-O[{—3}(20)—4¢—40)] = Nem Ans ‘The nogetive sign indicates that the sense of M, is opposite to i, “Weean compnte M, also using "4 becavse Ta extends froma peint on tne aaris to the force. Also, uy = —31 + $j. Thus, a) 3S M,=ue(taXF)-|3 4 6 ~40 20. 19) = ~${4(19)~6(20)]-$U(—3)(19)-6( —-40)]+01(—3)(20)~-4--40)] = -2ONem Ans. What doce the negative sign indicate? ‘The moment components are shown in Fig, 4-235. Solution Ul (Scalar Analysis) Since the force eamponents and momant atme are easy to determine for computing M,, a scalar analysis can be used to solve thts problem. Referring to Fig. 4-23, only the 10-N and 20-N forces contribute momerts about the x axis, (The line of action of the 40-N force is pparalle to this axis and hence its moment about the x axis is zero.) Using the righthand rule, the algebraic sum of the moment components about the = axis is therefore M, = (LON)(4m) ~ QON)(Gm) = —BON-m Aas. Although no} required here, note also that M, ~ (ON)@ m) — (40N)(6m) = -210N-m 1M, = (40N)(4m) = (20N)G m) = 100N-m If we were to determine M, by this scaler method, it would require imuch more effort since the force components of 40.N and 20N are Fig £23 not perpendicular to the direction of the @ axis. Ihe vector analysis yields a more dlirect solution,Steen 4.5 Moment of a Force about 2 Specified Axis + 443 ‘The rod showa in Fig. 4-24a is supported by two brackets al A and B. Determine themoment M 12 produced by F = {~€0Gi+200}~300k} N, which tends to rotale the rod about the AB axis, solution A vector analysis using Map = ua (e F) vill be considered forthe solution dnce tie moment sm oc perpendicclar distance from the line of action of F to the AB axis is difficull (o deteunine. Each of the terms in the equation will now be identified. ‘Unit veclor ug defines the direction of the AZ axis of the rod, Fig 4-24), where wa Oa +0! 804i + 0.445 Voay + (027 | | Vector ris dizecled from any point on the AB axis to ary point on the line of action of the force. For example, position vectors re and rp are suilable, Fig. 4-246. (Although not shown, rg¢ OF pp cal also it y We choose rp, Where Yp = {0.2} m F = {-G00/ + 200] — 300k} Substituting these voetors into the determinant form and expanding, ‘we have Lo Foamoan.9) 0294 0447 0 | Map as-(toXF)=| 0 02 0 : ® | jee 209-300] | | = 0.894[0.2(—300) — 0(200)] — 0.447[0(-300) — 0(—-600)) + Fe 424 | t f0¢200) — 0.2¢—600)) 53.67 Nom “The negative sign indicates that the sense of M 4a is opposite to thet of up Expressing Mag 28 a Cartesian vector yields Mya = Mgup = (~93.67 N m)(0.6941 + 0.447) {748.04 ~ 24.0} Nem Ans ‘The result is shown in Fig. 4-746, Note that if axis AB is defincd usinga unit vector directed from 3 | toward A, thea in the above formulation —ay would have to be used. | This would lead to May~=+5367N+m, Consequently, | Man= Mag(-~ug),and the above result would again be determined.144 = CHAPTER 4 Force System Resultants PROBLEMS 451. Determine tho momont of the force F abeut the On exis, Express the cesull as 4 Cartesian veetor, Be [5th —20j sam Sys i 2 Tm r ven 452, Deteunine the moment of the foree F about ke aa axis, Express the result as a Cartesian vector. (901+ 0] + 20H Probe 4953, Determine the resultant moment of the tivo forces about the Qaaxis. Express the testIt as a Cartesian vector, Prob. 4-43 454 Determine the magaitde of the momest of each of the three forces about the axis AB, Salve the problem {@) using « Cartesian veetor approach and (b) vsing & Scalar approtch Probe $4455, Thechain AZ exerts a fores of 100.N on the door at B, Determine the magnitude of de moment of ts fore: along the hinged aris x of the door. Peo, 85 466. The force of F =30N acts on the bracket as skown, Determine the moment of the ferce about the a- a zig ol the pipe. Also, detormiae the coordiaute disection mages of Fin order to produce the maximum moment about che aa axis, What is éhis moment? Prowisus + 145, 4:87. The extting tool on the lathe exerts a force F on fe shaft Ie the direction shown. Determine the moment OF fais force about the y aris of the shat Prete 57 4°58. “The hood of the automobile is supported by me strut AB, which exestsa force of = 100 N on the hood. Determine the memes of this foree abet the Hinged ais y. Prob t-58146 + CHAPTER 4 Force System Resultants 459. Determine the magnitude of the moments of te farce F about the z, », and z axes. Solve the problem (2) sing a Cartesian vector approach and (b) using a scalar approach, $4.60. Determine the moment of the force ¥ zbout aa axis ontending between A and C. Bxpress the result a8 a Cartesian ¥ector. robs 4.55160 4661, The lagand box wrenches are used in combination 19 remove the Ing rt from the whee! bb, Ifthe applied force on the end of the box wronch is F ~ {$i ~ 13) + 2k} ny, ecermine the magnitude of the momcat ofthis forceabout Ihe x axis Which is effective in unscrewing the lug cut 4462. A TUN (= kg) force acts vertically on the "2" bracket. Determine the magnitude of the moment of this force about the bolt axis (2 axis). 463, Determine the magnitude of the moment of the force F = [S0i — 20) ~ 90k}N about the base Ene CA of the tripod. Frob 463464. "The fles-headed ratchet wreach is evbjecied toa force of P = 80 N, applied perpendicular o te handle as shown, Deterntine the moment or torgue this imparts along the vertical axis of the bolt at A. 4465. Téa torque or moment of 8 N- m is required to Tooson the bolt at A, dotermine the force P that rust be applied perpendicular to the lundle of the flex-headed ‘tenet wrench. rubs 464165 466. “the A-frame is being heisted fato an upright ‘position by tho vertical forco of F = #00 N. Determine the momort ofthis force abot the y axis when te fame isin te position shown. Pras 46 Promuems + 447 46% A horizontal fore of is applica perpendicular to the handle of the pipe wrench. Determine the moment that this foree exerts along the aris CA (2 axis) of the pipe assembly. Both the wrench and pipe assombly. OARG, feinthe yz plane. Suggestion: “Use a scalar analysis Prob. 67 44.48, Determine the magnitude othe horizoatal force B= Fi astigon the hackle of the wrench so that this force produces a component of momect slong the CA ais ( axis) of the ripe assembly of M1, = {ale} Nem. Both the wreuch and the pipe assembly, OABC Tie ia the ‘ye plans, Suggeaion: Uso scalar enalysis, Pret 68448 + CHAPTER 4 Force System Result Itants 4.6 Moment of a Couple Figo A coupleis defined as two parallel forces that have the same magnitude, have opposite directions, and are separated by a perpendicular distance a, Fig, €25. Since the resultant force is zero, the only effect of a couple is to produce a rotation or tendency of rotation in a specified direction, ‘The moment produced by a couple is called a couple moniert, We can determine tts value by Sindfag the sum ofthe moments ofboth couple forces about ayy acbitrary point. For example, in Fig, 426, position vectors rand ing axe dixecied from pont O to poiats A and B lying on the line of action of “Band F, The couple moment computed about O fs therefore M = 4X (“F) + tp XR Rather than sum the moments of both forces to determine the couple moment, it is simpler to take moments about a point lying on the line of action of one of the forces. IE point A is chosen, thea the moment of “F about 4 is zero, and we have MearxE (413) The fact that we OBtaiu tho same result in both cases can be demonstrated by noting that in the first case we can write M= (ts -4) XI and by the triangle rule of vector addition, ra trp OF F-15—r,, 90 thal upoa substitution ws obtain Eq. 4-13, This result indicates that a couple moment is a ree vector, ie it can act al any podit since M depends only upon the position vecior t directed between the foroes aad! not the position vectors rq aad 1g, directed from the arbitrary polat Oto the forces This concept fs therefore nnlike the moment of a force, which requires a definite point (or axis) about which moments are dstormined, Scalar Formulation. Themomen' of « couple,M, Fig. 4.27, is defined as having a mingrinide of cae) where Fis the magnitude of on€ OF Wie Forves and dis the perpendicular distance or moment arm between the forces The direction and sense of the couple moment aro cetermined by the right-haad rule, waere the thumb fndicates the direction when the fingers are curled with the sense of rotation caused by the two forces. In all cases, M acts perpendicular to the plane containing these forces. Vector Fortnulation. ‘The moment of a couple can also be expressed by the vector cross product using Eq. 4-13,i¢., 7x (44s) Application of this equation is easily remembered if one thinks of taking the moments of both forces about a point lying on the line of action of cone of the Foress. For example, if moments are takes about point A in Fig. 426, the moment of ~F is zero ebout this pofnt, and the momentSteno 4.6 Moment of 2 Couple + 149 or Pis defined from Eq, 413. Therefore, in thé formuletion r is crossed with the force F to which it directed, 4 Equivalent Couples. ‘Two couples are said to be equivalent if they Yn @ produce the same moment, Since the moment produced by a couple is always perpendiculer to the plene containing the couple forces, tis therefore necessary that the forces of eqal couples de either in the same plane orin pianes that re parallefto one ancther In this way, the direction Il of each couple moment will be the same, that is, perpendicular to the parallel planes. Resultant CoupleMoment. Since couple moments are free vectors they may be applied at any point P on a body and ackied vectorially. Por example, the to couples ccting on different planes of the body in Fig, 4-28a may be teplaced by their corresponding couple moments Mf, and Mb, Fig, 428, and then these free vectors may be moved tothe arbinary potnt P and added to obtain the resvitent couple moment Mg ~ M + Mp, shown in Fig 4-280, ‘Efmore than (wo couple moments act on the body, we may generalize this concept and write the vector resultant as Ma = 30x ®) 16) ‘These concepts ave ilhistrated numerically in the examples which follow, in general, problems projected in two dimensions shovld be solved using a scalar analysis since the moment arms and force components are easy to compute © “The frictional forees of the floor on the A moment of 12 N+mis aeeded totum the shaft conaected to the center ofthe whee! Blades of de concrete fnishing machine To do thts efficient apply acougle sie this affect produnesa puse rotation Ths rca couple momcatM, on the machine couple fores can be rsado as aml as possibly alaiag the hands on to rn: of tho “at teeds to Car i. An equal but Gpposte whee, where te spac O4 a, In tis cae 12N-m = F(D4w),F —30N. An couple Tomcat us De applied by the cybltakn’ couple momeat of 12IN-ra canbe prodwed ioe gigs tho whee win hanes ofthe operator to event the taming, the ianer bub, altroag hero much lager forces are needed. Ifthe ditanco betweon Hero the couple moneat, M.= Fé, 6 We tarts becomes 03 m, tea 12N-m = F'(03),P — 40N. Alsg teak that if applec oa the handle although it could be the wheel as connected tothe shat at pola olborthaa at its eater the whsel would applied at any other point on the machine, stil tam when the forces ac applied Since the I2-N couple momentis fre veer.150 + CHAPTER A Force Systam Resultant: + A couple moment is produced by two noncollinear forces that ace equal but opposite. Its effect is to produce pure rotation, or tendency for rotation in a spectiied direction. * A couple moment is a free vector, and as a result it causes the same effect of rotation on a body regardless of where the couple tnoment is applied to the body. 2 The moment of the two couple forces can be computed about any por. For convenience, this point is often chosen on the Tine of action of one of the forces in order to eliminate the moment of this force about the point ~ + Inthree dimensions the couple moment is often determined using the vector formulation, M = r X B, where ris directed from any point on the lire of action of one of the forces to any point on ‘the line of action of the other force F, A resultant couple moment is simply the vector sum of all the couple moments of the system, A couple acts on the gear teeth as shown in Fig, 29a, Replace it by an equivelent couple having & pair of forces tiat act through points And B. dion (Scetar Analysts) The couple hie a magnitude of M = Fd = 40(06) = 24N-m and a irection that is out of the page since the forces tend to rotate counterclockwise. M is a free vector, and so it can be placed at any point on the gear, Fig. 4296, To preserve the counterclockwise rotation of M, vertical forves acting through points A and B must be cirected as shown in Fig, 4-29. The magnitude of each force is M=Fd ZN-m=F(02m) 1206SECON 4.6 Moment of a Couple in Fig. 4-300, Irs Solstion (Scalar analysis) Tere it is somewhat difficult to determine the perpendicular distance between the forces and compute the couple moment a M = Fd. Tastead, we can resolve each force into its horizontal and vertical components, F, = 4(150 KN) = 120 KN and F, =3{150 kN) = 90 KN, Fig.-4 306, end then use the principle of moments. Thecouple momert can be determined about any point. For exemple, if point D is chosen, ‘we have for all four forces, (0M = 120 KN (0m) ~ 90 EN @ mm} + 9OKN{5 m) F 1205N (1 m) = 390 kN-mT Ans, It ts easier, however, 10 determine the moments about point A oF Bin order to eliminate the moment of the forces acting 2t the moment point, For point A, Fig. 4-305, we have (AE = 90KN (Bm) + 120 kn (1m) = 300 EN mi Ans. Show that one obtains this same result if momen are suramed about polat B.Notice eso that the couple in Fig 4-30arcan be replaced ky neo couples in Fig. 430%. Using AT = Fd, one couple has a moment of ‘My= 90 KN (3 m) = 27) KN+m_and the other has a moment of My = 120 KN (1 m) = 120 kN m. By she right-hand rule, both couple ‘moments are counterclockwise and are therefore directed out of he pee. ‘Since these couples are free vectors, they can be moved to any point and added, which yields M == 2701N m+ 120N +m = 390N sm §, the same result determined above. Mis a five vector and can therefore act at any point on the member, Tig, 4 0c. Alo, realize that the external effect such as the support reactions on the member, will be the same if the member supports the couple, Fig. 4-30e, or the couple ‘moment, Fig. 4-30c, Determine the moment of the couple acting on the member showa, I { | | | 1 i | | ee, 2 Y= 290K m 151Determine tive couple moment acting on the pipe shown in Fig. 4-310. Segment AB Is directed 30° below the «cy plane. ® Solnion t (Vector Analysis} ‘The moment of the two esuple forces can be found about any point IE point 0 is considered, Fig, 4-31, we have M = 4 X (-25k) + rp X (25k) 8) X (25k) + (6 cos 30% + 8} — 6 sin 30°) > (25K) 2001 = 129.9} + 2004 {-13q)} N- em Ars Its easier to take moments of the couple forces about a point lying on the line of action of one of the forces, e.., point A, Fig, 4-31e. In this case the moment of the force A is zoro, so that M = rae X (25K) = (6 008 30°F — 6 sin 30%) x (25K) = {-120j} Ne am Ans. Selutton W (Scolar Anclysts Although this problem is shown in three dimensions, the geometry i simple enough touse the scalar equation M = Fd. The perpencdicalar ~~. distance between the lines of action of the forces is d = 6 cos 30° = 5.20 om, Fig. 4314. Hence, faking moments of the forces about either BN, Z point A or Byields M = Fa = 25N(5.20 em) = 1299N-em Applying the right-hand rule, M acts in the ~j direction. Thus, M = {-130)} N-cm AnsSscnon 4.6 Moment of a Coupte + 153 Replace the wo couples acting on the pipe colunin in Fig. 4-32a by a resultant couple moment. Ls MyeTISNen 47 é 4 IN y Solution (Vector Analysis “The couple moment My, developed by the forees at A and B, can easily be determined from a scalar formulation. MM ~ Fd = 190N(04m) = 60N-m By the right-hand rvle, M, avis in the +1 direction, Mig, 4-325, ence, My = {603} Nem ‘Vector analysis will be used to deiermine My, cansed by forces at C and D. If moments are computed about point D, Fig. 4-324, My = tbe X Fey then, Mz = toe X Be = (038) x [1259 — 125@)k] ~ (03%) x [100) - 75K] = 30L4 Xj) - 22.5(4 x k) = {223) + 30K) Nem “Try to establish Mg by using a scalar formulation, Fig. 4-320. Since My and Me are free vectors, they may be moved to some arbitrary point P and added vectorially, Fig. 4-32e. The resultant couple moment becomes Mg =M, + My = {80 +225) 130) Nem Ans154 + CHAPTER 4 Force Systern Resultants PROBLEMS 4.69, Determine the magnitude and sense of the couple smaniont. Feoh 4-68 470. f tue couple moment bas a magnitude of 220 N +m, delexisiae the magnitude Fof the couple fosoes, sm le Fok 470 471, Determine the magnitude and sezse of the couple moment, Bach force has a magnitude of F = SKN. Pea 71 If the couple momoxt has 2 magaitads of 300N-m, determine the magnitude F of tie couple forces rad 72Promens + 155 4:13 A bvist of AN-m io applied to the handle of tho 4.75. A devico called a rofamite is used ix various ways serevdciver Resolve this couple moment into a pair of to roplace slipping motion with rolfiag uation. thebel, comple forors F exerted on the haadle and P exerted on which wraps between tho oles is subjected toa texsion the blade. of 15 N, determine the reactive forces 4 of the top and bottom plates on the rollers sa that the resultant couple acting on the rollers is equal to zoro. N Prob, 73 Prebt75 4.74. Tae esttant couple moment created by the two $76, “The easier wheel i subjected tothe wo cowples coupes actingon the dskis My = [10K] EN-cm Determine Deteunine the forces F that the beaings create on the the magnitude of force T. shaf( so Lhat the resultant couple moment on the caster (soo Poh, 74 Prob. 76186 + CHAPTER 4 Force Systern Repultants 477, Whea the engine of the plane i running, the vertical reaetion that the grotnd exerts on the wheel st ‘Ais measared 9 29U0 N, When the engine is tained off, however, the vertical reactions at A and Hare 2400 N ‘each. The difference ia soadings at A is caused by a couple acting on the propeller wiea the engine is running. This coupe tends to everturn the plane counterclockwise, which & opposite 10 the propeller’s clockwise rotation Determine the magnitude of thie comple nd the magsitade of the reaction force exerted at B sien the engice i running, Prob. 4-79 4-78. Two couples act on the beumt, Determine the magnitude of Iso that the resultant couple moment is 450 N + m,counlerciockwise. Where on the heam does the resultant couple moment ac‘? Prut73, 4:79, Express the moment of the couple acting on the pipe assembly in Cartesian vector form, Solve the problem (a) using Eq. 4-13,and (b) summing the moment of each force about point O. Take F = {25k} N. 489, If the couple moment acting on the pige has a niagaitace of 400 N-m, determine the magaitade Ff the vertical force applied to eath wrench. Probs. #79180 441, The ends of the uiangutar plate are eubjeced to three couples, Determine the plate dimension d so that the sesaltant couple is 350 N+m cfociwise 2008 Pov +t482. ‘Two couples act oa far beam at shown Distermine the magaitude of F so that the cesultant couple moment Js 100'N- m counterclockwise. Where on the beam does be resultaat couple act? p> 08 us = anon 12m — Prob. 4 483. ‘Two couples art on the frame. Hf the cetuant ‘couple moment is to be zerq, determine the distance ¢ between the 8O-N couple fortes ‘4a, Two couples act on the frame. Hf d = 04 m, determine the resultaat couple moment. Compete the result by resolving each force fato r end y componcats and (a) finding the moment of each couple (Eq. 4-13) aud (6) summing we womens of all the fre ‘components about point A. 485, Two compks act on the treme. If d= O4 m, etecnine the resntant couple moment, Compete the xesult by resolving each fore iato x end y componcots and (a) findiag the moment of each couple (Eq. 4-13) and (9) stmming the moments of all the force components about roiat B. Promiems + 457 486. Detemine the couple moment. Expcets the result as 2 Cartesian vector. Bs (S0T-204 +804) a a Prob. 86 487. Determine the couple mameat, Expres the result as 2 Cartesian vector. Each Fores hes a sangnitade of F= 20KN,158 + CHAPTER 4 Force System Rostitants ‘ni88. ‘The gear reducer is subjected to the fovr couple 4.90, If F = {400K} N, determine the couple moment moments: Delermine the magnitude of tie resultant —_thatactson theassembly. Express ihe restitasa Cartesian ‘couple moment aad its coordinate direction angles. sector, Member BA lies in the ¥-7 plane. 491. the magaiinde of the resultant couple moment is 1SN-my determine the magnitude F of the forces applied to the wrenches. Pros 90 449. Tho main boam along the wing of an airplane is swept back at an angle of 25°, From load calenlations it is determined that the beam is sabjected to couple 4-92, The gear recucer is subjected to the couple moments M, = 20kN-mard M,=30KN-m Determine moments shown. Detennins the resultant couple momeat te resultant couple moments Created about the x’ ard —_andspody its magnitude and coordinate direction augios {y aes "The axes al fic in tho samo horizontal plane, Probst re. 4-92,Promens © 159 49% ‘Thogearreducerissubjectto the coup’ memonts 495 A couple acts on cack of the hendles of the shown. Determine the resultant couple moment and minidual valve.Detecmine the magyitude ad coordinte specify its magnitude and coordinate direction angles. direction angles of the resultant couple moment, Peob..93 Prob, £95 494 ‘The meshed gears are subjected to the couple moments shown. Determine the magnitwle of the resultant couple moment and specify its coordinale +496, Determine the resultant couple moment of the direction angles two couples that act on the pipe assembly. The distance from 4 to 3 ia d= 400mm. Expros tho remit as a Cartesian vector. 49% Determine the distance d between A and Bso that the resultant couple moment hes a magnitude of Ma = 20Nem. (aa Prob, 4-94 Probe. 496197160 + CHAPTER 4 Force Systern Resultants 4,7 Equivalent System a 4 : of © o A force has the effect of both translating and rotatiag a body, and the amount by which it does so depends upon where and how the force is applied, In the next section we will discuss the method used t0 simplify a system of forces and couple moments acting on x body to 2 single resultant force are couple inoment acting ata specified point O.T do this, however, it § uccessary that the fore and couple moment system produce the same “external” effects of translation and rotation of the body as thcir resultents, When this occurs these tivo scts of loadings are, said to be eguivatent Tn this section we wish to show how to maintain this equivalency when a single force is applied to a specific point on a body and when it is located at another point O. Two cases for the location of point O wilt now be considered. Polnt 0 Is On the Line of Action of the Force. Consider the body shown in Fig. 4 33a, which is subjected to the foros F applied to point A. ‘In order to apoly the force to point O without aliering the extemal effects ‘on the body, we will first apply equal but opposite forces F snd -F at O, as shown in Fig 4-228, The tivo forces indicated by the slash across them can be canceled, leaving the force at point O as required, Fig. 4-33¢. By using this construction procedure, an equivelent system has been maintained between cach of the diagrams, es shown by the equalsigns Note, Lowever, ‘that the force has simply been “transmitted” long its line of action, from paint A, Fig 4-33a, to point O, Fig. 336, In other words, the force can be considered as a sling vector since it can act at nay point O along its inc. of action. In Sec. 4.3 we referred to this concept as the pritciole of transmissibiity. t's important to realize that only the external effects, such as the boxly’s motion oF the forces needed (o support the body if it is stationary, remain unchanged after Fis moved. Certainly the internal effects depend on where Fis located. For exemple, when F acts at A, the internal forees in the body have a high intensity asound A; whereas inovement of Faivay from this point will cause these intemal forces to decrease, » @ rpso Pipe Point © Is Not On the Line of Action of the Forco, This case is shown in Fig, 4 34a, where F is to be moved (o point O without akering theesteraletfects on the body. Following the sare procedure as before, wo first apply equal but opposite foreos Fand ~Fat point O, Fig. 4-249. Here the two forces indicated by a slash across them form @ couple which asa moment that is perpendicular to F and is defined by the cross product M = x X F,Since the couple moment is a free vector, may be applied at ‘any point P on the body asshown in Fig. 4-34e, In addition to this couple moment, F now acts al point O as required, To summarite these concepts, whem the point on the body is on the fine of action of the jorce, simply tratsmit or slide the force along its line of action (o the point. When the point is not on the ting of action of (he force, then move the foree to the point and add a couple moment anywhere to tho body, This couple moment is found by taking the moment of the force about the point, When these rules aze cettied out, equivalent extemal effects will be produced, Secon 47 Equivalent System + I 161 o Consicer the effects on the hand when a Stick of negligible weight supports a force ‘at its ead. When the fore is applied hhoricoatally the same force is fet at the ailp,tegerdless of where ts applied along, iis Ine of action. This & ¢ comequence of the principle of transmbsibiity When the force is applied verticary i causes both a downward force Fo be felt al the arp and a clocesise couple monent or twist of Mf = Fa. These same effects are fel if T is applied at the grip and Mis applied enywhere onthe stick fn both cares the ayetome axe equivalent.162 + CHAPTER 4 Force System Resultants 4.8 Resultants of a Force and Couple System @ ° FAS ‘When arigid body is subjected (o a system cf forces and couple moments, itis often sinpler to study the external effects ou the body by replacing the systein by an equivalent single resultant force acting at a specified poiat O and a resultant coupie moment. To show how to determine these resultants we will consider the rigid body in Fig. 4-35 and use the concepts discussed in the previcus section, Since point Q i not on the line of action of the forces, an equivalent effect is produced if the forces are moved 10 point O end the conespoading coupe moments My = X Fy and My = rp X Fave applied to the body. Furthermore, the couple moment M, js simply moved to point O since it is free vector, These resulls are shown in Tig. 435d, By vecior addition, the resultant force is Fp =F, + &), and the resultant couple moment is Mx, = Mp +My + Mz, Fig. 4-35e. Since equivalency is maintained between the diagrams in Tig. 4-95, each force and couple system will cause the seme external effects, i, the same translation and rotation of the body. Note that both the magnitude and diction of Ty are independent of the locatida of point O;however, Mg, leperds upon this location since the moments M; and M, are determined using the position vectors 1, aad 3. Ako note that Ma, isu free vector and can act at any poine on the body, although point O is generally chosen as its point of application. The above method of simplifying any force and couple moment system to @ resuliant force acting at point O and a resultant couple moment can be generalized and represented by application of the following (wo equations Fr = aE M,, = 2M, + 2Mg wn ‘The first equation states thet the resultant force of the sysiem is ‘equivalent to the sum of all the forces; and the second equation states that the resultant couple moment of the system is equivalent to the sum of all the couple moments 2M., plus the moments aboutt point O of all the forces BMo, If the force system lies in the x~y plane and any couple moments are perpendicalar to this plane, that is along the z axis, then the above equations recuce to the following three scalar equations My, + 3M, + 2Mg (418) Note that the resultant force Hp is equivalent (o the vector sum of its two components Fa, and Fa,Secon 4.8 Resultents of a Force and Couple Systern + 163 § {Ifthe two forees acting on the tick are replaced by aa equivalent resultant force and couple ‘momect et point A, or by the equivalent resultant force ard couple moment st poiat 8, then in each cote the haad mue: provide the came resistance to trasalation and rotation ia order to keep the stick in the horizoetal postion. fa other word the exicraal effects on the stick are the same in eae cas. PROCEDURE FOR ANALYSIS ‘Tae following points should be kept in mind when applying Eqs 4-17 or 448. # Establish the coordinate exes with the origin tocated at the point O and the sxes having a selected orientation. Force Summation, # Iie force system is coplanar, resolve each force into ts x and y Components. if a compenent is directed along, the positive x or y acs i represents a positive scalar; wheres ifitis directed along the negative x or y axis it is a negetive scala « Inthree dimensions, represent cach forse at a Cartesian vector before summing the forces Mowent Summation, * When determining the mamenis of a coplanar force system about point O, it is generally advantageous to use the principle of moments j.e,, determine the moments of tke components of each force rather than the moment ofthe force itsell—” + In three dimensions use the vector eross prodiict to determine the moment of each force about die point. Here the position vectars extend from point Oto aay point an the line of action af each force,161 + CHAPTER 4 Force System Resultants Replace the forces acting on the brace shown in Fig. (36 by en equivalent resultant force and couple moment acting st point A, Mey = SS1N- Hy 35 Sohutton (Seatar Analysis) ‘The principle of moments will be applice to the 400-N force, whereby the moments of its two'rectangular components will be considered. Foree Swometion, ‘The resultant force has x and y components of Fa. BEj Fe, -200N ~ 400 coe ASN ~ ~3828N = 382.8N— Fa, = ~QON ~ 400sin 45°N = ~8828 N = 8828NI, As shown in Fig. 4-36b, Ry as a magnitude of Fa = (Fa? + in)? = \V/ 082.8)? + (88287 = 962N Ans. and « direction of 1 Fa, ws) Moment Summation The resultant couple moment Mg, is determined by summing the moments of the forces about point A. Assuming that positive moments act counterclockwise, i.e.,im the ke direction, we have (tig, ~ EAs Ma, = 100 (0) — 600 N(Od m) we Ans (400 sin 45°N)(0.8 m) ~ (400.608 45°N}(0.3 me) = -SSIN-m = SSLN-mj Ans, In conchsion, when Mz, and Fp act on the brace at point A, Fig, 42np, they will produce the same external effect of reactions at the supports as that produced by the force system in Fig. 4-360.Skcnow 4.8 Recultants of a Force and Couple System = 165 “A structural member is subjected to a couple moment IM and forces F, and F, as shown in Fig. 4-37a, Replace this system by an equivalent resultant force und couple moment acting ut its base, point 0, Solution {Vector Analysis} “The three-dimentional aspects of the problem can be siraplified by using a Cartesian vector analysis, Expressing the forces and couple moment a8 Cartesian vectors, we have > (800K) 200 NJueg ~ (300 w(t) O.1Si + Oj ]-« 249,54 + 166.4j}N 500(8)j + 5003 3k ~ {—400) + 300k} Nem Force Samation, p= SE Ey ~ Fy + Fy ~ ~B800k ~ 22961 + 16644) = (- 249.6 + 166.4} ~ 800K} N Ans. Momeat Surmetion. Mg, ~ 2Mc + Mg Mg, =M+ecX Ry +X he [a 1 Ma, = (—400j + 300%) + (1k) x (-800k) + |-015 01 t 249.5 i640 = (-400j + 300k) + (0) + (-166.4¢ ~ 249.69) » = {-2661 — 650) + 300K} Nem Ans, “The results are shown in Fig. 4376. Hg437166 - CHAPTER 4 Force System Resuitants 4,9 Further Reduction of a Force and Couple System Simplification to a Single Resultant Force. Consider now a special ‘cane for which the system of forces and couple moments acting on arigid body, Fig. 4-28, reduces at poiat O to a resultant force Fy = BF and resultant couple moment Me, = ZMo, which are perpendicular to one another, Fig 4.386, Whenever this cceurs, we can further simplify the force aud couple nioment system by moving Fy to another point P, located either on or off the body so that no resultant couple moment has t0 be applied to the bowly, Fig. 4-38¢. In other words, i the fore and couple moment system in Fig. 428a is reduced to a resuitant system at poiat P, only the force resultant will have to be applied to thie body, Fig.4~38c, ‘The location of point P, measured from peint O, can always be determined provided Wp and Mf, arc known, Hig, 488, As shown in Fig. 4-28c, P must lie on the 6b axis, which is perpendicular to both the line of action of Fy and the ar axis. This point is chosen such that the distance d satisfles the scalar equation Mg, = Figt ord ~ MgfFy. With Kg so located, it will progluce tle same extemal elfects on the bocy as the forse and couple momient system in Fig. 4-38a, or the force and ‘couple moraent resultants la Tig, 4-28), Tf 8 system of forces ie either concurrent, coplanar, or parallel, it can always be reduced, as in the above case, t0 a single resultant force Fy acting through.'Ihis is because in each of these ceses Fy and Ma, will always be perpendicularto each other when the force system is simplified at any poiat O, e + FsSecriou 4.9 Further Reduction of a Force and Couple System + 167 Coscarrent Force Systems, A concurrent force sjsiem has been treated x, ix detail in Chapter 2, Obviously, all the forces act at a point for which Fy (here is no resultant couple moment, so the point P is automatically = specified, Fig, 4-39, 4 Coplanar Force Systems, Coplanar force systems which may include couple moments directed perpendicular to the plane of the forees as shown in Fig. 4400, can be reduced to a single resultant fores, because when each Fy £39 force in the system is moved to any point O in the 2-y plane, it produces a couple moment that isperpendicidar to the plane, ic, in the -Ik direction. ‘The resultant moment Mg, = EM + E(x X F) is thus perperdicular (0 the resultant force fp, Fig. 4 40bsand so Fe can be positioned a distance d From O 80.8 to create this same moment Mr, about O, Fig. 4-40c. ; 7 My 22M4 Beek = 4 Byo2F eye o ° Hy. a0 ‘Parallel Force Systems, Parallel fores systems, which can include couple ‘moments that are perpendicular to the forces, as shown in Fig, 4#1¢,can be recuced toa single resultant force because when each forte is moved to aay point Q in the x-y plane, it produces a couple moment that bes somponents only about the x and y axes. The resultant moment Mg, = 2Mp | 2(r X F)isthus perpendicular to the resultant force Fg, Fig 4-410; and so Fgcan be moved 10. point a distance d away so that it produces the same nioment about 0. © © © Figs168 CHAPTER 4 Force System Resultants “Tae three parallel forces acting on the stick ean be replaced by a single resultant force Figacting at 2 distanced from the grip To be equivalent w= require the resultant force to eal the sum of the forces, By = F, + Ay + Fy and to find the dixzance the montent ofthe resultant foree about the grip must he equal to the moment ofall the forees about the grip, Ex — Fis + Fabs + Beds PROCEDURE FOR ANALYSIS “The technique used to recince a coplanar ar parallel force system to a single resultant force follows a similar procedure outlined i the previous section, + Establish the x, y, z, axes and locate the resultant force Ki an arbitrary distance away from the origin of the coorcinates. Force Simmation, + The resultant force is equal to the sum of all the fosces in the’ system, + For a coplanar force system, resolve each force into its.c and y ‘components, Positive components are directed along the positive and p axes, and negative components are directed along the negative x and y axes, Moment Stimmation, + The moment of the resultant force about point O is equal to the sum of all the couple moments in the system plus the moments about point O of all the forces in the system. * This moment condition is used to find the location ofthe resultant force from point O.Stc10w 49. Forther Reduction of a Force and Couple System + 169 Reduction to a Wrench, Inthe general caise, the force and couple moment system zcting on a body, Fig. 4-36a, will reduce to a single resultant force Fy and couple moment My, at O which are no! perpendicular. lastead, Fg will act at an angle # from Mg,, Fig. 4-35c. As shown in Fig. 4-429, however, Mx, mey be resolved into two component ‘one perpendicular, M ,, and the other parallel My, to the line of setion of Fg-As in the previous discussion, the perpendiculas componen:M , may be eltarsiated oy moving F, to ocint F, aéshown in Fig. €425, This point lies on axis bb, which is perpendicular to both Ma, and Ey. in order to maintain an equivalency of loading, the distance from O to P is d= M/F, Furthermore, when Fp is applied at P, the moment of Fp tending t0 cause rotation of the body abexet O is in the same direction as M Fig. 4-42c, Finally, since Mj 3 a free reetor, it may be moved to P30 that itiscollinea’ with Fg, Fig, 4-42c. This combination of collinear foree and couple moment is called a wrench or serew.'The axis of the wrench hhas the samme line of actionas the force, Hence, the wrench tends tocause both a translation along and a rotation about this axis, Comparing Fig.4-d2a to Fig 4-42, it is seen that a gencral force and couple moment system acting ona body can be reduced to a wrench,'The axis of the wrench and the point through whieh this axis pastes can alvvays be determined, Pee g © Mig 35, (Repeated) Fy170 + CHAPTER 4. Farce System Resuiktante ‘The beam AF in Fig, 443e ie subjected to a system afcoplanar forces, Determine the magnitude, direction, and location oa the beam of a resultant force which is equivalent to the given system of forces measured from E. Solution ‘The origin of coordinates fs loz Fovee Swamatton. Resblving the SOON force into x and y ‘components and summing the force components ylelds 2 Fe, = 500 00860" N + 100N LF Fe, = ~500sin 60° N + 200 2330N | “The magnitude and direction of the resultent force are established from the vector addition shown in Fig. 4435, We have 30.0N> 233.0N Fa ~ \/(350,0)? + (233.07 - 4205 N Ans = peg tf 233.0 7 0 = o(8) «ser an Moment Soummation. Moments will be summed aboat point F, Hence, from Figs +43¢ and 4436, we require the moments of the components of Fy (of the moment of F,) about point £ to equal the moments of the force system about F. Assuming positive moments are counterclockwise, we have UhMg, = 2Mz 233.0 N(e)+450.9 N(O) = (500-sin 60P N)(4 m+ (500 con 60° N)(O) . = (100 (0.5 m) ~ (200 N)(2.5 m) | et = sot Ars Note thatusing a clockwise sign convention would yield thissame result, Since d is positive, Fy acts to the left of E as showa. Try to solve this problem by summing moments about point A and show d? = 0,927 m, measured t0 the sight of A.Stcvon 4.9 Further Reduction of a Force and Couple systan + 474 ‘The. joemre shown in Fig. 4-440 is subjected to three coplanar forces. Replace this loading by an equivalent resultast foree and specily ‘here the Tesultan’s line of action intersects the columa AM and boom BC. . Solution Force Stanraation. Resolving the 2.50 KN forte into x and y ‘components and summing the force components yleids AS Fy = LEi fy =~ 2.90KINGQ)~ LIS KN = “325 KN =325 KN — 44Fs, = BA Fy, =—2.50KN() — O6DKN = -2.60 KN 2.60 NE aim ‘As shown by the vector addition ia Fig. 444%, 1ISKNe pss { Fa = \f (3.25) + (2,60)? = 4.16KN Ans. im ° ~wa (22-07 we Ans. ‘Momest Summation, Moments will be summed about the arbitrary polut A, Assuming the line of action of Ey tutersects AB, Fig. 4440, ‘we require the moment of te components Of Fy in Fig, 4b about Ato equal the moments of the force system in Fig. 4-dda about Asie, {4Me,= 3M4 — 3.25KN (y) + 2.60KN (0) = LISEN( m) ~ G60 EN(O6m) +250 KNBHQ2m) ~ DSN GLm) y 0458 m. By the principle of transmissibility, Tp can also be treated as intersecting BC, Fig, 4-446, in whieh case We have (él, = 2Mg 325KN (2.2m) ~ 2.60KN 7S KN( m) — O6DKN(O6 mn) + 250 KNG]22m) ~ 2.50 NGI.) xn 2N77 Ans. ‘We can also solve for these positions by assuming Fy acts at the arbitrary point (2, y) on its line of action, Mig. 4442, Summing moments about point A yields (hMa, = EM qi 325 KN (y) - 2.60 4 (2) ® 75 KNN(L m) ~ (260 KNOG m) + 2.50 KNG@IZ2m) — 2.59 KNEAC.6m) Fig. 48 325y ~ 2.60 = 1.49 which is the equation of the coloved dashed line in Fig. 444b. To find | the points of intersection with the crane along AB, set x = 0, then y= 0458 m, and along BC set y = 2.2 m, then x = 2.177 m. sas!17+ CHAPTER A Force System Resultants ‘The slab in Fig, 4-454 is subjected to four parallel forces, Determine the magnitude and direction of ¢ resultant force equivalent to the given force system and locate its point of application on the shib. Solution (Scalar Analyst) Force Suametton, Prom Fig. 4-45¢, the resultant Force is +g = BPs Fy = ~SOON + 100.N ~ 400.N — 500 =1400.N = 1400.N | Ans. Moment Sunimasion, We require the moment about the x axis of ‘the resultant force, Fig. 4456, to be equal to the sum of the moments about the.canis of all te forces in We systems, Fig.4-45¢. The moment arms are determined from the y coordinates since these coordinates sepresent the perpendiadlar disiances from the x axis to the lines of action of the forces. Using the righthacd rule, where positive moments att in the +i direction, we have Ms, = Es (1400 N)y = 600N(0) + 1001N(5m) ~ 400.1N(10m) + 5001N(0) ~1d00y = -3500 y= 2.50m. Ans. . Ja a similar manner, assuming that positive moments set in the +] direction, « moment equetion can be weltten about te y axis using ‘moment arms Gefineé by the x coordinates of each force. GOON(S m) ~ 100'N(6 m) + 400 N(O) + 500 NCO) 200 x = 3.0m Ans. Hence, a faree of Fig = 1400 N placed at point P(3.00 m, 20 m) on the slab, Fig. 4-456, is equivalent to the parallel force system acting on the slab in Fig 4-452.Section 4.9. Further Reduction of a Force and Couple System = 173 “Three parallel bolting forces act on the rim ofthe circular cover piste in Fig. 4 46a, Determine the magnitude and direction of a resultant force equivalent to the given force eystem and Toeate ite point of application, P, on the cover plate, = Sehations (Mes eunation From Fig. 4-46q, the force resultant By is Fg = —300k ~ 200K — 150k (-~650K} N Ans. Monsen Sestraction, Choosing poim Oar a reference for computing moments and assuming that Facts at a point P(x, y), Fig. 6b, we require 1 M,=2Mo Ce Rg ta X (B00) +n X (2001) + re % (1901) (i+ yi) % (6501) = (0.8K) x (300K) + {-0.3)) x (200K) ” | 4+ (0.8 sin 45% + 018 cos 45°) x (—150K0) | 240i + 1605 — R4.85j ~ 84.857 650 — 6505 Equating the corresponding j and i components yields 6501 = 240 ~ 84.85 a ~650y = 160 ~ 84.85 @ Solving these equations, we obtain the coordinates of point 7, y= 016m Ans, | | ‘The negative sign indicates that it was weong to have assumed a-+y | postion for Fe as shown in Fig. 4 466. i Tt is also possible to establish Bop. 1 and 2 directly by summing j moments about the y and x axes, Using the right-hand cule we have o | i | Mg, = My; 650 = 300 (0.8m) ~ 150N (08sin 45° m) nee By, = EM ~650e = 200N (0.8m) ~ 150 (0.8.c0s 45° m)TTA + CHAPTER A Force System Resultants PROBLEMS 498 Replace the foren at A by an equivalent force and couple moment at point O. 499. Replace the force at A by an equivalont force ard ‘couple monsent at point FP. Probe 4 9899 4.100, Replace the forte and couple moment system by ‘an equivalent force and couple moment acting at point 0. 4.401, Replace the force and couple moment system by fan equivalent force and coupls momen: acting at point P. y ome Puls, 100102 4-102, Replace the force system by an equirslent forte aad couple moment at poiat O. 44108. Replace the foree system by an equivalent force and couple moment at polat P. Peas, 102108, L101, Replace the force and couple system by an equivalent force and couple moment actirg at point O. 4-105, Replace the force and couple system by an ‘equivaleat force and couple moment acting at poiat P. Probe 4040s4105. Replace ihe force and couple systert by a equivalent force aad couple moment st point O. 4107, Replace me fore and couple system by an equivalent foree and couple moment at point P. tds tn 4 Probe ¢-s06107 "4108. Replace the force system by a single force resultant aud specify its point of application, measured along the x ads fram paint 0. 4109. Replace the force system by a single force resultant asd spedty ite potnt of application, measured slong the « axis from point P. j ss0N us 230 | o . —fam|—om—bam}an Prods 4109/09 Prosens «175 45110. Replace the force system acting on the beam by ax equivafent faree and couple moment at paint A. 4111. Replace the force system acting on the beam by ‘a equivalent force and couple moment at point 8. Probs Hanon 4112, Replace the Uiuee forces acting on the shalt by fa single resultant force. Specify where the force scs, reeasured from end A. 4113, Replace the three forces acing on the sheftby a single resultant force, Specify where the force scts, smcesured front ead B. [efeitos a Prots, H12713176 + CHAPTER 4 Force Systam Rewuitants 44114, Replace the loading on the frame bya singe #117. Determine the magnitudes of Fy aud Fy and the resultant force. Specify where its line of potion tatersee’s direction of F so that the loading creates a zero resultant member AB, measured from A. force and couple moment on the whee! ON BON HON Prob 4106 Peab, 17 4-118. The weights of the various components of the ‘ruck ase shown, Replace this eyctom of foreos by an cquivaicat resultant foree and couple moment acting at 4.115, Replace the loading acting on the beam by a Point A. Single resultant force. Specify where the force acl, 4.119, ‘The weights of the various components of the ‘measured fom end A. tauck are shown. Replace this system of forces by an 4-116. Repizce the loedlag esting on the bean: by a *HYslent reellant force and speefy ite location siggle resultant force. Specify where the force acts, '™>ewed irom point A. measured ftom H. Probe d-11sita6 Probe LUND°4120, Replace the Joeding on the frame by 4 single resultant fores, Specify where its Tine of action intexszets meniber AB, measured for A. 4121, Replace the Toading on the frame by a singe sescitant fore, Specity where its fine of action intersects member CD, mentuted from endl C. s00N to robs, st200124 4522 Replace the force systera acting on the fame by ‘an eqeivalent resutiant foree and specify where the resultant’ line of action intersects member AB, measured rom point A, 4.123, Replace the force system acting on the frame by fon equivalent scsuliagt foros and specify where the ‘resultant ling of action intersects member £C, measured row point B. *4I24, Replace the force system acting on the frame by ‘an eqnivalent resultant foree and coupie moment acting, at point A. Probs. 12012324 Promems + 197 4.25. Replace the force end coupls-moment system by an equivalent resultant foree and couple woment at polat (0. Express the resus in Cartesian vector forn. 4125. Replace the force end couple-mement system by an equivalent resultant force and couple momen! at pofnt P. Repress the reaulls in Cartosiag vector form. 44127. Replace the fores and couple-rromnent system by ag equivalent resoltent fercs and covple ruement al point Q. Express the cesults in Cartesian vector foam. M= (-20i = 70] +204) 8145] + BRIAN robs -125/126027 4.128, ‘The belt passing ever the paliey is subjected to forces Fy and Ba, cach having « magnittde of 40N Fy acs inthe ~X direction, Replace these ‘orces by anequivalent force and couple moment at point A. Express the rest in Cartesian vector form. Set @ = O° so that Hy setgin the = direction. 412), The belt passing over the pulley is subjected to wo forces Fy and KS, each having a nmgnilude of 40 N. acts in the —k direction, Replace these foress by an equivalent force and couple moment ai point A. Express th resell jn Cartesian vector form, Take 0 = AS", Probs. 4128129178 + CHAPTER 4 Force System Resultants 4190. Replace the force system by an equivalen! foree ‘and couple moment at point A. Fy [1001 10-0 y= (2004+ 00} 100ug Prob $190 4491 The dab is to be hoisted using the three slings shown, Replace the system of forees acting on slings by aan equivalent force aud couple moment at poiet . The force is vertical Prob 194 4132, A biomechanical model of the Tumber region of the human trunk is shown. The forces aeting in the four muscle groups cotsist of Fa =35N for the rectus, Fy = ASN for the oblique, F = N for the inmbar Totissimys dersi, and Fp = SEN lor the erector spinee, These foadirgs are symmeuiic with sespect to the yz plare. Replace iis system, of parallel forces by an equivalent forer and couple moment acting et the spine, point O. Express the results in Cartesian vector form, Prob, 132 4-133, ‘The building slab is subjected to four paratel eohuman Teadings. Determine the equivalent resoitant force ard spedify ils location (x, y} on the slab. Take i= 90KN, B~ 40k, 4134. The building slab is subjected to four parallel column Toadings, Detezmine the equivaient resultant force and specify its location (, y) on the slab, Take F = 2OiN, B= SONPronems + 179 4135, Replace the two wrenches and the fores, acting 4137. Replace the three foreoe acting on the plate by a ‘on the pipe assembly, by anequivaleat resuitantforee and wrench. Specify the mageitude of the force and couple ‘couple moment at point O. moment for the wench and the point PEs, y) where its fine of aotion intersects the plete H,— (800K) Ke= (00H) Prob tia? ‘4136. ‘The three forors acting on the block each have 4138, Replace the three forces acting on the plate by @ ‘a magnitude of 10 N. Replace this ystem by a wrench wrench. Specify the magnitude of che force and couple land specify the point where ths wrench intersoots the z rtomtent for the wrench and tho poist P(j, ¢) wher ite axis measored fron: poiat ©. line of action intzrseets the plate. Prob, 4-196 Prob. 4198180 «CHAPTER 4 Force System Resuitants 4,10 Reduction of a Simple Distributed Loading Tn many situations a very large surface arca of a body may be subjected to distributed londingy such those eaused by wing, Auids, or simply the weight of material supported over the body's suriace. The fetensity of these foadings at each point on the surface is defined as the pressure p (force per anit arcs), which can be measured in unit of pascals (Ps), where 1 Pa = LNim. Ta this section we wilt consider the most common case of a distributed pressure loading, which is zeviform along one axis of « flat rectangular ‘body upon which the loading is applied,* An example of such a loading isshown in Fig. 4-47a. The direction of the intensity of the pressure load is indicated by arzows stown on the load intensity diagrarn. The entire loading on the plate fs therefore a system of parallel forces, Infinite in inuraber and each acting on aseparate differential area of the plate. Flere the loading function, p — p(x) Pa, is only a function of x since the pressure uniform slong the y axis Ti we muliply p = p(z)by the wie a.m of the plate, we obtain = (n(x) Nim?}am ~ w(x) Nim. This Joading function, shown‘in Fig. 4475, is a measure of load distribution along the line y = 0 which isin the plane of symmetry of the Ioading, Fig. 4-470, As noted, it is measured as aforce per unitlengtb rather than a forse per anit area. Consequently, the loadintensity diagram for w= w(x) can be represented by a system of coplanar parallel forces, showa in two dimensions in Fig, 4475. Using the methods of Sec, 4.9, this systom of forces can be simplified to a single resultant force Fy and {ts location ¥ can be specified, Fig. 4-47¢, Magnitude of Resultant Force. Prom Eq. 4-17 (Fp = ZF), the magnitude of Fp is equivalent (0 the sum of all the forces in the system. In this case integration rust be used since there is an infinite aumber of ppatallel forces dF acting along the plate, Fig. 4-76, Since dF is ecting on fan element of length dr and 19(x) is a foree per unit length, then at the location x, d = w(x) dx ~ dA. In other words, the magnitude of dE ts determined from thecolored differential area dA under the loading curve. For the entire plate iength, tu = EF | Res fwyax= fdaaa (+19) a 4 Hence, the magnitade of Wie vesiliant [ore & Saal to the total area A ander the loailing diagram w = w(x), Fig. 4-47c, “Ths more youerl cass of e nonaniform surface foading ating ona Lady is eonsidared in 800-95.Seenoti 4.10 Reduction of a Simple Distributed Loading + 184 Location of ResultantForce, ApplyiogF.4-17 (Mg, = Zito), the location ¥ of the line of action of Fe can be determined by equating the moments of the force resultant and the foree distribution about point O (he y axis), Since dF producesa momentol x dF = x w(x) dx about O, Fig. 4-476, then for the entire plate, Fig. 447¢, 1+ My, = Mot Fe = fF w(x) de h Solving for F, using Eq. 4-19, we can write formes [xaa - foes - fia This equation represents the x coordinate for the geometric center or eenroid of the area under the distributed-loading diagram w(x). Therefore, ihe resultart force has a fine of action which passes through the centroid C {geometric center) of the area defined by the distributed leading diagram w(a), Fig. 4-ATe. Once ¥ is determined, Fp by symmetry passes through polnt (¥, 0) an the sariace of the plats, Fig. 47d. If we now consider the three- dimensional pressure loading p(x), Fig. 47a, we can therefore conclude that tte resultant force has a magninade equal 10 tke volume under the distribuied-toading curve p = plx) and a line of action which passes through the centroid (geometric cenier) of tis volume, Detailed treatinont of the integration techniques for computing the centroids of volumes of areas is given in Chapter 9. In many cases, however. the distributed- Jouding diagram is in the shape of a rectangle, trisngle, or some other simple geometric form, The centroids for such common shapes co not have to be determined from Eq. 4-20; rather, they can be obtained directly froma the tabuiation given on the inside back cover. (4-20) ‘The beam supporting this deck of lumber is subjected oa wujonn disribured loading,and sothelogd-irlensity diegrams hag a rectangular shape. If the load intensity is wp then the resitant force is determized ftom the area of the rectangle, Fy = wob.The Tine of ation of thisforce passer trough thecentenid center of thie area, X= a + 52. This recttant ie cqriralon tothe distributed load, and so beth Teadings produce the samme “erteral” effects ‘or suppott reacts oa the beam.482. + CHAPTER 4 Force System Resultant: IMPORTAN © Distributed Toadings are defined by using a loading function w = w(x} that indicates the intensity of the loading along the Tengtt of the member. This intensity is measured in Nia, » ‘The external effects caused by a coplanar distributed load acting ona body ean be represented by 4 single resultant force. © The resultan( force is equivalent (o the area under the distributed Toading diagram, and las a fine of action that passes through the centrotd or geometuls center of this atez, Determine the magnitude and focation of the equivalent resnllant foree acting on the shaft in Fig. 4480. solution » Since w = w(x) is given, this problem vill be solved by integration. ‘The coloed differential atea clement dA - wdy = 60x7dx, Applying Eq. 4-19, by summing these elements from x = 0 to x = 2m, we obtain the resultant force Fp me BR = [cox (2p Be) ER [oa fox dx ol) tet of gravity (weigh) ct bea ® Fig 5‘Draw the free-body diagram of the foot lever shown in Fig. S-Be. The operator applies a vertical force to the pedal so that the spring is stretched 40 mm and the force in the'short link at #8 is 100.N Ki ; Fy 8 Selution By inspection, the lever is loosely bolted to the frame at A."The rod at Bis pinned at its ends and acts as a “short link.” After making the proper mewurements, the ideilized model of the lever is shown in Fig. 5-86. From this the free-body dliageam mut be drawn. As shown in Fig. 5-8c, the pin support at A exerts force components A., aad A, on the lever, exch force has a known line of action but unknown magnittce ‘The link at B exerts a force of 100 N, acting in the direction of the link, In addition the spring also exerts a horizontal focee on the lever. If the stiffness is measured and found tobe k = SN/mum, then since the stretch = 40mm, using Eq. 3-2, F, ~ ks = Simin (40mm) ~ 200 N. Finally, the operator's shoe applies a vertical force of F on the pedal. The dimensions of the lever are also shown on the free-body diagram, since {his information will be useful when computiag the moments of the forces. As usual, the senses of the unknown forces at A have been assumed, The correct senses will become apparent after solving the Seen0N 52. Free-Rody Diagrams = 203 ®204 + CHAPTER 5 Equilibrium of a Rigid Rody ‘Two smooth pipes, each having a mass of 300 kg, are supported by the forks of the tractor in Fig. 3-90, Draw the frec-body diagrams for cach pipe and both pipes together. fafec of Basing ons Age B aa oy Eestotsiopet Sao 0° 7 e setagons | oo) ® 299N , STP @ PO son ee of slope shee ofgavity T fork sstingon Fig 59 (weight) acting on © Solution “The idealized model from which we must draw the free-body diagrams es is shown in Fiz. 5-96. Here the pipes are identified, the dimensions have | ‘been added, and the physical situation reduced to ito simplest form. \ 30) ‘The free-body diegram for pipe A is shown in Fig. 5-9v. Hts weight | ts is W = 300(9.81) = 2943N, Assuming all contacting surfaces are y smocth, too reastive forces T, F, R act in a direction normal to the pan tangent at sheir surfaces of contact. P ‘The free-body diagram of pipe B is shown in Fig. $-9d. Can you identity euch ofthe three forces acling on this pipe? particular, nore * that R, representing the force of A on B, Fig. $-d, is equal and | co) ‘opposite to:R representing the force of B on A, Fig. $e, This is 2 consequence’ of Newton's third law of motion, “The {ece“body diagram of both pipes combined (“system”) is shown in Fig. 5-9e. Here the contact force R, which acts between A and B, is considered at-an irlemielforee end heaos is act shown of the freo- body diagram. That is, i seprescmts a pair of equal bul opposite collinear forces which cancel each other.‘Draw the free-body diagram of the unloaded platform that is suspended off the edge of the oil ri hhas a mass of 200 kg. Fig 10 Saluiion ‘The idealized model of the platform will be considered in two dimensions because by obgervation the loading and the dimonsions are all syrammetrical about a vertical plane passing through its center, Fig 5-106, Here the connection at A is assumed to be a pin, and the cable supports the platform at B. The direction ‘of the cable and average ditvensions of the platform are listed,and the center of gravity G bas been determined. It is from this model that we must proceed to draw the free-body diagram, which ia shows in Fig. S-i0e. The platform’s weight is 200(9.81) = 1962.N, The force components A, and A, along with the cable force T represent the reactions that both ‘pins and both cables exert oa the platform, Fig, 5-104. Consequently, alter the solution for these reactions, half their magnitude Is ceveloped aA and halfis developed at 3. Seenom 52 Free-Body Diagrams - 205 1a206 - CHAPTERS Equilibrium of a Rigid Body 4 ‘The free-body diagram of each object in Fig. S-11 is drawn. Carefully | study each solution and identify what cach loading represeats, as was done in Fig. 5-7, E | i | | —<—— i 3 20x , Les, ' | 3 / \ i . | : | ——_——— t ba ra | 4 saw i aa : 4 a PSL sco ‘ote: Ieeral feces of eae member ‘onsariieraxe equal but opposite colina: frces whshare wot © i ‘eincladed fre siaoe they cancel out. oPeomems + 207 PROBLEMS SAL Draw the free-bedy diagram of the $0-Kg paper roll hich has a conte: of mass at G and rests on the amooth blade of the paper hauler. Explain the significance of each force acting on the diagram. (See Fig. 5-76.) Prob. 5-1 52, Draw the froe-body diagram ofthe han puazh, isch 's ploned at A and bears cownon the smooth surtace at 3. Peson _ Prob 52 5. Draw the free-body diagram of the dumpster D of the truck, which has 8 weight of 251N (= 2.5 tonne) snd a center of gravity at G.It is sopported by a pia at A and a pircomnacted hydraulic cylinder BC (stort link) aplain the significance of each force on the diagram, (See Fig 5-16) 35:4. Draw the free body diagram of the jib crane AB, which is piaconneded at A and supported by member (img) BC, 3m—t- em: sin Prob. S4 5S. Draw the fee-bocy diagzam of the tse that ie upportod by the cable AB ond pin C Bepinia the significance ‘of exch force acting on the diagram. (See Fig. 3-10)208 CHAPTERS. Equilibrium of a Rigid Body 5-6, Draw ths free-body diagramof the crane boom AB wkih has 2 weight of 2600 N and center of gravity at G. “The boom is supporied by a pin at A ond cable BC. The toad of 5003 N ie suspended from a cable attsched at 8 plain the sigeilicance of each bree acting on the diagram. (See Fig. 5-76.) Pra 56 Se7. Draw the free-body diagram of the beam, witch is pin-supported at A and rests on the smooth ircline at B. 58 Draw the free-body diagian of member ABC ‘which is supported by a smooth collat at A, roller at B, and short ink CD. Explzin the significance of exci force acting oz the diagram. (See Fig. 5-76.) 59. Draw the free-body diagram of the uniform bar, ‘which has ¢ mass of 100 kg and a center of mass at G. The supports A, 2, and C are smooth, iam Prob 59 $10, Draw the free-body diagram of the beam, which is pin-connecied at A and rocker-supported at B. an 200N-mStenow 5.2 Equations of Equilibrium + 209 5.3 Equations of Equilibrium Jn See. S.1 we developed the two equations which ere both necessary and sufficient for the equilibrium of a rigid body, aamely, ZF = 0 and 3Mo = 0. When the body is subjected to 2 system of forces, which all lic in the x-y plane, thea the forees can be resolved into their x and y components Consequently, the conditions for equitibrium in two dimensions are ER, =0 ER=0 62) Mo = 0 Here ZF, and BF, represent, respectively, the algebraic sums of the x and y components of all the forces acting on the body, and My represents the algebraic sum of the couple moments and the moments of all the force components ebout an axis perpendicular to the x-yplane and passing through the exbitrary point O, which may Hic either on ox off the body. Alternative Sets of Equilibrium Equations, Although Eqs 5-2 are mat often used for solving coplanar equilibrium problems, two aliemative sets of three independent equilibriuin equations may also be used. One such set is ER=0 3M, =0 63) ZMy=0 ‘When using these equations it is required that a tine passing through points A and B is not perpendictilar to the a axis. To prove thet Bes.5-3 provide the conditions for equilibrium, consider the iree-body diagram. of an arbitrarily shaped body shown in Fig. $-12a, Using the methods of ‘See, 48, all the forces on the free-body diagram may be replaced by en equivalent resultant force Fy — BF, acting 2 point A, end a resultant couple moment Mg, = 2M, Fig, 5-12h. If ZA14 — 0 is satisfied, itis necessary that Mx, = 0. Furthermore, in order that Ep satisfy ZF, — 0, it must have no component along the a axis, and thereforo its line of action must be perpendicular to the @ axis, Hig. S-12c, Finally if it is tequired that My — 0, where B does not lie on the line of action of Fy, thon Fg ~ @. Since EF = 0 end EM, ~ 0, indeed the body in Fig, ‘3-12a must be ia equilitriam, Fig. 512210 + CHAPTERS. Equilibrium of a Rigid Body iP A second allescative set of equilibrium equations is My My EMe GC) 0 Here it is necessary that points A, B, and € do not lie on the seme Lire. To prove that these equations when satisfied, ensure equilibrium, consider the free-body diagram in Fig, S-13.1f ZM4 = Olsto be satisfied, then My, = 0. Sip =0 is satisfied if the line of action of Fr passes through point B as shown, Finally,if we require Bie — 0, where C does not lit on line AB, il is necessary that Ky = 0, and the body in Fig, 5-120 must ther be in equilibrium. PROCEDURE FOR ANALYSIS Coplansr force equilllrizm problems for a rigid body can be solved using the following procedure. Tree Body Diagram. + Establish the x; y coordinate exes in any suitable orientation. * Draw im outlined shape of the body. + Show oll the forces and couple moments acting on the body. + Lebel all the Joedings end specily their directions relative to the 5, ¥ axes, The sense of a force or couple moment having 20 unknosm megaitnde but knewn line of action can be assumed. * Indicate the dimensions of the bouy necessary for computing the momtents of forces. Equations of Rquitibritan. ‘+ Apply the moment equation of equilibrium, Mg = 0, about a point (Q) that lics at the intersection of the lines of action of two ‘Unknown foroes In this way, the moments of these unknowns ere zeroabout O, and a direct sokition ior the third unlmown can be determined. 4 When dbplying the force equilibrium equations SF, = 0 and EF, ~'0, oront the x ond y axes along lines that will provide the simiplest resolution of the forces into their ¥ and y components + Ifthe solution of the equilfbcium equations yields a negative scalar fora force orcouple moment magnitude, this incicates that the sense is opposite to that which was #ssimed on the free-body diagram,Stcnow 5.3 Equations of Equilibrium + 214 cs Determine the horizonte) and vertical components af reaction for the beam Joaded 2s shown in Hg, 5-142, Neglect the weight of the beam in the calculations : 600 on is o Brower Giese Canyouidentily eech of the forcesshown on the free-body diag-am of the besm, Fig. 5-146? For simplicity, the 600-N force is repsesented by its. and y components as showa, Also, note that 2NON force acts on the beam at B and is independent of the force componcntsB, and B,, which represent the effect of the pin ca the beam, Eeuettess or qutkiivier, Summing forees in the x dizcction yields BEE, 600cos 45°N - B, = 0 By = 424N Ans A direat solution for A, can be obtained by applying the moment equation 2 Mg = 0 about point 8. For the cakulation, it should be apparent thet forces 200 N, B,, and B, all create zero moment about B, Assuming counterclockwise rotation about B to be positive (in the +k direction), Fig. 5-148, we have (42My = 0; 100N(2m) + (600 sin 43°N)(S m) = (600 cos 45°N)(0.2m) — A,(7 m) = 9 A, =319N Ans. Summing forces in the y direction, using this result, gives +E, = 0; 319 ~ 600sin 45°N — 100N ~ 200N + B= 0 B, = A0SN Ans ‘We can check this result by summing moments about point A, (42M, = 0; (600 sin 45°N)(2 m) — (600 cos 45°N)(02 m) = (200 N}(Sm) ~ (200 NY(7m) + B,(7 m) = 0 B, = 405N Ans212 + CHAPTER 5 Equillbrium of a Rigid Body ‘The cord shown in Fig. 5~1Sa supports a force of 500 N and wraps over the fiictionkess pulley, Determine the tension jn the cord at C and the horizontal and vertical components of reaction at pin A. Solution Free-Body Diggreaus, The free-ody diagrams of the con and pulley are shown in Fig. 5-156. Note tel the principle of action, equal but opposite reaction must be carefully observed when drawing each of these diagrams: the cord exerts an unknown load distribution p along part of the pufley’s surface, whereas the pulley exerts an equal but opposite effect on the cord. For the solution, however, itis simpler to combine the ee-body diagrams of the pulley and the contacting portion of the cord, so that the distributed load becomes internal to the system ond is therefore eliminated irom the analysis, Mig. 5-15e. Equations of Equitibvivax. Summing moments sbout point A to eliminate A, and A,, Fig, 5-15e, we have SHSM, =O S0ON(02m)— 7(02 m)~ 0 T= S00N Ans. It is seen thet the tension remains constant as the cord passes over . the pulley. (This of course is true for any angle @ at which the cord is directed and for any radius r of the pulley.) Using the result for 7,2 force summation is applied to determine the components of reaction e atpin A. DSR =0 —A, + 500sin30°N =O Ay = 250N Ans. +P25,=0 Ay — SOON — 500 cos 30°N 933N Ans. 4,Stcnow 5.3. Equations of Equilibrium = 213 ‘The Tink shown in Fig. $—i6a fs pin-connected at A md rests against @ smooth support et B. Compute the horizontal and vertical components of resction al the pin A. w Hig 5.16 Solution Free-Body Diagrams, Ag shown in Fig, $166, the reaction Ng 's perpendicular lo the Tink at B. Also, horizontal and vertical components of reaction me represented at A. Summing moments about A, we obtain a Enpuecions of Eaguiibrie Giroct solution for Mg, (FEM, = 0: —90N-m ~ 6ON(Lm) + Na(0.75m) = 0 Ng = 200N Using this result, ASF, =0; Ay — 200sin30°N A, > 100N) Ans. A, ~ 200.cos30*N ~ 60N = 0 A, = 233N Ans. +f,214 + CHAPTER 5 Equilibrium of a Rigid Body i “The box wienth in Fig. S17 ic ustid to tighten the bolt at A. TF the | ‘wrench docs not tum when the load is applied to the handle, determine the torque or moment applied to the bott and the force of | the wrench on the boit | Free.Borly Dingramn. ‘The free-body diagram forthe wrench is shown in Fig. 5-176, Since the boll acts as a "fixed support” it exerts force components A, and A, and @ torque My on the wrench at A. Lgnations af Eiguitibiiuie, ER 0; Ay — S2(Z)N + 30ces °N ~ 0 “A, = SOON Ans: 2 +438, = A, ~ 52(B)N — 30 sin 60°N = oe Le he | Ay = HON Ans. % EM, = Ma ~ ‘S222)N (0.3 m) — (30sin 60° NY(0.7m) = 0 Fe ST M, = 32.5N-m Ans. ' Point A was chosen for summing moments because the lines of setion ofthe unkown forces A, end A, passthrough this point, and ! therefore these forees were not included in tho moment sumication, | Realze, however, that M, must be inckuded ia this moment | summation. "This couple moment is a free vector and represents the | twvisting resistance of the belt om the wrench. By Newton's third Lav, the wrench exerts an equél but opposite moment oF terque om the i bolt. Furthermare, the resukaat force on the wrench i ! i Fy = V5.0)! + (74.0)! = 741 N Ans Because the force components A, and A, were calculated as positive quantities, their mat sense is shown corsectly om the free-body diagram in ig, 5-17, Hence — a HON : o> tan" oN = 864? Realize thet Fy, acts in the opposite direction on the bolt. Way? Although oaty crvee independentequilibrinm equations can be written for a rigid boil. itis a good practice to check the calculations using a fourth equilibrium equetion. For oxemple, the above computations may ‘be verified in part by summing moments about point C: (EM e = 0,52G2)N (04m) + 326N-m -740N(OT Mm) = 0 W2N-m+%26Nem SLEN-mSecrich 5.2 Equations of Equilibrium + 245 ates ‘Placoment of concrete from the truck is accomplished using the chute shown in the photos, Fig. 18a, Determine the force that the hydraulic gylinder and the truck frame exert oni the chute to hold it in the ition shown. The Chute and wet concrete contzinad alongits length have 2 Uniform weight of 560 Nim. + Solution ‘Tho idealized model of the chute is shown in Fig. S185. exe the dimensions are given, and itis assumed the chute is pla connected (0 the frame at A and the hydraulic cylinder BC acts as a short link. Free-Bedy Diugraan. Since the chute has a Jength of +t m, the total supported weight is (560 Nim)(4 m) = 2240 N, which is assured to actat its midpoint, G.The hydraulic eylinder exerts a horizontal force pc on the chute, Fig. 5-18e. Equetions of Equilibriven. A direct solution for Bar is possible by summing momen!s about the pin at A.To do this we will use the principle of monients and resoive tie weight into components parailel ‘and perpendicular to the chute, We have, | GEM, = 0; | —Fc{0.9 m) + 2240 cos 30° N (2m) + 2240 sin 30° N (0.0625 m) = 0 Pac = 7200 N Ans i Soraming forces to obtain Ay and Ay, we obtain | Asr=0; -A,+7900N=0 | Ay = T90N Ans | - m4ON=0 \ Ay = 2240 N : Ans. i { } “To verify this solution we can sum moments aboat poiat B. [+EMy~ 0; —7900 N (0.5 m) + 2210 N (1 cos 30° m) + 7240 cos 20° N (1 mn} + 2240 N sin 30° (0.0625 m) = 0216 + CHAPTERS. Equilibrium of a Rigid Rody ‘The uniform smooth rod shown in Fig. 5-19a is subjected to a foree ‘and couple moment, If the rod is supported at A by a smooth wall and at B and C either ef the top orbottom by rollers, determine the reactions at these supports, Neglect the weight of the rod. Solution Trev-Body Diegran. As shown in Pig. 5-19, all the support reactions act nomnal (6 the surface of contact sincr the contacting surfaces are smooth. The reactions ai B and C are shown acting in the positive y! direction, This assumes thal only the rollers located on the bottom of the rod are used for support, Equerions of Equstibrione Using the x, y coordinate system in Kig. 5-190, we have AER= 0, Cysin30°+ Bysin30°— A,=0 (a) +4EK, = 0; —300N + Cy cos 20" + By eoe30° = 0 @) HEMa= 0: ~B,(2m) + 4000N-m ~ C,(6 m) + (300 c0830°N}(8 m) = 0 ) When witing the momen! equation, it should be notived that the line of action of tae force component 300 sin 30° N passes through point A, and therefore this force is not inchided ia the moment equation, ‘Solving Eqs. 2 and 3 simultaneously, we obtain By = ~10000N = -1kN Ans. y Cy = IMOAN = 1.35 EN Ans Since By ig 2 negative scalar, the sense of By is opposite to that shown on thetree-body diagram in Fig. 5-196. Therefore, the top roller a B serves as the support rather than the bottom one. Retaining the negative sign for B,, (Why?) and substituting the results into Eq. 1, we obtain 1346.4 sin 30°N — 1000.0 sin 30°N ~ 4, = Ay= 173N Ans,Stenow 5.3 Equations of Equilibrium + 217 J cthe aniform truck ramp shown in Fig. 2a has a weight of 1600 N (= 160 kg) and is pinned to the body of the truck at each ead and held in the position shown by the two side cables, Determine the teusion in the cables Sokstion ‘The idealized model of the ramp, which indicates all necessary dimensions and supports is shown ia Fig. 5-20b. Here the center of gravity is located al the inidpoint since the ramp is spproximately ‘uniform, Free-Body Diagram Working from the idealized model, the ramp's frco-body diagram is shown in Tig. 5-20c. Equations of Equithrivin, Somming moments about point A wit yield a direct solution for the eable tension. Using the principle of ‘moments, there are several ways of determining the moment of T about A. Thive use x and y components with T applied at B, we have (AEM, = 0; —T coe 20° (2 sin 30° ma) + T sin 20° (2 cos 30° m) +1600 N (1.5 cos 30° m) = 0 T= 595N By the principle of transmissibility, we can locate T at C, even though this point is aot on the ramp, Fig. 5-2%e. In this ease the horizontal component of T does not ereate a moment about A. First we must determine d using the sine law. d 2m 10° ane 1 Sm HEM, = 0; —T'sin 20° (1.9154 ma) + 1600 N CLS cos 30° m) = T~ S985N ‘The simplest way to compute the moment of T about A is to resolve it into components parallel and perpendicular to the ramp at 5.Then the moment of the parallel compomtent is zero about A, so that 44314 — 0; —F sin 10° (2 m) + 1600 N (1.5 cos 20° m) = 0 T= S985N Since there are two cables supporting the ramp, Fy 5-20 r . = 20925 Ant z Asan exercise, show that Ay ~ 5624 N and Ay ~ 3647 N,210 + CHAPTERS Equilibrium of a Rigid Body 5.4 Two- and Three-Force Members ‘The solution to some equilibrium problems can be simplified if oue is able to recognize members that are subjected to only two or three forces. ‘Two-Force Members. When amemberis subject to no couple moments and forees are applied at only two points on a member, the member is called a no-force member. An exemple is shown in Fig, 5-2la."Tbe forces, at A and B are summed to obtain their respective residlants Xs and Ey, Fig. 5-216, Treve tro forces willmaintzin translational or force equilibrium (EK = 0) provided Fg is of equal magnitnde and opposite direction to Fy. Furthermore, roltonal or moment equilibriun (2M = 0) is satistied if Ris collinenr with Rp, Asa rent, the fine of action of both forces is known since it always passes through A and 2, Hexce, only the force magrituce ‘must be determined or stated. Other examples of two-foree members Leld in equilibrium are shown in ig, 5-72. ‘Tweface wonbas Fig 5-22 Thtee-Force Members. Ifa member is subjected to only three forces, then it is nevespary that the forces be either concarrett or parallel for the member to bg in equilibrium. To show the concurrency requirement, consider the body in Fig. 5-23a and suppose that any two of the three forces acting on the body have lines of ectioa that intersect at point O."To satiofy moment equilibrium about O,i.e., 2Mg = 0, the third force must ‘abso pass through O, which then makes the force system concurrent, If two of tie three forces are parallel, Fig.5~23b, the point of comeurrercy, O, is considered to be at “infinity,” and the third force must be parallel to the other (wo forces to intersect at this “point.”Steraw §.4 Two- and ThreeForce Members + 219 "OP? “4 wt commento vdieee thee teem meen ‘Mary mechanical elements acl as 1Wo- of toree-foree members ancl the ability 0 recognize them in a problem will considerably sirpity an equilforinen analysis. ‘+ Tre bucket lak AB on the back-hot isa typical sample of atwo-force member since It's pin connected at its encs and, proved ss weight is neglected, wo colher force acts on thi member. + The hydmulie cyfinder BCs pin connected at is ends It is acun-lorcemernber, ‘The boom ABD i subjected to the weight af the suspended motor at D, the lacce ofthe hydraulic jfinder at B, andl the force ofthe pin at A. Ifthe booms ‘weight ir neglected, i 2 three-foree roeriber. © ‘The cump bed of the tnick operates by extending the telescopic aydrantie ‘jlinder AB, H the weight of AB is neglected, we can classify i a8 a Wwo-foree rember siace is pia conasctod at its end pofass220 CHAPTER 5. Equilibrium of a Rigid Body 04n— wi 04 ‘The lever ABC ix pin-snpported at A and comnected th a short link BD as shown in Big, 5-24a, If ie weight of the members is negligible, determine the force of the pin on the lever at A. Solution Fre-Bodv Diagrams. A8 shown by the free-bedy diaeram, Big $-245, the short lak BD is a two-force mramber, so the resultant forces a plus D and B must be cual, opposite, and collinear, ANhough the magnitude of the force is unknown, the line of action is known since it pastes through # and D. Lever ABCisa tlree-force member, and therefore,in order to satisty moment equilibrium, the three nonparallel forees acting on it must be coneurreat at O, Fig, 5-24c. In particular, rote that the force F on the lever at B is equal bul opposite to the force F acting at B oa te link. ‘Why? The distance CO must be 0.5 m since the lines of action of F and the 400.N force are known, Lguctions of Equitibvinn. By requiring the fores system to be concurrent at O, since EM = 0, the angle @ which defines the line of action of Ey cen be determined from trigonometry, ) 603° 228 Ans. Using the 2, y xes and appiying the force equilibrium equations, we car obtain F, and F. Fy cos 603° — F cos 45° + 400N = 0 Fysin 60.5" — F sin 45° = 0 Solving, we get eg = LOTKN Ans. FF =152KN, Note: We cpn also solve this problem by representing the force at A by it two componens A, and A, and applying 2M, = 0, ER, = 0,2, =0 to the lever. Once A, and Ay are determined, haw would you find F, and 6?Proms + 221 PROBLEMS SL, Deteemincthorenstions wi the supporisia Prob. 1. #512, Determine the magnitude of the resuttant force acting at pia A of the hanslpuneh in Prob 5-2 S:13, Determine the reactions at the supports for the trust tn Prop. 5-5, S14. Determine the reactions onthe boom in Prob. 5-6. ‘5418, Determine the support reactions on the beam in Prob. 2. *$.16, Determine the reactions on the member at A, B, and Cin Prob 5-8. 5:17. Determine the reactions atthe points of contact at A, Byand C of the borin Prob. 5-9. BAR Determine the reactions at the pin A xsl at the roller at B ofthe beam In Frob.5-10. SAI. Deternine the magnitude of the reactions on the beam al A andl B. Neglect the thickness of the Yea. Prob. 5.20, Determine the reactions at the suppons 4 ard B of the frome, tow sun TkN 2 fro apte oe ‘521, When holeing the 29-N (~ 24eg) stone in equilib> ipa, the humerus H, assumed to be smoodh, exens NocTAL Forces Fr znd Fy on the radius C and ulna A as shown, Tetecmine these forses and the force By that the bizeps B exerts on the radtus for equilibeiam. The slone has acentor of mass at @, Neglect the weight of the arm, 4 ssn Prob, 5-21 $22, ‘Tne man is pulling a fosd of AD N with one arm Ince as shows. Determine the force By this exerts on the ‘humerus done #, and the tension develoged fn the bleeps niuncle B. Neglect the weight of the man's arm.222+ CHAPTERS Equifbrium of « Rigid Rody S24 “Tne ramp of a ship bas a Weight of 1000 N (e190 $25. Compare the fores exerted on the toe zt heel of kg) abd 2 center of gravity ot G.Dotermine the cable force 80-N (vr 48e) woman when she is weaxing regular shoe in CD needed to just start lifting the ramp, (ia, 60 the and stiletto heels Assume all her weight is placed on on reactlon at B becomes 2e00} Also detsrminethe bodzontal 00k and the reactions ovcur at polnts A and B as showr aud vertical wompoueuts of force at the hinge (pin) at A. 20m 95mm. Prob, $25 rob. $-23 #524, Determine the magnitude of fowe at tie pinA 5-26, Determine the reactions at the pins A and B.TE and in the cable BC needed (0 support the 2000-N load. Spring has ar unstretched length of 80 rum. Neglect the weight of the boom AB. A600 Nie Prob. 5-265:27, The platform assembly has a weight of 1000 N (@ 100 kg) and center of grevity at Gy. It Ie faveided tosupport 4 maxim lead of 1600 N placed at point Ga, determine the smallest counterveight W that should bbe placed at B in order to prevent the platform irom tipping over. Prommas + 223 529, The device is used to hold an elevator door open. Tr ihe spring has a sUttness of k 4 40.Nim and i is ‘compressed 0:2 m, determine the harizantal and vertical components of reaction at the pin A and the resultent force at the wheel besring B. j-150-nm 175 me | . ie oa Prob 537 #528, Deteuine the tension in the cable and the herizontel and vertical compovent of reaction ofthe pind. “The pulley at Dis frictnless andthe cylinder weighs GON (~ 8). Prob, 5-28 Os: 7} fe Se 30" Prob, 6.29 5:30. The cutter is subjected t@ 2 horizowal foree of 580 N and a normal force of 350 N. Defermine the hrizon'al and vertical esmponents of force acting on the pin A and the force slong the hydraatie cylinder BC (a (vo-forve member),224 + CHAPTERS. Fauilibrium of a Rigid Body 531, The cantilevered [ib crane is used to suppor the oad of 780 N. If the trolley Tcan be placed anywhere between OS m = xs 225 m, determine the maximn mmagiitude of reactien at the supports A and #. Note that ‘the eupporls areccllarsthatallow the rane to rotate freely about the vertical axis The collar at 3 supports 2 force in the vertical direction, whereas the one at A does not. Prob. 5-21 8:32, The sports car has a mass of LS Mg and mass center at G.I the front two sarngs each havea sifiness of ky ~ S8kN/m and the rear tno springs each have a stiffness of ky = 651N/m, determine their compreation ‘when the cat is parked on the 30° Incline, ko, what ‘riction force ¥g must he sprlied toeach ofthe rear Wheels tohold the cer in ocuiliteium? Hus Fist determine the normal force at A and 8, then determine the eorrprestion in the springs. Prob. 5-32 533 "The power pole supports the three lines each ing exerting a vertical force on the pole due to fis Weigh ag shown. Detenmine the reacicas tthe fixed support D.1¢ itis posible for wind or ice 10 srap the lines, detormige Which He(s) when zemoved ereato()« condition for the greatest moment reaction at D, soon! ro. 523 $34, The jb crane fs pin-connected at A end supported by 2 smooth collar at 8. Determine the rolter placement of the SOON Toad 50 that it gives the maxinuun and woinimum reactions at the supports Calculate these reactions in each case, Neglect the weight of the crane, Requice Lm sx «25m, Prob. 5-34S38. Ifthe wheelbarvow and ils conteats haye 6 mass of © kg end center of mass at G, determine the magateade ff the resultant ferce which the man must exert an each of the two handles in order to hold the wheelbarrow in equilibrium, Peed, £25 536, The pad footing is used to euoport the Toad of 12 (OO N, Detenmine the tncensiies wy a2d 2 of the dfstibated loading acting on the base of the footing for the oqailbium. ON | _475 em] Prab,5-36 Promeus + 225 $37. The bulk head AD ' subjected to both water and soll-beckfl pressures. Assuming AD is “pinned” to Oe ground at A, determine the horizontal and vertical reactions there aad also the requized teasion in tle ground anchor BC necessary for equilibrium. The bulk head has amass cf 800 kg. [essa BO Nin Pra 37 538. The tolephone pole of negligible thidkuess is subjeved to dhe force of 400 NN directed as shown. It is supported by the cable BCD aad can be assumed pinned at its base A. In onder to provide learance for aidewalk right ‘of Wax, here D is located, the strut CF is attached at Chae shown by the dashed lines (cable segnent CD is removed). If the teusion in CD" is to be twice the texsion in CD, determine the height J for placement ofthe steut CE. Prob, 5.3826 + CHAPTER 5. Equilibrium of a Rigid Body 5539, ‘The worker wes the band qruck to move material down the ramp. If the track and ifs contents are held in the position shown and have ¢ weight of $00 N (~ 50 ke) with center afgravity at G, determine the resultant normal force of both wheels on the ground A end the magnitude of the tome requized at the grip B. Saft, The shelf supports the electric motor which has a ass of 15 kg and suass center at Gi, The platform upon ‘which it rests has a mass of 4 kg and mess center at G,, ‘Assiming that a single bol: # holds the shelf up end the ‘bracket bears againct chesmooth wall at A, determine this normal foree at A and the horizontal and vertical ‘components of reaction of the bolt on the bracket. 5.40, The beam is subjected to the twwo concentrated Toads a8 shown. Astumicg that the foundation exezte « Tinesrly varying load distbutionon its bottom, determine the load intensities sf and ¥ for equilibrium (a) in terms of the perameters shown, (5) set P = 500 NZ, = 12 m. Prob, $41 $42. A cantilever beam, having an extended length ¢ 3m, ia eubjacied too vertical force of SOON. Assuming the ‘the wall resists this load With Tlnearly varying dlsetbute Toads over the 0.154m length of the beam portion iasid ‘the wall,detemine the intensities wy and wy for equilbriun re. 5425-43. ‘The vppor portion of the crene boom consis of Ue [1b AB, which is supported by the pia at A, the guy ae BC, and the backstay CD, each cable being separately attached tothe mast at C: Ifthe SKN Toad is supported by the hoist line, which passes over the pulley at B, determine the magnitude of tue resultant force the pin exerts on the {iD at A for equilibrium, the tension ix the guy llue BC, and the texsion T in the hoist line. Neglect the weight of the jib The pulley at B has a radius of 0.1 m. Prob, 53 #54. ‘The mobile cane has a weight of 690000 N (= @ tonne) and center of gravity at Gy; the boom bas a ‘weight of 150000 N (>= 15 tonne) and center of gravity at Gy Determine the smallest angle of Ut 9 of the boom, ‘without causing the crane to overtum if the suspended 200000 N. Neglect the thickness of the racks 5.45, The mobile cern has weight of 600000 N ‘(= 0 tonne) and seater ot gravity a (the boom has & weight of 150.000 N {= 15 tonne) and center of gravity at G, Ifthe suspended load has a weight of 1” ~ 80010 N (€ 8toae}, etomaine the nora reactions et the tacks ‘A and B.For the calculation, neglect the thickness of the tracks and ke 9 = 30 7 Prowenes + 227 5-46, The winch consists of @ drum of radius 190 mm, ‘whlch is pin-commected at lis center C, AL Its outer chm i @ ratchet geer having « mean cadivs of 190 min."The pawl AB serves a5 & twvo-forte member (Slott link) and holds the deum from rotating. If the suspended load is 2000 N, determine the hotizental and veuical components of reaction at the pin C. 5.47. The crane consis of three parts, which have swoights of 1% — 14.000 1V (~ 1400 kg), WV; — 3600 N {= 360 kg) 173 = GODON (= €00 kz) and centers of gravity 2 GiyGp, and Gi, reapectively. Neplecting the Weight of the beom, determine (a) the regctions on etch ofthe fone tires # the load ie hoisted at constant velocity and has a ‘weight of 1200 N (= 220g), aud (bj, with the boom held in the position shown, the maximum loed the crane can lift without tipping over. ‘025m228 + CHAPTERS Equilibtiurn of = Rigid Body 45:48, The boom supports the two vertical loud, Neglect the size ofthe coliars at 2 and # and the thickness of the boom, and compute the horizontal and vertical compancnts of fore at the pin al and the force in cable CB. Set Fy = S00N ore Py — 350. 5-49, ‘Tye boom s Intended to support two vertica, loads, F, and F, Ifthe cabee CB can sustain 2 maximum Joed of 1500 N before it fails, deterinine the critical loads if F, = 2Fy, Ako, wnat is the magnitude of the maximum reaction at pin A? Peebs, $-48709 5-50, ‘Three uniform books, cach having a weight 1Vand Tengih a, ae stacked as sown. Detecmine the maximum distence d that the top beok can extend out from the Vottom ane 59 the slack does not topple over. S51, The toggle switch consists of a cocking lever tha 1s pinned to a fixed frame at A and eld in plsce by th soring which has an unstretched length of 200 mm ‘Dewwomine the magnitude ofthe respltant force at A cn the normal force on the: peg at B when ge lever i i thy position shown, 25:52, The risid beam of negligible weight is supporte horizontally by evo springs and + pin, IF the spring: at uncompressed when the load is removed, deteznuine th force in each spring when the Toad P 1S applied, Als compate the vertical deflection of ead C. Assume th spring stiffuess X is large enough so that only sma Sefleetions yscir Hint: The beam rotatet ebout i ay th eficetions in ie springs can be related,553. The oniform rod AZ bas a weight of. 150 N (7 154) and be sping ech whi @ = 30°, determine the stiffness & ofthe spring so thatthe. eas neaudon, Prob. 83 5.54, ‘Theamooth pips rete cgainet the wall at the points ofcontact 4, B, and C, Determine the reactions at these points needed to support the vertical force of 180 N. ‘Neglect the pipe’s thickness in the ealeulation, sn Pra 5-64 Proms + 220 5:85. The hotizontal beam is supported by springs at its fends, Each spring bas @ stiffuess of & = SkN/m and is ‘figinally unstretched whez the beam is in the horizontal position, Determine the angle of tlt of the beare if aload ‘oF 800 N i¢ applied at point € ss shown. 45.56. The horizontal bean is supported by springs at ite conde Ifthe stlffness of the spring at A isk —SEN/m, determine the requiced stiffness of the spring at B so that if the beam js loaded with the 800 N it remains in the horizontal position. The springs ace originally constructed so that the beam ia in the horizontal position when it ie unloaded, 3m Probs, 558/56 5:57, Determine the distance ¢ for placement of tne load P for equilibrium of tie smooth bar in the position @ as shown. Neglect the weight of the bar. Beals 5-52230 + CHAPTERS. Equilibrium of a Rigid Body 5-58, The wheelbarrow and ftsconients bave 2 massm 45-60, ‘The uniform beaun bas 2 weight W and length ¢ ‘and center of mast at G. Determine the greatest angle of ands supported bya pin at A anda cable 2C. Determine {i Without causing the wheelbarrow to tip over. the horizontal end vertical components of reaction at 4 and the tension in the cable necessiry to hold the besma i the position shown, © — Prob. 5-40 S61, The wom ro ms a Tengts aid weight W. Sts sipporte al one end A by a smooth wall and the other endby # cord af length s whichis atached tothe wall as Shown. Show that for egtiibxium i # required that hate — Op}? Prob, $58 w 5-59. A boy stands out al the oud of the diving board, Supported by Iwo springs A and B, each having a stifftess of = 15 kN/m. In the position shown the board is horizontal. Jf the man has a mass of 40 kg, determine the angle of filt waich the board makes with the horizontal atter he jimps off. Neglect the weight of the board end assume it js rigid. Prob. 5-81 5.62, The dick B hat a mase of 20 kg snd is supported ‘on the smboih cjlindrical surface by m 9pring having © stitiness of K=4001Nim end unstretched length of Jg= Lm. The spring remains in the horizontal positior since its ed A is attached fo tho sat roller guide whick hasneghgible weight, Determine the angle 6 tothencarest Aegroe for oquibriuu of the roll. Pro. 5-89 Prob. 5-92Secnow 8,5. Free-Body Diagrams = 234 Equilibrium in Three Dimensions 5.5 Free-Body Diagrams “Tue first step In solving three-timensional equitibrium problemas, as in the case of two dimensions, is to draw a free-body diagram of the body (or group of bodies considered as a system). Before we stiow this, however, it is necessary to discuss the types of reactions that can occtr at the supports, Support Reactions. The reactive forces and couple moments acting at various types of supports and connections, when the members are viewed in three dimensions, are listed in Table $-2. Itis important 10 recognize the symbols used to represent each of these supports and to understand clearly hovw the foroce and couple moments axe developed by each support. Asin the two-dimensional case, force ts developed by support that restricts the trenslation of the attecked member, whereas @ couple inoment ix developed when roiation of the aitached member ix prevented, For exampie, in Table 5-2, the ball-and-sorket joint (4) prevents any translation of the connectiug member; therefore, a force. must act on the memberat the point of connection. This force has three components having unknown magnitudes, f,, Fy, £. Provided these components ate Known, one can obtaia the magnitude of force. F-\/FEU FY 1 FA, and the force's orientation defined by the coordinate direction angles @, 8, y, Eqs. 2-7." Since the connecting ‘member is allowed to rotate freely about any axis, nocouple moment is resisted by a ball-and-socket joint, It showld be noted that the sigle bearing supports (5) and (7), the single pin (8),and the single hinge (9) are shown to support both force and couple-moment components. If, however, these supports are used in conjunction with omher beatings pins, or hinges to hold a tigid body in equilibrium snd the supports are properly aligned when connected to the body, then the force reactions at these supports alone may be adequate for supporting the body, In other words, the couple moments become redundant aed are not shown on the free-body diagram. The. reason for this should become ciear after studying the examples which follow ‘The throe unknowns wy also be zoprerented 2¢ an unlenown force meppitude F asd to unknown coordiaste dizestcn angles The thid rection angie obtain using the denny costar 1 cov p + cost y ~~ 1, Eq. 2-0.232 + CHAPTER 5 Equillbrkim of a Rigid Body TABLE 5-2 © Supports for Rigid Bodies Subjected to Three-Dimenstonal Force Systents ‘Types of Caanection Reactlon ‘Nuniker of Unknowns eae & ‘One unknown, The seaction is a force which acts away vey . fom the member in the known direefion of ths cable Ve Ve cette ‘One unknown. ‘Ihe reaction is 4 force which acts perpendisular to thesurface at the point of contact ssnooth swfaxe supper ‘One unknown, The reaction is a force which acts perpendloular to the surface at tne polnt of coatact. ‘Three unknowns The reactions are three rectangular foree componente ba aadseke oD * ey Mh 3 eh ee Four unknowns The reactions are two foree and two “ = ceuple-moment components which acl perpendicular to ” the sist contiauedTABLE 5-2 © Continued Stenon 8.5. Frae-Body Diagrams - 233 “Types of Connection Reaction Nesnher of Unknown Ma po Ht Five unimowns. The reactions are two force and three : cot couple moment components. Mey AY singel ig BoE vith sore shaft Five unknowns, The reactions are three force and two couple moment components ®) single hinge Five nknowns. The reactions art three force and wo couple-moment components, Five unknowns, The reactions are (ee force and wwe couple-moment components a) cdl. set wpper ‘Six unkuowns. The reactions ere (vee force and three couple-moment components.234» CHAPTERS. Equilibrium of a Rigid Rody ‘Typical examples of actual supports that arc rfeouced to Teble 5-2 are shown ia the following sequetce of photos ‘This bellandancket joint provides 2 ‘This jowrnal bessing sports the end of connection for the hodwiag OF an egeth the shai. (5) seeder to ‘be Feara. (4) ‘This thrust bearing is used to support the ‘This pi fs used to support the end of the drive Staft on a machine. (7) strut dsed on a tractor, (8) Froo-Body Diagrams. ‘The general procedure for establishing the free-body diagram of a sight body has been outlined in Sec, 52. Essentially it'requires first “isolating” the body by drawing its outlined shape. This is followed by a careful labeling of all the forces and couple moments in reference to an established x, y, z coordinate system. AS @ general rule, components of reaction having an ueknown magnitude are shown acting on the free-body diagram in the positive sense. In thie way, it any negative values are obtained, they will indicate thet te components zc! in the negative coordinate directions.Secon 55 Fr Body Diagrams = 235 Itis a mistake to support a door using a single hinge since the hinge must develop a force C, to support the weight W of the door and a couple moment M to support the moment of W, ie., M = Wd. If instetd two properly aligned hingee ars ured, then the weight is carzied by both hinges , + 3, ~ W, and the momeat of the door is resisted by the two hinge forees F, ard ~F, “These forces tom a couple, such that Fy! ~ Wel. Tn other words no couple moments are predueed by the hinges on the door provided they ae in proper atignment. Instead, the forces F, and —M, resist the roration caused by W, In all cases, the x, », z axes ate established and the unknown reaction components are indicated in the positive vonse, The weight of the objects is neglected. i Several examples of objects along with their associated free-body diagrams are shown in Fig, 5-25. | | | © i 4sn-m a : 4 ! i AS i on 1 Props aged foumal “Tre face reacons developed by : beningsat dC: thebearngs ae sifciet fer equilibria sieetay prevent he i shaft am miatie oat : cach ef erode 24s | ® i Fig. S23 i236 + CHAPTERS Equilibrium of a Rigid Body sie Rpm Pata e se ; Moment components ae éevelenet © by he pinn te od to prevent rotten eben he randy oe, Cnty fe rsdn se dar TLS Sitieco me mcn” erent dite, "Shaner ate bige oe dewepad. Paper aligaed jeorcal besrng © at and hing 0 Roller a 2. Tansee ad ‘nex compen cent cere c+ yasbestng ne ret eer Tet nEe ae ey ees Bip £35Stcnow 5.6 Equations of Equilibrium - 237 56 Equations of Equilibrium stated in Sec. 5.1, the conditions for cquilibrium of @ rigid body subjected to a three-dimensional force ‘system require that both the pesuiltant force and resultant couple moment acting on the body be equal 10 2210. vector Equations of Equilibrium, ‘The two conditions for equilibrium. ‘of arigid body may be expressed mathematically in veetor form as 2 Mo @) where 2K is the vector sum of al! the external forces acting on the body and 2Mois the sum of the couple moments and the moments of ell the forces about any point O located either on or off the body. Scalar Equations of Equiibrlum, If all the epplic¢ oxtomal forces ‘and couple moments are expressed in Cartesian vector form and substituted into Fqs.5-5, we have BPs 2Ri+ 2B) +2Rk=0 2Mg = EM + ZMj4 ZMK =0 ‘Since the i,j, and le eomponents are independent from one another, the above equations are satisfied provided BE =O BE =0 (5-60) 2H, = 0 and 6-60) ‘These six scaler eqnilibriunt equations may be used to solve for at most six unknowns shown on the frec-body diagram. Equations $-6a express the fact that the sum of the external force components acting in the x, y,and 2 directions must be zero, ané Eqs. 5-68 require the sum of the moment components about the x, y, and z axes to be zero,238 + CHAPTERS Equilibrium of a Rigid Body 5.7 Constraints for a Rigid Body ig. 5-26 To ensure the equilibrium of a rigid body, it is not only accessary to satisfy the equations of equilibrium, but che body must also be properly held or constrained by ts supporis Some bodies may have more supports than are necessary for equilibrium, whereas others may not have enough or the supports may be atranged in a particular manner that could cause the baciy to collapse. Fach of these eates will now be discussed. Redundant Constraints. When s body has redundant supports, that ig more supports tlian are necessaty to hold it in equilibrinm, it becomes statically indeterminate, Statica/fy dudetermtvtate means that there Wil be more unknown loadings on the body than erations of equilibrium available for their solution. For example, the two-dimensional problem, ‘ig, 5-264, and the three dimensional problem, Fig, 5-260, shown together with their free-body diagrams, are both statically indeterminate becatse of additional support roactions.In the two-dimensional case, there are five unknowns, that is, Mj, A, A,B, and Cy, for which only three equilibrium equationsran be written (22K, = 0, °F, = 0,and ¥Mp = 0, Eqs.5-2).Tae three-diménsional problem has cight unknowns, for which only six equillbrivm equations can be written, Eqs. 5-6. The additional ‘equations needed to solve indeterminate problems of the type shown in Fig, 5-26 are gencrally obtained from the deformation conditions at the points of support. These equations involve the physical properties of the body which are studied in subjects dealing with the mechanics of deformation, such as “mechenies of matetiais™* © See RC. Mibbeler, Mechanles of Materats, ST edition (Pearson Edueation?Prentice Hal, Ine, 2001).Srerion 5.7 Constraints for a Rigid Body - 239 smproper Constraints. Ta somecases,thore may be as many wiknowa forces on the Lody #5 there are equations of equilibrium; however, Jnstabiiy of the body can develop because of improper constraining by the supports Ta the case of throe-dimensional problems, the body is improperly constrained if the suppoct reactions ai! btersect « cowmton axis For two-dimensional problems, this axis is peypenndieular to the plane Of the forcesand therefore appear asa point. Hence, when al the reactive forces are concrrren at this point, the body is improperly constrained. ‘Hxamples of both cases are given in Fig. 5-27. From the free-body diagrams itis voon that the summation of moments about the x axis, Fig, 5-274, 0F point O,Fig, 5-279, will not be equal to zero; hus rotation about the x axis or point O will take place.t Furthermore, in both cases, it ‘becomes impassible to solve compleiely for ell the unknowns since one can write # moment equation thet does not involve any of the unknown support reactions, and as ¢ resol, this reduces the number of aveilable equilibrium equations by one. 00n Eat e0 Rig. $27 For the three dimsasionsl problem, SM; > (400N)(06m) » , end for tho swo- dimensional peeblom, ZA, ~ (140 N)(Oz.a) # 0.240 + CHAPTERS. Equilibrium of a Rigid Body \ Sa +0 ® ye eo 3 “0 Fy. 28 Re Fe won —____* | Ered ® Another wey in which improper constraining leads to instebility occurs when the reactive forces are all parallel. Thtee- snd two-dimensional ‘examples of this are shown ia Fig. 5-28. In both cases, hesummation of forces along the x axis will no: equal zero. Tn some cases, 2 body may have fener reactive forces than equations of equilibrium that must be setislicd. The body thea becomes only partially constrained, Fox example, consider the body shownin Fig. 5-292 ‘vita its corresponding free-body diagram in Tig, S~29b, TE O is a point not located on the line AB, the equation BF, ~ 0 gives Fy — Fy aad 3My = ¢ and ZF, = 0, however, will not be satisfied tor the loading conditions andjherefore equilibrium will not be maintained. Proper constraining therefore requires thet (1) the lines of action of ‘he reactive forces do not intersect points on a common axis, and {2} the reactive forces must not ll be parallel to one another. When the minimum number of reactive forces is needed to properly constrain the body in question, the problem will be statically determinate, and therefore the equations of equilibrium can be used to determine al the reactive forces.Secroti 57 Constraints for a Rigid Body « 244 + Always draw the free-body diagram first © Ifasupport prevents trmatation of abbody in aspediicdirection; hen the support exerts a force on the body in that direction, > AE rotation about an axis is prevented, hen the support exerts 2 couple inrement on the body about the aids. + If a body is subjected to more unknown reactions than available equations of equikibrium, then the problem issietically indeterminate. ‘To avoid instability of @ body requice that the fines of acifon of the reactive foroes do not intersect a comnton axis and are not parallel to one another. PROCEDURE FOR ANALYSIS. ‘Turee-dimensional equilibrium problems for a rigid body can be solved using the following procedure. Free-Body Diagraon © Draw an outlined shape of the body, ‘© Show all the forses end couple moments acting on the body. ‘© Establish the origin ofthe x,y,z axes at aconvenient point and orfent the axes so that they are parallel to as many of the extemal forces, and moments as posible. ® Label sll the loadings and specify their directions relative to the x, 4 2 axes In generat, show all the unknown components having a postive sense along the x, 352 axesif the sense cannot be detertained. © Tndivate the dimensions ofthe body aceessary for eomputing the mo. ments of forces, Equations of Eqnitibriton # Tithe, yz foree and moment components seem easy to determing, then apoly the six sealer equations of equilitxiumm otlerwise use the vector equations ‘+ Th not necessary that the set of axes chosen for force summation coincide with the st of axzs chosen for moment suinmation. Ako, any sef of nonorthogonal axes may be chosen for this purpose. ‘+ Choose the dicection of en aais for moment summation such that it intersects the lines of action of as many unknown forces as possible, Jn this way, the moments of forces passing through points on this ‘axis and forces which are paralicl to the atis wil then be zero, ‘+ Ef the solution of the equilibrium equations yields a negative scalar for afotce of couple moment magnitude, tindiatos the: thesense ia ‘opposite to that which was assumed on the free-body diagram,“The homogeneous plate shown in Fig, 5-30 hes a mess of 100 kg and 4s subjected 0 a force and couple moment along its edges. If itis supported in the horizontal plaze by means of a roller al A, « ball- and-socket joint at B, and a cord at C, determine the components of reaction at the supports Solution (Sealar Analysts) Free-Body Dingran ‘There are five uakmown reactions ecting onthe plate, as shown in Fig, 5-300. Each of these reactions is assumed 10 act in e positive coordinate direction, Equations of Eyuitirin Stace the three-dinensional geometry is rather simple, a scaler anclysis provides a direct solution to this problem. force summation along each axis yields BR =0; B.=0 Aas. 2B Ans. ay Recall that the momait of a force about an axis is equal to the product of the force magnitude and the perpendicular distance (moment atc) fromthe line of action of the foree to the axis.The sense ‘of the moment is determined by the right-hand rule. Alsc, forces that ‘are parallel to an axis or pass through it create no moment about the axis Tlence, summing moments of the forces om the free-body diegram, vith positive moments ciing along the positive x oF y axis, we have EM,=0; To(2m) 981 N(Lm) + 32m) = 0 @ EM, =D; 3OON(1.5 m)+981 N(15 m) —8,( m) —A,(3m) -200 N-m=0 (3) “The components of force at B can be eliminated if the x’, y’, 2 axes are used, We obtain Lily = 0; 98LN(Lm) + 300N(2m) — A,(2m) = 0 @ EM, = 05 300N(LS m) — 98LN(LSm)—200N+m+To(3m)=0 (5) Solving Fagg 1 thtough3 or the more convenient Bags 1, 4, and Syiekis A= TON B= -27N Tos OTN Ans ‘The ncgetive sign indicates that B, acts downward, ‘Note that the solution of this problem does not require the use of a summation of-moments about the z axis. The plate is partially constrained since the supports cannot prevent it from turning about the z axis if a force is applied to it i the r-y plane,Secnon 5.7. Corstraints for o Rigid Body - 243 ‘The windloss shown in Fig. 531 is supported by a thrust bearing at ‘Aandi a smooth jouraal bearing at B, which are properly aligued on the shaft, Determine the magnitude of the vertical force P that must be applied tothe handle to maintain equilibrium of the 100-kg bucket. ‘Also calculate the reactions at the bearings, 4, ’, at aaa LA ZS B, oF cos 30m Spe * @ ® reso. Solution (Scalar Analysis) Free-Body Diagram, Since the beatings at A and B are aligned correctly, only foree reactions accur at these supports. Fig. 5-315. Why aro there no momeat reactions? Equations of Equilibrivnt, Suouming moments about the xaxis yields fa direct solution for P. Why? For 2 scalar moment summation, it is necessary to determine tie moment of each Loree as the product of the force magnitude and the perpendicular distance from the x axis to the line of action of the Zoree. Using the right-hand rule and assuming positive moments act in the + direction, we have EM, 0; 981 N(0. m) — P(0.3cos 30°m) = 0 P= 3776N Ans. “Using this result and summing moments about they and z axes yields EM,= 6 981 (0.5m) + A,(0.8 m) + (377.6N)(0.4 m) Ay = WA3N Ans 3M,-0; -A,(08m)=0 A,=0 “The reactions at B are determined by a foree summation using these results, Ar=0 0+B,=0 B,=0 =O; 4243 - 981 + 2, - 3776 = ON Ans.244 = CHAPTER 5 Equilibrium of a Rigid Body Determine the teasion in cables BC and BD and the reactions at the ball-and-socket joint A for the mast shown in Fig. 5-32a, Solution (Vector Anolysis) Free-Bouy Dingram. ‘There are five unknown force magnitudes shown oa the free-body diagrara, Fig. 5-32. Eqqotiow of Equitiveiun, Expressing each force in Cartesian vector form, we have {—1000)} N Baa Ad + Aj + Ad Te = 0.107Feh = 0.707T ke t= (2) = 2g + Seg — Sra Applying the force equation of equilibrium gives BP <0) RAE, +Te+Ip~0 3 6 (Ag+ OF07R — FTpMh + (1000 + Ay + 57H) + (Ay ~ O07 — Stak - SR-G A+ on01%, = 375 ~ 0 w BR= 0 A, + £ ~ 1000 =0 e BRO A,- 0101T~ ETp=0 ® Summing moments about poiat A, we have. =M4 tp X (E+ Te + Tp) =O 6k X (—1000j + 0.707 Tei - 0.1077 ok 6,6 lrg + S25 -& Tol + ST§ — ET ok) 2 Evaluating the cross product and combining terms yields i (CAT, + 6000)i + (4247p — 2Tp}i = 0 . BM. = ~4Tp + 6000 = 0 @ “a =My A2Te - Wy =0 ©) xy ‘The momerit equation about the z axis, EM, = 0, is automatically © satisfied. Why? Solving Eqs. 1 through 5 sve have my en To=1IN Tp = 1500N Ans. ON 4y=0N | 4, ~ 1500N Ans. ‘Since the mast isa two-force member, Fig. 5-32¢, note that the value ‘Ag = Ay 0 could have boon determined by inspection,Secon 57 Constraints for a Flgid Body + 245 Rod AB shown in Fig. 5-380 is subjected to the 200-N force, pereimine the rezctioas al the belland-socket jolatA and the tension jn cables BD and BE. solution (Vector Analysts) Free-Body Diagrna, Fig, 5-33, “Equaions of Equilibrio Represeating each force on the tree- body diagratn in Cartesian veetor form, we have ah B= Adt Ajj + Ade Tp - Tel Ty = Taj 200k} N Applying the foree equation of equilibrium. » BPs E+ Tp+Tpt+ Foo (Ag + Tai + (ay + Tpii + (Az ~ 200)k = 0 Act T=0 w Ay+Ip=0 @) BR=0 A,- 20-0 e ‘Summing moments about point 4 yieks SMy= 0 te X F + t_X (Te + Tp) = 0 Sincere = 3a, then (O51 1] ~ 1k) x (—200k) + (It + 2) — 2K) x (Tel + Thi) = 0 ‘Expancing and rearranging tecms gives, 2p — WY (-2Fp 1 100)j + (Ty ~ 2K = 0 Sides Mp~ 200-0 @ Si=0 -2%e + 100-0 roy BM,=G Tp ~ Uz =0 © Solving Fag. 1 through 6, we get Ans. Ans, Ans, o Ans. Bip 5-33 ANS, ‘The negative sign indicates that A, end A, have a sense which s ‘opposite to that showa on the free-body diagram, Fig, §-33b,+ CHAPTER $ Equillbrium of a Rigid 3ody Nips ‘The bent rod in Fig, S~34a is supported at A by a journal beating, at D vy a balband-socket joint, and at B by means of cable BC, Using only one equilibriunt equation, obtain a ditect solution for the tension in cable BC, The bearing at A is capable of exerting force components aly in the ¢ and y dizections since it is properly aligned on the shalt, Sohttion (Vectar Analysis) Free-Budly Diugwan. As showa in Fig. 5-34, there are six unknowns: three force components caused by the ball-and-socket Joint, two caused by the bearing, and one caused by the cable, Eguctions of Equilibrivun, The cable tension Ty may be obtained direcily by summing moments bout an axis passing through points D and A. Why? The direction of the axis is defined by the unit vector u, where, fa 4, ty os 70K ~ O07 Hence, the sum of the moments about this exis is zero provided EMpa =u Ele XK) =O Tlere ¢ represents @ position vector drawn from any potnt on the axis Dé to any point on the line of action of force F (see Eq. 4-11). With reference to Hig. 5-34b, we can therefore write w(t, X Ty tg W)=0 WW) & Gord — Gtad + GST) + (-0.5j) X (-981k)} = 0 {-O.7071 - 0.707))- [(-O.857Fy + 490.5) + 0.2867 yk} = 0 = 0.20% -0.857%, + 4905) 404020 (-07071 - 0.7079 Tye sss Ans. ‘The advantage of using Cartesian vectors for this soluifon should be noted, It would be especially tedious 10 determine the perpeadicular distance from the DA axis to the fine of action of Ty using scalar methods. ‘Note: In a similar manner, we caa obtain D,(=490.9 N) by summing moments about an ax's passing through AB. Also, A,(=0) is obtained by summing moments cbout the y axisPromens + 247 PROBLEMS 5463, The uniform foad has a mats of 600 kg and is iftet aing © uniform 20-kg strongbick beam and four wire ropes 65 Stown. Determine the tension in ezch segment of rope and the force that rust be appiied to the sling at 4. rob, 5-63 *5.64, “The wing of the jet aizcrafiseubjected to « thrust of 7 = SEN from fig engine and the resulvant Tift force 1, = 4S KN. Lethe cass of the wing is21 Mg and the mass ceateris at G. determine the x yz components of reaction where the wing is fixed to the farslage at A. $65, The tniform concrete slab has a weight of 72 EN (+ 2.2 tora). Determine the tension in each of the thiee parallel suppoding cables when the sab is eld in the horizontal plane ss shown. Te Prat. 5-65 $66, The sircenditioning anit ' hoisted to the roof of 2 building using the three cables. If the tensions in the cables are T, = 1000N, Zn = 1200 N, and Te = 810N, determine the weight of the unit and the location (x,y) of its center of gravity G. Prob. 5-64 Prabs 5-66248 + CHAPTERS Equilibrium of a Rigid Rody 5:67, ‘The platform truck supports the dee Toadings —§.69, The cert supports the uniform eae having a mass Shown, Detexnine the norma} reactions on each of jis of 89 kp. Determine the veriical reactions on the three three wheels. casters i, Band C.'Ihe casterat Bisaoé shown. Neglect the mass of the cart and assume the casters at A and areat the rear corner of the ea Prob. 549 8-70. ‘The boom AB is held in equi brium by a balt-and- Bead, 5. socket joint and a pulley and card system 2¢ shown. Dotennive the » » ¢ components of eaction at end tho tension ina vable DEC if F = {150K} KN. 25:68, “The vrench is wsed totighten the boltat A.tithe $74, The eable CED can sustain a maximum tension force F = 30 N is applied to the handle as shows, of 600 N before it fails. Determine the greatest vertical termine the magnituces of the rerultant force and force F that can be applied to ihe boom. Ako, what ate ‘moment that the bolthead exerts on the wrench. The foree the x,» ¢ components of reaction at the ball-and-secket Fis ina plane paralet to the x-¢ plane joiat a? FaWN fsa Prob 8 Peon 1045772, Determine the force components actingy on the bballand-sovket at A, the reaction at the roller and he teasion om the cord CD needed for equilibrium af the quarter creular plate. AY mow ta le on 3, = rob, 542 5-73, The windlass suppor the 50-kg mass Determine me horizontal force P needed to hots the handle ia the ion shawn, and the components of reaction at the battand-cocket joint A and the emooth journal betsing 2 ‘The bearing at B is in proper aligumeatt aad exerts only fore reactiors on the winlass Promems + 249 $74 ‘The pole for « power ine i sabjected to th avo cable forces of GN, each force lying in # pane pelle lo the x-y plane. If the tension in the guy Wire ais BN, determine the x,y,z components of reaction atthe fved base of the pole, O eve te these three fores. Prob. 5-74 5-75, ‘Member AB is supported by 2 cabk, BC and at A bya square rod which fi loosely throagh the square bole et the end joint of the member as shot. Determine the components of roaction at A and tho tention in the cable aceded to hold the 800 (~ 80-kg) cytinderin equiliium. Prob, 73 Prob. 5-78280 + CHAPTER'S. Equilisrium of a Rigid Body +5076, The pipe assembly supports the vertical Toads shown, Determine the components of reactionat the bail- anc-socket joint A and the tension in the supporting.cables BCant BD. , Prob. 5% 5-77, Both pulleys are fixed to the sheft and as the shaft ‘tums with constant angular velocity the poser of pulley A is Uarsmitted to pulley B. Determine the horiznntal ‘tension Tin the belt enpelley 2 and the x,y 2 componente of eaction atthe journal bearing C aud thrust bearing D if = 0°. The bearings ate in propes alignment and exert only force resctions on the shat. $78 Both pulleys are fixed to the shafl and asthe shaft tuens vith conatart angular velocity the power of pulley Ais tammitted to pulky B. Determine the horizontal teasion 7 in the belt on pulley 8 end the, yz components cof reaction atthe jourral bearing C and thrust bearing D if0 — 49. The besriags are in prnperaligament and exert coaly foree reactions on the abalt. on Peal 57978 875, ‘The bent rod is supposted at 4, B, and C by smooth journal bearings. Compute the xj, z comporects cf reaction at the bearings ifthe red i subjected 10 Forces, Fi, = 300 N and F, = 250 N.F, tes in the y-z plane. Tre beazings are in proper alfgnarent ané exert only force seactious on the 104 7580, The beat rod issupported at 4, B, and C by soca {Journal bearings Determige the magnitude of Fh which will ‘cause the reation C, at the beating Ctp be equal ta ze70, ‘The bearings are ia proper alignment und exert ouly force reactions on the rod. Set Fy = 300. Probes 5-798 581. The silo hasa weight of 14 COON (= 1.4 tonne) and. acenter ofgravityat G. Determine the westical component of force that cach of the three sirutsat A,B, and C exerts ton the silo fit is subjected to a resultant wind loading of 100018 which acts in the direction shown,Promieus + 254 532 Determine the tensions in the cables and the *S-84, The boom AC is supported at A by a belland ‘components of reaction acting op the smoott cellar at A socket joint an by two cables BDC ara CE. Cable BDC necessary to hold the 5O-KN (= Sonne) sign in equilib- is contimaus and passes over a pulley at 2, Calawlate the rium. The center of gravity foc the sign is at G. tension in the cablesand the x 9.2 componeats ofreaction atl fla crate bat a weight! of 80 EN. 583, The boom is supported by a belland-socket joint at “Aard a guy wire a B. Ifthe S-EN leads bein a plane which isporalicl tothe s-) plane determine thex,y, ecomponents 585, Rod Ad issuppurted by # ballandtsocket joint at A Of reaction at i and the tension in te cable at and a cable at B Determine the x, y, z componenss of reaction at these supports ifthe rod is subjecied to a 50-KN vertical fore as chown, Prob. 4 Prob. 49 Prob. 5-85252 + CHAPTER S Equilibrium of a Rigid Body 546, A, vertical force of 50 N acts on the crankshaft Determine the horizontal equilibrium fotee ® that must bbe applied to the hancle and the x,y, z components of reaction at the jowrral bearing A acd thrust bearing B. ‘The bearings are properly aligned and exert oaly foree reactions on the shall, 20mm a wn r Prok 5-86 3-87. ‘The platform has amass of 3Mia and center of mass, ‘ocated at C. If is fitted with censtant velocity using the thioe cables dotermine the force in ouch of the cables, 588, The platform bas amass of 2 Mg and conter of muss located at G. It it & Mfled uslag the three cables, determine the foros in cach of the cables, Solve for each force by using a single moment equation of equilibrium. Probs.5-8788 5-89. The cables exert the forces shown on the pote, ‘Assuming the pole is supported by a bell-and-socket joint a1 its base, determine the components of reaction at A. “The forces of MOEN and 75 EN lie in a horfanrtal plane, ona Frab. 539 3490. “The pole is subjected to the two forces shown, ‘Determine the components of reaction of A assuming it tobe @ balhand-socket joint. Also, compute the tension in ‘each f the guy wires, BC and ED. ron. 590Renew Prossus + 253 CHAPTER REVIEW © Free-Body Diagram. Before analyzing any equilibrium problem it is Gist necessary to draw a free-body diagram, This is sm outlined shape of the body, which shows all the forces and couple momeuts that act on the body. Remember that a stipport will exert a force on the body in a particular direction if it prevents translation of the body in tiat direction, and it will exert a couple moment on the body if it prevents votavion. Angies used to resolve forces, and dimensions used to take moments of the forces, cud also be sliown on the free-body diagram. * Two Dimensions. Normally the three scalar equations of equilibrium, EF, = 0,2, = 0, EM, = 0, can be applied whea solving problems in two dimensions, since the geometry is casy fo visualize. For the most direet solution, ry to sum forces along an axis that will climfaate as many unknown forces as possible, Sum moments about a point O that passes through the line of action of as many unknown forces as possible. * Three Dimanstons, In three dimensions, jt is often advam!ageous to ue a Cartesian vector analysis when. applying the equations of equilibrium. To do this first express each known and unknown force and conple moment shown on the free-body diagram as e Cartesian vector. Then set the force summation equel to zero, BE = 0. Take moments about a point Q that les on the line of action of as many unknown force components as pessible. From point 0 direct position vectors to each force, and then ase the cress product, to determine the monteat of cach force. Requice BM, — Ey x F= 6, The six scalar equetions of equilibrium are established by setting the respective f, and k components of these force and moment stims equal to 2610. REVIEW PROBLEMS 591. The shaft aswerably is supported by two smooth 5°92, Determine the horianrtal and vertical jourad boarings and B anda short ink DC. Ifa couple components of reaction al tha pin and the react moment is applied to the shaft as shown, determine the the roller B required to supporttle truss Set F — 600N, components of forve reaction atthe bearirgsand he force in the link. The ink Tcsina plane paraflel tothe y-z plane ‘and the bearings ave properly aligned on the sha KR A | be Prob. £3 Peoby 5-92254. + CHAPTERS Equilibrium of a Rigid Body S43. ihe saller at B can sustain a maximum load of 3KN, determine the largest magritace ofeach ofthe three forces F that can be supported by the ‘russ. Prob. 5-03 594, Determine the normal eaction at the roller A and horizontal and vertical components at pin H tor equilibrium of the member. wow Pron, 98 595. The symmetica shelf ts subjected to a eniform load of 4 kPa. Support is provided by a bolt (or pin) located at cech end A and A’ and by the symmetrical brace arms, which bear agairst the smooth wall en both sides at 2 and BY, Determine the fores cesisted by each bolt at the wall and the normal force at B Cor equilibria, Prob 5-95 "5.96. Determine the x and z components of reaction at the journal bearing 4 and the tension in cords 2C anc BD necessary tor equilibria of the rod, F=f rab. 5-96597, Detexminc the reactions at the supports 4 aud 2 for equilibrium of the beam. WT ll 598 Determine the x,y, z components of reaction at the ball supports # ané Cand the ball-and-socket A (aot shown) for the aniformly loaded plate, 2am? Prob 598, $99. Determine the, s, x componen's of re fixed wall A. The 150-N force is parallel to che 2 axis and the 200-N force is parallel ta the y axis Reviny PROBLEMS + 255 ction at che 108 2008 Pea, 5-99 5-100, “The horizontal beara is supported by springs at its ends Ifthe stitiness ofthe spring at A is tq = SkN/m, determine the recuired stiffness of the spring at B so that ifthe beam is loaded with the 800. force, it remains in the horiroatal position hoth before and after loading. Prod, $400the forces within the members of ties wuss bridge must be determined if they are to he properly designed,CHAPTER Structural Analysis CHAPTER OBJECTIVES © 7o show how to determine the forces in the members of a truss using the method of joints and the method of sections. + To analyze the forces acting on the members of frarnes and machines composed of pin-connacted members. A cuss is structure composed of slender membeis joined together at their end points, Lae members commonly used in construction consist of wooden siuts or metal bars The joint coanections are usually formed by bolting er welding the ende ofthe mambers to « common plate,called a gasset place, asshown in Fig, 6-1, oF by simply passing a lage bolt or pin through ech of the members, Fig. 6-16, Fer 257258 CHAPTER 6 Structural Analysis: Planar Trusses. Plaver trusses lie ina single plane and are often used to support roofs and bridges. The truss ABCDE, shown in Fig, 6-2¢,is an ‘exaunple of a typical roof-mpporting truss In this figure, the roof load is transmitted to the t1uss,4¢ the jobuts by means of a series of puofins, such as DD" Since the imposed loading acts inthe same plane as the truss, Fig, 6-2b, the analysis of the forces developed in the tmuss mernbers is bwo- dimensional. Ta the case of a bridge, such as shown in Fig, 6-3, the load on the deck js fist transmitted to siringers, then lo floor beams, and finally to the joints B C, and D of the two supporting side trusses. Like the roof trasy, the bridge truss loading is also coplanar, Fig. 6-3. ‘When bridge or roof srustes extend over lange cistances, a rocker oF roller is commonly used for supporting one end, eg, joint Ein Figs. 62a and 6-32, This type of support ellows freedom for expansion or contraction of the members due to temperature or application of loads. Bridges o FyStevion 6.1 Simple Trusses = 259 Assumptions for Design. To design both the members and the connections of a truss it is first necessary to determine the force developed jn each member when the truss is subjected to a given toading. In this regard, two important assumptions will bo mede 1. All loadings ave applied at the Joluts. fa most situations, such as for bridge and roof trusses, this essumption is tre, Frequently in the force analysis the weight of the mentbers is neglected since the forces supported by the members are usually large n comparison T © with their weight, If the member's weight is to be fxciuded tn the analysis, itis generally satisfactory to apply it as a vertical force, half of ils magnitude applied at cach end of the member, 2. The members are joined together by snooth pins. Tn cases where bolted or welded joint connections are used, this assumption is satisfactory provided the center lines of the joining members are concurrent, a8 in Fig, 61a, Because of these two assumptions, each trese member acts as @ two- force member, ané therefore the forces al the ends of the member must be disected along the axis of the member, Ifthe force tends to elongate 1 jc the member, it is a tensile farce (T), Fig. 6a; whereas if i tends to stesion compressive shorten tho member, itis a compressive force (C), Fig, 6-Ab. In the actusl ‘O " dosign of a truss itis important to state whether she nature of the force is temsile oF compressive, Often, compression members musi be made thicker than tension membess becaute of the buckling or column effect Bec that occurs when a member is in compression. ‘Simple Truss. 7 prevent collapse, the form of a truss must be rigid. Obviously, the four-bar shape ABCD in Fig, 6-5 will collapse wnless a diagonal member, such 4s AC, is added for support. The simplest form thai is rigid or stable is a érlangle, Consequently, a siniple truss is construeted by starting with a basic triangular element, such as ABC in Fg. 6-6,and connecting two members (AD end BD) toform en additional element. As each additional element consisting of two members and @ joint s placed on the truss it fs possible to construct a simple truss Figs Fip6-6260 + CHAPTER 6 Structural Analysis 6.2 The Method of Joint: 2 s = Vy Thess Howe trusses are used to support the roof of the metal building. Note how the niembere come together ata commen point om the gusset plate and how theroofpurline Irengnit the lead to the joints, TT scan 43) L 0 In order to analyze or design a truss, we must obtain the forge in cach of its members. [f we were to consider a free-body diegram of the entire ‘russ, then the forees fa the members would be internal forces, atid they could not be obiained from an cquilfbriim analysis. Instead, if we consider the equilibriem of a joint of the truss thea a member force becomes an eviental force on the joint's free-body disgram, and the equations of equilibrium can be applied to obtein its magnitude, This forms the basis for the method of joints, Because the truss members are all straight two-foree members fying in the same plane, the force system acting at cach joint is explonar and concurrent, Consequently, rotational or moment equilibrium is antortatically satisfied at the joint (or pin), and ft is only necessary to satisly EF, — Oand BF, = 0 to cnsure cquitibriam. ‘When using the methed of joints itis first necessary to draw the joint’s free-body diagram before applying the equilibrium equations. To do this, recall that the fine of action of cach member force acting on the joint is Specified irom the geonieiry of the truss since the force in a member passes along the axis of the member, As an example, consider the pin al joint B of the truss in Fig, 6-7a. Three forces act on tae pin, namely, the S00-N force and the forces exerted by members KA and BC. The free: body diagram is shown in Fg. 6-7b. As shown, Fpa is “pulling” on the pia, which means thet member 2A Is in ension, whereas Facis “pushing” on the pin, snd consequently member 8C isin compression. These effects are clesrly demonstrsted by isolating the joint with small segments of the member connected to the pin, Fig, (7c, The pushing or pulling on these small segments indicates the eifect of the member being either in ‘compression or tension. Tn allcases,the analysis shiould start at a joint having at least onc known force ead at most two unknown forces, as in Hig, 6-7b. In this Way, application of EF, ~ 0 and EF, = 0 yields two algebraic equations which can be solved for the two unknowns When applying these equations, the correct sense of an unkeown member force can be determined using one of two possible methods: i 2 ios | SK teste Faytteason) pe (compression) © @+ Always arsume the ailasown mesnber forces acting on ihe joints free- body diagram to be tn tension, Le, “palling” on the pin, If this is done, then numericat solution of the equilibrium equations will yield positive sealars for members in tension ard negitive scalars for memnbersini compression, Once en unkaown member fore is fond, use is correct magnitude anc sense (T oF C)on subsequent joint free- borly diagrams, +The correct sense of direction of an unknoven member force can, in many cases be determined “by inspection.” For example, Fi: in Fig, 6-70 rust push on the pin (compression) since its horizontal component, Fac sin 45°, must balance the 500-N force (SF, = 0). Likewise, Faq is & tensile force cine it balances the vertical component, Fc cos 45° (ZF, = 0). In more complicated cases, the sense of an unknown member force can be assumed; then, after epplying the equilibrium equations, the asswuned scase can be verified from the aumerical results A positive answer indicates that the sense is comect, whereas a negadive answer indicstes that the sense shown ‘on the free-body diagram must be reversed. This it the method we will use ta the exemple problems which follow. PROCEDURE FOR ANALYSIS ‘The following procedure provides a typical means for analyzing a truss using the method of joints. * Draw the free-body dagram of a joint having at least one known force and at most two unknown forces. If this joint is at one of the suppor's, ther i: may be necessary to know the external reactions at the truss support.) ‘© Use one of the two methods desaribed above for establishing the sense of an unknown force, ‘+ Orient the x and y axes such thet the forces on the free-body diagram ean be easily resolved into their x and y components and then apply the two force equilibrium equations ZF, = 0 and ZF, = 0. Solve for the two unknown member forces and verity their correct sense, * Continue to analyze cach of the other joints, where again it is necessary to choose a joint having at macst two unknowns and at least onc known force, © Onve the force in a member is found from the analysis of ajoint st cone of its nds, the resull can be used to analyze the forces acting on the joint at its other end. Remember that a member ia compression “pushes” ox the joint and amember ia ienston pulls” 10 the joint Seenton 6.2. The Method of Joints + 26%262 + CHAPTER 6 Structural Analysis IS, e Fyg= SOON apt —> ry S008 Is, ® s00N soot igen . ' Nw q sot, ag ak goun tein soon VEO SONA Sin ON © ip 68 Determine the fore: in each member of the truss shown in Fig, 6-82 and indicate whether the members are in tension or compression, Solution By inspection of Fig. 6-Ra, there are two unknown member forces at 9¢ B, two unknown member forces and aa unknown reaction force ft join! C, and two known member forces and :WO unknown reaction forces at joint A. Since we should have no more than two ‘unknowns at the joint and et least one known force acting there, we will begin the analysis at joint 2 Jotnt B. “The fres-body diagram of the pin at 2 is showmn in Tig, 6 8. Applying the equations of joint equitibrium, we have SOON — Fag sin 45° = 0 Fag = 707.1 N(C) Ans Fac 845° — Fag =O Fing = SOON (T) Ane. Since the force in member BC hes been calculated, we con proceed 10 analyze joint Cin order to determine the force ia member CA and ‘the suppor: reaction at the rocker. Joint C. From the frce-body diagram of joint C, Fig, 6-8, we have AEA TO; Feat WL cos4S°N = 0 Fig 7 SOON (1) Ans +PER TO Cy- TTAsind°N=0 Cy=500N ans doit A, Although it is not necessary, we can determine the support resections at joint A using the results of Fey=S00N and 14 = SOON, From the free-body diagram, Fig, 6-8¢, we have AYE =0; SWN- A,=0 A,=500N +f24,-0; SOON dy=0 A, SOON ‘The resulth of the analysis are summarized in Fig, 6-8e. Note that the free-body diagram of each pin shows the effects of all the ‘connected arembers and external forces applied to the pin, whereas the free-body diagram of each member shows only the effecis of the end pins on the member.Seenan 6.2 The Method of Joints - 263 ‘Determine the forces acting in all the members of the truss showa in Fig 6 92. Solution By inspection, there are more than two unknowns at each joint, Consequently, the support reactions on the truss mast fsst be determined, Show that they have been correctly celculated on the free-hody diagram in Fig. 6-96, We can now begin the analysis at joint c Why? Joint €, From the free-body diagram, Fig. 6-9e, 2K, =o =Feacos 0° + Fegsinds? = 0 G LSKN + Fopsin 30° ~ Fey 000 45° ‘These two equations nust be solved sivtadfanecusty for each of the two unknowns, Noto, however, that a direct solution for one of the unknown forces may be obtained by apolyinga force summation along an axis that is perpendicular to the direction of the other unknown force. For exemple, summing forces slong the y' axis, which is perpendicular to the direction of Fep, Fig, 6-9d,yiekisa direct sotuiten for Fem, 4ABR, = 05 15 cos 0°KN ~ Fexsin 5° =0 Fey = SM2KN (C) Ans. In ¢ similar fashion,summing forces along the y” axis, Fig. 6-9, yields a direct solution for Fea. +ABFy = 0; 15 cos 45°KN — Fepsin1s°-0 Fen ~410KN (1) Ans Joint D. We can now proceed to analyze joint D. The free-body . [ diagram is shown in Fig. 6-9. va Saat —fyerth + 4wansAs=0 é | Foa=420RN (1) Aus 435, =O: Fos ~ 2{410sin30°KN) = 0 Fa = 410KN (1) Ave. “The force in the last member, HA, can be obtained from joint Bor joint A. Asan exercise, draw the free-body diagram of joint B, sum the forers in the horizontal direction, and show that Fy4 = 0.775 KN (C).264 - CHAPTER 6 Structural Analy e Determine the force in each member of the truss shown in Fig. 6-100. Indicate whether the members are in lension or compression. Solution Support Reactions, No joint can be analyzed until the support reactions arc dstermined, Why? A frec-body diagram of the entire truss is given in Fig. 6-10b. Applying the equations of equilibrium, we have bER,—0, 600N-C,~0 C,~600N [+3Mc= 0; —A,(6.m) + 400 NG m) + 600 Nid my) Ay = 600N 4f25-0 GON-400N-G~0 C,~200N ‘The analysis can now start at either joint A or C:The choice is arbitrary since (here are one known and two unknown memter forees acting om tie pin at cach of these joints, soint A (Fig, 6-10e).. As shown on the free-body diagram, there are three forcessthet act on the pin at joint A.‘The inclination of Fay ia ctermined from the geometry of the truss By inspection, can yor why this force is assumed (o becumpressive and Fp tensile? Appl the equations of equilibrium, we have SPER ~ 0; 6OON-FFywe—O Fyg~ 750N (C) Ans. AYE =o Fyp~ ISON) =0 Ryyp=4SON (T}) AnsSectinm 6.2 The Method of Joints + 255 Joint B (Fig. 6-104). The pin at this joint is chosen next since, by inspection of Hig. 6-10a, the fore in AD is known aad the uaknown forces in DB and DC cen be determined, Summing forees in the horizontel direction, Fig. 6-101, we have BER, = 0, —450N +3 Fy + GOON =O Fog = -250N ‘The negative sign indicates that Fpp acts in the opposite sense to that shown in Fig. 6-10d*. Hence, Foy =250N (T) Ans, ‘To determine Fc, we can either correct the sease af Fpp and then apply 2A, = 0, or apply this equation and retain the negative sign for Fow ies 442F,=0; Foc HK 250N)-0 Foe = 200N (C) Ans. Joint € (Hig. 6-1e), ASE = 0; og - 600N Fee= 600N (0) Ans. +125, = 0; 200N—200N=0 check} ‘The analysis is summarized in Fig. 6-L0f, which shows the correct free- body diagram for each pin and member. (er 200 a Tension 00x The proper sone could have bees determined by inpection, prior to applying BA A0 i sf —— won 2 aon @ 00 —_ F< SON. fo ®266 + CHAPTER 6 Structural Analysis 6.3 Zero-Force Members ‘Tivss analysis using the method of joints is greatly simplified if one is first abe to determine those members which Support ito loading. nese zera-force members are used to increase the stability of the trass during construction aud to provide support it the applied Toading is changed. ‘The zero-foree meinters of a truss cau generally be deterntined by inspestion of each of its joints. For example, envsider the truss shown ia Fig 6-11e. If a free-body diagram of the pin at joint A is drawa, Fig. 6-106, it's seen that menibers AB and AF are zero-foree members. On the other hand, notice that we could not have come to this concision if wchadconsidered the free-body diagrams of joints F or 2 simply because there are five unknowns at each of these joints. In a similar manner, consider the iree-body diagram of joint D, Fig. 6-L1c. Here again it is seen that DCand DE are zero-forcé members. As a general rule, if only ‘two members form « truss joint and no external toad or support reaction is applied te the joint, the members must be tero-force members The load on the truss in Fig, 6-1¢ is therefore supported by only five members as shown in Rg 6-114. ) l. " | at Fa FNZF, 26, Foesn 920; Foe =Ostneesn920, FORE HO, Fog 0205 Fog 29 © BaF .=65 Fd HSRC Fay ~« o Fig 1Stenou 6,3 ZeroForce Members - 267 Now considor the truss sliown in Fig. 6-124, The free-bodly diagram of the pin at joint D Is shown in Fig, 6-120, By ottenting the y axis along members DC and DE and the x axis along member DA, it is seen that ‘DA is a.z2r0-foreo member. Note that this is also the cate for member CA, Fig 6-120 In general, if three mentbers form a truss join for which two of the members cre coltneay he third memberis.a zero force member provided uo extemal force or support reaction is applied to the joint. Tho truss shown In Fig, 6-I2¢ 1s therefore suitable for supporting the load P. fm oN x y ETF aO Fy 30 HYIK =O Foc * Fae ® @ Fea = Ocineetia 00; @ rig 613268 + CHAPTER 6 Structural Analysis: Fo FO Pre @ ae he ae \ ® ae Exc —— sr Fan Baie oO Using the method of joints, determine alf the zero-force members of the Fink roof iiss shown tn Fig. 6-13e. Assume all joints are pin connected. Look for joint geometries that have thes members for which two are collinear. We have Job G (Tig, 6-136). HBB =O Fac =O Ans. Realize thet we could not conchule that GC is 2 zero-fons member by cousidering joint C, where there axe five unkaowas The fact that GC is a zero-force member means that the 5-KN load at C must be supported by members CB, CH, CF, snd CD. Joint f) (Big. 6-13c). +V3R=0; Foe =0 Ans, Loita P (Fig, 6-134). +12R = 0; Fectosd=0 Sime # 908, Fee =O Ans Note thar it joint B is analyzed, Fig, 6-13¢, ANZE, 20; TEN = Fay = 0 Foy =2KN (C) Note that Fye must satisfy EF, ~ 0, Fig. 6-13f, and therefore HC is not a zero-force memberPromiens + 260 PROBLEMS GA, Determine the foree in each member of the trust tnd state if the members ate in teusionjor compression. ‘Set #y = BOO KN and Fy = 400 XN. 6-2, Determine the force on each member of {ne ts and sfate if the members aze in {ension or compression. Set Py = SOOKN and Py = 100 kN. Pe Probs 6-12 63, The (ass, wed to euppext a balcony is subjected to the loading shown. Approximate each joint as @ pin ard determine the force in each member. State whether the members are in tension or compression Set P, = 600KN, = 400KN. +64, ‘The trace, ued to aupport a balcony is aubjected (0 the loscing shown. Approximate each folnt as a pin and determine (he force in each member, State whether the members ate in tension or compression. Set Py > S00KN, P; = 0. 65. Dejermine the force in cach member of the ieuss and slate ff the members are in tensfon or compressicn. ‘Assame each joint as a pin. Set P = 4kN. 64, Assume that each member of the truss is made of stoel having a mass por length of 4 kpfm. Set P determine the force fn each member, and indicate if the member. are m tension or compression. Neglect the ‘weight of the gusset plates and assume each joint isa pio. Solte the problem by actwming the weight of cach member can be reprasoated as a vortica? force, half of which is applied wt the end of cach member, Prot. 616 67, Determine the force in each member of the truss and state iF the members axe In tension or compression. aw ton an avg = f270 CHAPTER 6 Structural Analysis "68. Determine the farce in each member of the truss and state ifthe members are in tension or compression. ‘Set Fy = 2KN and B= 1.5KN. 69. Determine the force in each member of the uss and state if the members are in tension of compression. Set = P= Au, 6-10, Determine the foree in each member of the truss ard atate if the membere are in tension or compression. Set Py = 0,F, = 1O0-KN, G11, Deteraine the force in each member of the russ ard state if the members arc in tension or compression. Set Py = SO EN, P, = 150 KN, 6-12. Determine the force incach member of the truss and state if the mlembers are tn tension or compression. ‘Set A= 1OKN, 4 = ISKN. 6-13. Determine the force in each member of the truss and state if the riembers are in tension or compression. Sot Fy = 0, Ay ~ 20kN. robs, 62013 614. Determine the force in each member of the truss and state if the members are in tension or compression, Sct Pj = JOKN, Py = 20 KN, 73 = 30KN. GAS. Devermine the farce in each member of the truss and state if the members are in tension or compression. Set P; = 40 KN, Pp = 40 KN, Ps = 0. Probs 6-4x16, Detouvine the fore in cash montber ofthe truss ‘State whether the membersarc in feision or compression, Set P= BRN. 6-47, Ifthe mazimuon force that any member can support fe 8 ENin tension und 6KN in compression, determine the ‘xin foree P that can be supported at joint D. Frots 6-161? G18. Determine the force fa each member of the wrnssand state if the members are in tension or compression. df: ‘The horizontal faree component at A must be-220 Why? cow fom n - tp lo a a Preb. 6.38 619, Determine the Gores in each memiver of the truss aa slate the members ace in teasion or compression, fa The resultant force at the pin E acts along member ZD. Why? 962), Each member of the truss is uniform and has a mass (O88 kgm. Remove the external loads of3 EN and 2 EN and determine the approximate foces in each momber duo 10 the weight of the truss Stile ifthe members ure in tension ‘or eampresson, Sve the prablem by aswuming the sveight ferch member can be represenied as a verticrl force, half Cf wich is applied at each end of the member. robs. $1970 G21. Detemmine the force in each member of the truss jn terms of the external loading and state if the members fare in tension ar compression, 622, ‘The maximum allowable tensile force inthe members of he ttt t (Fac = 2N, andthe xian lovable compresive “force 18 (Pejmn = ADKN. Determine the maximum magnitude ?of the iro loads that cau be applied tothe uss Take L'= 2m and = 30° Prods, 62022 623. Delormine the forea in onch momber of the trusn and state if the members are in tension or compression. Pred 6-23272 + CHAPTERS Structural Analysis "624, Determine the force in each member of the double seissars-truss ia terms of the Joad ? and state if the members are in tension or compression. zB 5 rs Y F Prob. 6-24 625. Determine the force ineach member ofthe truss and slate if tho members are in teasiou or compression. Miu: ‘The venticalcompenentof force al Csmust equatzera Why? 626, Lach momber of the trussis uniform and hasa mass of 8 kg/m. Remove the exlerzal loads of 6 KIN and 8 EN and determine the approximate force in each member due to the weight of the tru, State f the members are in tension or compression, Solve the problem by assuming ‘the weight of each member can be represented as a vertical ree, bal of which is applied at each end of the member. 8 4 . 20 2, a Lsm——y a J y on Y aay Pou, 628726 627. Determine the fores in cach member of the (russ 4n terms ofthe load P,and indicate whether the members are in tensioa or compression. 6-28, If the muximum fowe that any member can support is 4 EN in tension and 3 kN in compression Aotermine the maximus force P that can be supperied at poiat B.Take d= im, rer Peobs. 6 2728 6-29, ‘The two member trust is subjected to the force ‘of 300 KN. Determine the range of @ for application of the foad so thal the force in either member does cot exceed 406 KN (1) o 200 KN (C). Prab.6-28Stenion 6.4 The Method of Sections + 273 6.4 The Method of Sections ‘The method of sections is used 1o determine the londings acting within a body. It is based on the principle that if bedy is in equilibrium then any part of the body is also in equilibrium, For example, canfsider the “yo truss members shown on the left in Fig. 6-14, If the forces within the members are to be detevmined, then an imaginary section indicated ty the blue line, can be used to cut each member into two parts and thereby “expose” each internal force ss “extemal” 10 the free-body diagrams shown on the right. Cleaily, It can be seen that equilibiium requires that the member in tension (1) be subjected to a “pul.” whereas the member in compression (C) is subjected to = “push.” ‘The method of sections can also be used to “cut” or section the members of an entize truss If the section passes through the truss and the free- body diagram of either of its two parts is drawn, we can then apply the equations of equilibrium to that part to determine the member forces at the “eur section.” Since only three independent equilibrium equations (ZF, = 0, BF, = 0, 5Mp = 0) can be applied to the isolated part of the uss, iy {0 select a section that, in general, passes through not more than three members in which the forces are uaknovwn, For example, consider the truss in Fig. 6-15e. If the force in member GC is to be determined, section aa would be appropriate. The free-body diagrams of the two parts ave shown in Digs 6-15b and 6-15c. In particular, note that the line of aotion of ench member force is specified from the geomeiry of the truss, since the force ina member passes along its axis Also, the member forces acting on owe part of the (cuss are equal but opposite to those acting on the other part—Newton’s third law. As noted above, members assumed fo be in tension (BC and GO) axe subjected to a “pully” whereas the member in compression (GF) is subjected to a “push.” Tera compresiie forres "onmenioe u | ig. 614274 + CHAPTER Structural Analysis ‘The three unknown member forces Fae, Fog, ad Vr can be obtained by applying the three equilibrium cquztions to the free-body diagram in Fig. 6-156. If however, the free-body diagram in Fig, 6-1Se is considered, the three support reactions D,,.D, and E, will have to be ceteumincd first, Why? (This, of course, is done ia the usual manner by considering ‘a free-body dlagram of the entire truss) ‘When applying the equilisrinm equations, one should consider ways of writing the equations so as to yield a direct solvtion for each of the unknowns, rather than having to solve simultaneous equations. For ‘example, summing moments about C in Fig. 6-15b would yield a direct solution for For since Fae and Foe create zero moment about C. Likewise, Rgc can be directly obtained by cumming moments about G. Finally, Jfg¢ can be found directly from # force summation in the vertical direction since Kop and Bye have no vertical components This ability to “Do Prat uses ae tied to comstivel his delarnine diracily the forse in a particulac tross member is one of the ppecestctan ridge main advantages of sing the method of sections." "Dy comparion, 1 the method of joints wore used to detenning mys the lovee fa mgiabes GC, it would be necessary to analyze joints A,B. and Gia sequence.Secnow 6.4 The Method of Sections + 275 As in the method of joints there are ‘wo ways in which one cen determine the correct sense of an unknown member force: + Always assvine that the unknown member forces at the cut section are in tetsioa, i.e, “pulling” on the member. By doing Shis, the numerical solution of the equilisrium equations will yield positive Scatars for members in tension and regattve scalars for niennbers it compression. + The correct sense of an unknownmember forcecan in many cases be determined “by inspection." For example, Fac is a tensile force as represented in Fig, 6-156 since moment equilibriam about @ requires that Fye create a moment opposite to that of the 1000-N foree. Also, Foo is tensile since its vertical component must balance the 1000-N force which acts downward. In more complicated eases, the sense of an unknown member force may be asstewer. If the solution yields a ‘negative scelar, it indicates that the force’s sense is opposite to that shown on the free-body diegram. Thisis the method we will we in the exemple problems which follow. PROCEDURE FOR ANALYSIS ‘The forces in the members of @ truss may be determined by the method of sections using the following procedure, Free-Body Diagram * Make a decision as to how tout” orsection the truss through the memiers where forces are to be determined. + Before isolating the appropriate a:ction, It may frst be necessary to cetermine the ‘russ's externa! reactions. ‘Then three equitforium equationsate available to solve for member forces atthe catsection. * Draw the free-body diagram of that part of the sectioned truss which has the least number of forces acting on it ‘+ Use one of the 10 methods described above for establishing the sense of an unknown member force, Equations of Equilibrian © Momentsshouldbe summed about a point that les atthe intersection of the lines of action of iwo uoknowa forces, 60 that the third unknown foree is determined directty from the moment equatton, + TEtwo of the unknown forces are paraitel, forces may be summed Perpendicutar to the direction of these unknowas to determine direcily the third unknown force.296 - CHAPTER 6 Structural Analysis ia Determine the force in members GE, GC, and BCof the truss shown in Fig. 6160, Indicate whether the members are in tension or compression, Solution Section ae in Fig. §-162 hae been chosea since it cats through the three members whose forces are to be determined. In order to use the method of sections, however, it is first necessary to determine the external reactions at A or D. Why? A free-body diagram of the entire truss Is shown in Fig, 6-168. Applying the equations of equilibrium, we have AER =O; 4ON- Ay=0 Ay= ON (+EM@4— 0; 1200 (8m) — 400 N(3-m) + D,(12m) D,= 90N 1T2R, = 0, A,— }200N + 90ON = Ay = 300N sree-Body Diagram. ‘The free-body diagram of the lett portion of the sectioned truss is shown in Fig, 6-1éc, Por the analysis this diageam will be used since it involves the keast number of forces. Eqnetions of Rquilibriam. Summing moments about point G climinates Fog and Fgc and yields ¢ iret solution for Fc. [+EMg = 0: —300N(4m) ~ d00N(3 m9) + Fac(3 m) Fac = 800N. (T) Ars. Jn the same manner, by summing moments about point C we obtain a direct solution for Kae. (t2Me = 0; -300N(8m) + Foe(3m) Foz = 800N (C) Ans Since Fy¢ and Fog have no vertical components, summing forees in the y direction directly yields Fc, ie, 4fSF, =O 300N - Pp = 0 i Hoe =S00N (2) Ans. A$ an cxercise, oblain these results by applying the equations of equilibriam 10 the free-body diagram of the right portion of the sectionod frurs.*Srcniow 6.4 The Method of Sections - 277 6-17e, Tadicate whether the member is in tension or compression. Assume each member {s pim-comnected. Se 3254 Wig 6.47 Solution Free-Beds Blugrasn, Section aa in Fig, 6-L7a wil be esed since this section wilt “expose” the intemal force in member CF as “external” ‘on the free-body diagram of either the right or felt portion of the truss. Its first necessary, however, to determine the extemal reactions ‘on either the left or right side. Verify the results shown on the free- body diagram in Fig, 6-17. “The free-body diagram of the tight portion of the truss, whlch ls the easiest to analyze, is shown in Fig. 6-17c. There are three unknowns, Foo, Fees and Feo. Equations of Bquitibrtesn, The most direct metliod for solving this problem requires application of the moment equation about a point that eliminates two of the unknown forees. Henes, to obtain Fp, we will eliminate Fro and ep by summing moments about point 0, Fg. 6-17e. Note thatthe location of point O measured from is determined from proportional triangles, ie., 4/(4 + x} ~ 6/(8 + x).x = 4m. On, stated in another manner, the slope of member GF has a drop of 2m to 2 horizontal distance of 4 m, Since FD is 4m, Fie. (-17c, then from D to O the distance must be 8m. An easy way to determine the moment of For about potat O is to Uusethe principle of transmissibility and move Fy to point C,and then resolve Fep inte its two rectangular components, We have Lt EM = 0; —Fep sin A5°(12 m) + (3 KN)(8m} — (4.75 KNY4 mn) = 0 Fer = 0.589KN (C) Aus ¥ sin o ants Y aN 475k278 + 10%0N CHAPTER 6 Structural Analysis Determine the force in member EB of the roof truss shown in Vig. 18. Indicate whether themember isin tension or compression. Solution FreeBody Hiingeams, By the method of sections, any imaginary settical section that cuts through EB, Fig. 6-164, will also have to cut through three other members for which the forces are unknown. For example section az cu's through EP, EB, FB,and AB. Tf thecomponents ‘freaction at A are calculated first (Ay ~ 0, A, ~ 4000N) and a free- ody diagram af the left side of zhis section ts Considered, Ig, 6-186, i 4s possible fo abtain Fp by summing moments abqut B to eliminate the other three unknowns; kowevor, Fx camot bo detormined from the remaining two equifibum equations. One possible way of obtaining Fs ks first to determine Fzp from section ae, then use this resuit on section 86, Tig, 6-18c, which fs shown in Fig. 6-18c. Hero the force system is concurrent and our sectioned free-boly diagram is the same asthe free- body dingram for the pin at E (method of joints). Pap ~ 3060.8 Fe @ jeations of Equilitstem. In ordex to determine the moment of Fgp about point B, Fig. 6-186, we will resolve the force into its rectangular components and, by the principle of transmissibility, extend it to point C as shown. The moments of 1000 N, Fas, Fray Feo. anil Fgp cas 30° axe all zero about 3. Therefore, |+2M@y = 0; 1000 N(4m) + 3000 N@2 m} ~ 4900 N(4 mn) + Fp sin 30°(4) 0 Fep = 3000N (C) Consldbzing now the fiee-bady diagram of section bb, Fig. 6-186, webne b3r, ep c0s30° ~ 3000 03 30° N = 0 Fer = H00N (C) 0;2(3000 sia 30°) ~ 1000.N ~ Fp _ee = 2000N_(T) HTK, Ans,Peosicns + 279 PROBLEMS 6-30, Determine the force in members BG, HC, aud HE of the bridge russ and indicate whether thé members are in tension ar compression. pam ms my me bn ABN Prob, 6-30, G31. Determine the force in members GF CP, and CD of the bridge truss and indieate whether the members are in teaston oF compression # a F wen Prob 6-34 632 Determine the force in members DE,DF,and GF of the cantilevered truss ond ciate if the members are in ‘eusion or compression, Prob, 6-32 G33 The soof uuss supporis the vertical foading shown. Determine the force in members BG CK, and KY aod state if thee members ar in tension or ‘comprestion. aN Pak 6-3 6-34. Determine the force in members CH, CF, KT, and DI of the truss which serves to support the deck of a bridge, State If these mesbers are in tension cr compression 6.35. Determine the force in members EF and JE of the truss wich serves to support the deck of a bridge. State if these members are in tension or comprossion.280 + CHAPTER Structural Analysis $636. Determine the fores in members BG, CG, and GF of tie Warren «russ. Indicate if the members ase in tension of compression. 637. Determine the force In members CD, CF, and FG of the Warren tnass. Indicate ifthe members ars in tension ( comprostion. dig 3m om a mn ate Probe 630001 G38. Determine the force developed in members GB and GF of he bridge truss and state if these members are in tension or compression, pote S7 23 186-39. The tvss supports the vertical load of 600 N. Determine the force in members BC, BG, and HG as the dimension Z varies Plot the results of F (ordinate with tensien as positive) versus E. (abscissa) for = L == 3m, 00x "6-40. Determine the force in members IC and CG ot the truss and state if these members are in temsicn or compression. Also, indicate all vero.foroe members. G41, Detonmine the force in members JEand GF of the truss and state if these members are in tention ar compression. Also, indicate all zeroxforce memabecs, Prob, 628 GIN GIN Probe, ANH642. Determine the forcoinmembers BG HC,and HG, After the truss is sectioned vse a single equation of cequifbrivu for the cakulatior of each force State i these members st in tension or compression. 643, Determine the force in members CD, CF and CG and state ifthese mombors are in tension or compression, Peabs. 6-423 G84. Detemlne the foro: in members Gi FB, and BC of the Flic truss and state the members ate in tension or compression. Proms + 284 64S, Dotormine the foree in momber GY of the truss and state if this member is in. tension ar compression, 646 Determine the force in member GC of the wuss and state If thls member is in tension or compression. Prob, 6-48145 6-1. Determine tke force ln members GE CF,and CD Of the roof truss and indicate if the smembets are_ in fension or compression,282 + CHAPTERS Structural Analysis °648. Determin: the force in members BG, HG, and BC of the (cuss znd state if the members are in tenslon oF compression, Thx m4 @3 9 Prob. 68, GAD, Tho skewod truss curios tho load shown, Determine the foree in members CB, BE, and EF and slate if ttese members are in tension or compression. ‘Assume that al joints are pinned. 6-50, The skewed truss carries the load shown, Determine the force in members AB BF, and EF and state if these members are in teasioz or compression. ‘Assume that all fins are pinned. 65%, Deteumine the faree in meuibers CD and CM of the Aaliimore bridge truss and state if the members are in tension or compression. Alto, iedicate all zero-force embers 46.52. Determine the force in members EA EP, and LK of tie Baltiowore bridge muss and sate ifthe members ace ja tension or compression. Also, indicate all zero-farce members, (gn,8@2m Probr. 51/52 6-53. Determines the forer in members Kh NU, ND, und ‘CDof the K trass, Indicate if the membersare in tension cor compression. Hin: Use sections aa ancl bh 654, Determine the force In members JT and DE of the K muss, Indicate & the members are in tension at compression Probe, 6-544Secrion 6.5 Space Truses + 283 +6.5 Space Trusses A space truss consists of members joined together at their ends to form a stable three-dimensional structure. The simplest element of a space tuuss is a fetrahedron, formed by connecting six members together, as shown ia Fig, 19. Any additional members added to this basic element ‘would be redundant in supporting the foice P, A staple space srars can ‘be built from this basic tetrehedral element by adding tlie additional members and a joint, forming a system of multiconnected tetrahedrons. Assumptions for Design, ‘The members of a space truss may be tweeted as two-force members provided the external loading is applied at the joints and the joints consist of ball-znd-socket connections These assumptions ace justified if :he welded or bolted conrections of the joined membeds intersect at acommon point and the weight of the members can be neglected, In cases where the weight of a member is to be included in the analyss,it is generally saticfactory to apply it as a vertical force, half of ts magnitude applied at each end of the membes. PROCEDURE FOR ANALYSIS ‘Hither the method of joints or the method of sections cam be used to determine the forces developed in the membersof asimple space truss, Method of Joints. Generally, if the forces in olf the membecs of the truss must be determined, the method of joints is most suitable for the analysis. ‘When using the method of joints, «Is necessary to solve the three sealar equilibrium equations 2%, = 0, EF, = 0, EF, = 0 at exch joint. The soluden of many simultaneous equationa can be avoided if the force analysis begins at a joint having et least one known force andat most three unknown forces. if the three-dimensional geometry of the force system at the joint is hard to visualize, itis recommended that a Cartesian vector analysis be used for the solution, Method of Sections. ‘tonly a ew member forces are to be detemmined, the method of sections may be used, When an imaginary section is passed through a truss and the truss is separated into two pars, the force system acting on one of the parts must satisfy the sir soalar equilibrium equations: ZF, = 0, EF, = 0, BF, =0, BM, =0, EM, = 0, EM, = 0 Fas 5-6). By proper cheice ofthe section and axes for summing forcesandmoracats, marly of the unknown memnber forces ina space truss can be computed directly, using a single equiFbrium equation, Hig. 6.9 ‘Typical _roof-supporting space tease Notice the use of ball-ond- sceket join’ for the eonnestlonsCHAPTER 6 Steuetural Analysis Determine the forces acting in the members of the space truss shown in Fig, 6-200, Indicate whether the members are in tension or compression. Solution Since there are one known force snd three unknown forces acting at joint A, the force analysis of the truss will begin at this joint, Joint A (Fig, 6-208). Expressing each foree that acts on the free- body diagram of joi 4 in vector notation, we havo Pom [-GEEN, Baa = Fanls Rac = Fuck Eas = Fao 2) = Fye(OSTH + 0.577] - 0577) For equilibrium, 2E=0; P+ Rpt Fact hye 20 fj + Fagj ~ Fack + OS77Egg5 + OSTIF ap] ~ OSTIFggk = 0 OSTIRg, = 0 <4 + Fay + OSTIF ge = 0 Fac — OST Fag = 0 Fue = Fae = 0 Ans. Fap = 40N (T) Ans. Since F4g is known, joint B may be analyzed next, Joint B (Fig. 6-206). Rg cos 45° + 0.707Fgp = 0 44 Rosin 45* = 0 2+ Foy - 0.101Fox = 0 Ry = Foe S00KN (1), Aap = ZEN (Ch Ans, ‘The scalar equations of equilibrium may also be applied directly to the force systems oa ihe free-body diagrams of joints D and C since the force components are easily determined. Show that Fae = Foo = Fes Ans.Premusnee + 285 ROBLEMS 655. Determine the force in each member of the three: member spare trust that supports the fading of 1000 Tb ‘and sale if the members are in tension or Compression, Prob 6-88 46-56. Determine the foree in esch member ofthe space uss and stale if the members are in tension oF compression. Hints The support reaction at Z acts along member EB. Why? om 657. Deremnine the force ia each member of the space (wuss and sane i the membersare in tension or compression. ‘The tuss is supported by rollers at A, Band C. Prk 57 6-58. Tho space truss is supported by a balhand-sacket pint at D and suort links at C and £. Determine the foree in each member and state # the menabers are in tension or compression. Take Fy = (—S00k] KN and F, « (4009) EN. 6-50. The space tsuss is suppotied by 2 ball-and.socket Jolac at D ond short Finks at C and F, Detemnizt the foros in cach member and sute if the members are in tension. or compression. Take F, = (2008 + 300] — 500K] kN and. Fe = OK KN. R Prob 65859286 CHAPTER 6 Structural Analysis 60% Dewnmiac the fore in each member of the space trussand stateif the merabers are th tension or comgression, ‘The truss is supported by a bellandcocket joints at A 2, and E Set F = (2001+ 400j} N. Hinr ‘The support reaction at Z acts sloug member C:Why? (aky en AMET prota g-s203 96.64, Determine the forse developed in each member Of the space trussand state if the members aré in texsion (or compression. ‘The crate has a weight of 130 KN Frov. 60 661, Determine the foree in exch member of the space tree and state ‘F the members ar in tension ot compression, The tris is tupported by ballad torkst Joint 2€ G D, Band G. oh, 4d 6468, ‘he space truss is used 10 support vertical forces atjoints 4, C,aud D. Determine the force ineach member and state if the members ere fn tension oF compeession. Prob (4 6-62. Determine the force in members BF, DF, and BC ofthe space truss and state ifthe members are in tension. ‘ comptestion. 6:63. Determine the force in members AB,CD, ED, and GF of the space truss and state if the members are in veasion or compressionSection 6.5 Frames ard Machines - 287 6.6 Frames and Machines Frames and machines are two common types of structures which are often composed of pin-connected nuttforce members, ie.,mveinbers that are subjected to more than two forces. Frames are generally stationary and are used to support loads, whereas mechines contzin moving parts and are designed 10 tausinl and alter the effec! of forces. Provided a frame or machine is properly constrained and contains no more supports ‘or members than are necessary to prevent collapse, the Forces ceting at ‘he joints and supports can be determined by applying the equations of equilibrium to each member. Once the forces at the joints are obtained, {tis then possible to decign the size of the members, connections, and supports using the theory of mechanics of materials and an appropriate engineering design code. Free-Body Diagrams, In order to determine the forces acting at the joints and supports of « frame or machine, the structure must be disesscmbled and the free-body diagrams ofits pacts must be drawn. The {following important points »ust be observed: + Isolate each part by drewing its outtined shape. Then show ell the forces and/or couple moments that act on the pact. Make sure to lebel ‘or identify each known and unknown force and couple moment with reference to an established x, ycoordinate system, Also, indicate ary dimensions used for whing moments, Most often the equations of equilibrinsn are casier to apply if the forces are represented by their rectangular components As tial, the sense of an unknown force or couple moment ean be assumed, + Identify all the two-foree members in the structure and represent their free-body diagrams as having Wwo equal but opposite collinear forces acting at their points of application. (See Sec. 5.4.) By recognizing the twoforee members, we can avoid solving, an ‘unnecessary number of equilibrium equations. + Forces common to any two contacting members act with equal magnitudes but opposite sense on the respective members. [the 10 membersare treated es a “syste” of connected menabers, hen these forces are “iatemal” and are not shown on the jree-body diagram of the system; however, if the {ree-body diagram of each member is drawn, the forces are “external” and mut be shown on each of the free-body diagrams. ‘The following examples graphically ilustrate application of the: points in drawing the free-body diagrams of a dismembered frame or machine. In all cases, the weight of the members is neglected,CHAPTER 6 Structural Analysis 28 + % menber AB fixie oathepin © Ro? | Y ‘ bal Ve, | i For the frame shown in Fig. 6-21a, draw the free-body diagram of (3) each member, (b) the pin at B, and (¢) the two members commected together. r Solutton Part (a), By inspection, member BA and BC are not two-foree members Instead, as shown on the free-body ciagrams, Fig. 6-21, BC is subjected to noi five but due forces, namely. the resultant force from pins B and C and the exteraal force P. Likewise, ABs subjected to the resutaneforces from the pins at A and B and the external couple moment M. Part (@). Tt can beseen in Fig 6-21a that the pin at B is subjected to only 100 forces, the force. of member BC an the pin and the foree of member AB on the pin. For equilibria these forces ard therefore their respective components must be equal but opposite, Fig, 6-Zle. Notice carefully how Newton's third law is applied between the pin and its contacting members ic,, the effect of the pin on the two members, Fig, 6210, and the equal butopposte effector me two members on dhepin, ¥ig. 6 21e. Albo nove that B, and B,, showa equal but opposite in Fig. 6-21b on members AB and BC, isnot the effect of Newton's thitd law; instead, this results from the equibriunt analysis of the pin, Fg. $21c. Part (et, ‘The free-body diagram of both members connected together, yet removed from the supporting pins atA and C, is shown in Fig. 6-21d.The foyce components By and B, are rot shown on this diagram since they formequeal but opposite collinear pairs of interna! forces (Fig. 6-210) and. therefore cancel out. Also, to be consistent when later applying the equilibrinm equations, the tnknown force components at A and C mast actin the senae sense as those shown in ig.6 210. Here the couple momeitt Mcan be applied at any point on the frame in order to determine the reactions at A and C.Nole, howerer, thet it mst act on member AB in Fig. 6-210 and not on member BC.A constant tension in the conveyor belt is meintained by using the device stiown in Fig. 6-220. Draw the frec-body diagtams of the frame and the cylinder which supports the belt. The suspended block es # weight of WY. Solution ‘The idealized model of the device is shown in Fig, 6-22b, Here the angle @ is assumed fo be known. Notice that the tension in the belt is the same on each side of the cytinder, since the cylinder is free toturn, From this model, the free-body diagrams of the frame and jlinder are shown in Figs 6-22e and 6-224, respectively. Note that the foros that the pin at B exerts on the gylinder can be represented by either its horizontal and vertical components B, and B,, which can be determined by using the force equations of equilibriim applied to the gflinder, or by the two components 7, which provide equal but opposite couple moments on the eyfnder and thus keep it from turning, Also, realize that once the pin reactions at A have been determined, half of their values act on each side of the frame since pin connections oscar on each side, Fig. 6-220, * Secon 66 Frames and Machines = 289290 + CHAPTER 6 Structural Analysis Draw the free-body dingram of each part of the smooth piston and link rechatisat used (0 crush recycled cans, whicl is shown in Fig. 6-238, FL goon Solution Ry inspection, member A is a twofarce member, The free-body Glagrams of tic parts are shown in Fig, 6-238. Since the pins at Bard D connect only two parts together, tie forces there are shown as equal ‘but opposite on the separate free-body diagrams of their connected members, In particular, four componenis of force act on the piston: D, and D, represent the effect of the pin (or lever EBD), N,, is the resultant force of the floor, and P is the resultant compressive force caused by the can C.Seen Se ae Oe Tor the fame show in Bi 6 24, draw the fret body diagrams of (a) the entire frame including the pulleys and cords, (b) the orame | without the pulleys and cords, and (c)'each of the pulleys. 66 Frames and Machines + 207 Soludon Pont {o). When the extite frame iachiding the pulleys and cords is ‘considered, the Interactions at the points where the pulleys and cokds are ‘connected to the frame become pairs of internal forces which cance! cach other and therefore are not shown om the free-body diagram, Fig. 624b. Fatt (b). When the cords and pulleys are removed, their effect on the frame must be shown, Fig, 6-24e. | Peat (6. The force components B..B,.C,.€, of the pins on the | pulleys, Fig. 6-244, are equal but apposite to the force components exerted by the pins on the frame, Fig. 6-24. Why? . aN A ay @ Hg.2 CHAPTER 6 Structural Analysis Fig 625 Draw the free-body diagrams of the bucket and the verticel boom of the back hoe shown in the photo, Fig, 6-252. The bucket and ks contents have @ weight W. Neglect the weight of the members. Solution “The idealized mode! of the assembly is shown in Fig, 6-250, Not shown are the requiced dimensions and angles that must be obtained, along ‘vith the location of the center of gravity G of the load. By inspeotion, members AB, BC, BE, and HE are all two-foree members since they are pinconnected at theirend points and no other forves act on them. ‘The free-body diagrams of the backet and the boom are shown in Fig. 6-25, Note that plu C is subjected to only two forces, the force of link BC and the force ov the boom, For equilibrium, taese forees must bbe equat in magnitude but opposite in direction, Fig. 6 25d."The pin at B is subjected (0 three forces, Fig. 6-25e. The force Tyg fs caused by the hydraulic cylinder, and the forees Fp and Fre are caused by the Finks. These three feroas are related by the two cquatioas of force equiibctum applicd to the pin.Before proceeding, tt is recommended t0 Cover the solutions to the ‘previous exernples and auempt o craw the requested free-body diagrams. When doing so, make sure the work is neat and that all the forces and couple moments are properly labeled. Equattons of Equilibrium, Provided the structure (frame or machine) is properly supported and contains no more supports or members than are necessary to prevent its collapse, thon the unknown forces at the supports ard conuiéctions can be determined from the equations of equilibrium. Ifthe structare fies in the x-y plane, then for each free-body diagram drawn the loading must satisfy EF, ~0,E%,—0, and 2Mg = O.The selection of the fre¢-body diagrams usec for the analysis is completely arbitrary. They may represent each of the members of the structure, a portion of the structure, or its entirety. Por example, consider finding the stx components of the pin reactions at A, B, and C for the frante shown in Fig. 6-260. If the frame is dismembered, as it is in Fig. 6 26b, these unkownsean be determined by applying the three equations ‘of equilibrium to eacl of the two members (total of six equations). The free-body diagram of the entire frame can alsa be used for part of the analysis, Fig. 6-26, Hence, if 90 desired, all ix unknowns can be determined by applying the three equilibrium equations to the entire frame, Fig, 6 26e, snd slso (0 cither oneof its members Furthermore, the auswers can be checked in part by applying the three equations of ‘equilibrium to the remaining “second” member. In general, then, this problem can be solved by writing at most six equilibrium equations using, free-body dingrams of the members and/or the combination of conxected members. Any more than six equations written would not be unique from the original six and would only serve to check the results. Sscnou 6.6 Frames and Machine: = 203 ® Fig. 6-26204 CHAPTER 6 Structural Analysis: PROCEDURE FOR ANALYSIS ‘The joint reactions on frames or machines (siructures) composed of multiforee members can be determined using the following procedure. Free-Body Diagram. + Draw the free-body diagramof the entiresteucture, a portion of the structure, or cach of its members, The choice should be made so that it leads to the most direct solution of the probiem, » When the frec-body diagram of a group of members of astructure is drawn, the forces at the connected paris af this group ace internal forces and ae not shown on the free-body diagram of ‘the group. ‘Forces comnion to two members which are in contact act with equal magnitude Dit opposite sexse on the respective free-body diagrams of the members * ‘Two-force members, regardless of their shape, have equal but opposite collinear forces acting at the ends of the member. + Inmany eases its possible to tell by inspection the proper sense ofthe unknown fortes acting ona member; however, if thisseems dificult, the sense ean be assamed. * Accouple moment is a free vector and can act at any point on the free-body diagram. Also, a force is a sliding vector and can act at any point along its line of action, Equations of Equilibrium. © Count the number of unknowns and compare itto the total number of equitibrium equations that are evailable. In two dimensions, there are three equilibrium equations that cam be written for cach member. + Sum mospents about 4 point that lies et the intersection of the fines of ettion of as many unknown forees as possible * Ifthe solution of a force or couple moment magnitude [s found to be negative, it means the sense of the force is the reverse of that shown on theree-body diagrams,Section 6.6 Frames and Machines « 295 pin at C exorts on member CB of the frame in Fig, 6-274. 20008 Solution | Free-Body Biugravns, By inspection it ean be seen that AB is a two- force member. The iree-body diagrams are shown in Fig, 6-27, Fquations of Kquitibrivn, Taethree untenowns,Cy, Cy and Fy, 080 bo determined by applying the thrce equations of équilibsium to member CB. | zag = 0; 2000¢2 m) ~ (egy in 607)(41m) = Ogg * 11547 SHER, = 0; 11547 c0s60°N-C,=0 p= ST7N Ans. +425, = 0;1154,7sin 60°N - 2000N-+C, = 0 C, = 1000N Ans. Solution R Free-Bodly Diagronis. Th one does not recogulze that AB is a wo- force member, then more work is involved in solving this problem. “the free-body diagrams are shown in Pig. 6-27c. Equations of Zouilibrian, Thesix unknowns, Av, Ay By By, Co Cy are determined by applying the three equations of equilibrium to exe member. Menber AB (HEM, =0; — B,(3 sin 60% m) — B,(3 cos 60° m) Oy SF Ap~ Be =0 @ +tze, Ay B,=0 Q Meniver BC (Ete = 0; 2000N(2m) ~ B(4m) = 0 ® BIR 0, Be C=O ©) +12F,=0; By ~ 2000N + ¢, = oO ‘The results for C, and C, can be determined by solving these equations in the following sequence: 4,1, 5, thea 6, The results are | | I By = 1000N | \ | By = STIN 4, y= STIN Ans, + G 100N Ans By comparison, Solution 1 is simpler since the requirement that Fay ‘in Fig, 6-27) be equal, opposite, and collinear at the cixds of member AB cutomatically satisfies Eqs 1, 2, and 3 above and therefore eliminates the need to write these equations. As a result, always identify the tno-foree members before slarting the analysis!296 + CHAPTER 6 Structural Analysis ene ‘The compound beam shown in Fig. 6-280 is pin connected at R. Determine the reactions at its supports. Neglect its weight and thickness, 10uN Aun aN Eo 2a a A, A. 2m Fp Solution Free-Body Diagrams. -“By inspection, if we consider a frte-body diegram of the entite beam ASC, there will be three unknown regetions at A and one at C. These four unknowns cannot all be obtained from the three equations of equiflbdum, and so it will become necessary to dismember the beam into its fivo segments as shown in Fig. 6-285. Equations of Equitibriwn, The six unknowns ere determined as follows Seginent BC Bp=0 S8KN(Lm) + 62m) = 0 By, BEN +, Segment AB HER = 0; Ay ~ QOKN)G) + B, = 0 (hEM, =O My ~ (105N)G)(@2 im) - 34m) = 0 HPL, = 0; Ay ~ (OKN)G) — B, = 0 Solving each of these equations successively, using previously calculated results we obtain Ap26¥N | Ay= TEN My = 321m Aas. Be=0 3B, = 4kN c= 4kN Avs.Steno 66 Frames and Machines + 297 Determine the horizontal and vertical components of force which the pin at C exerts on member ABCD of the frame shoym in Fig, 6-294. free-Body Diagrams By inspection, Ge three components of reaction that the supports exert on ABCD can be determined from a free-body diagrarn of the entire frame, Fig, 6-29. Also, the free-body clagrim of cach frame member is shown in Fig, 6-29c, Notice that member BE is a twvo-force member. As shown by the colored daslied ines, the forces at B, C, and £ have equal magnitudes but opposite directions on the separate free-body diagrams, Equotions of Equlttbriun. The sx unknowns Ay Ay Fp CoCyy and D, will be determined from the equations of equilibrium applied 10 the entire frame and then to member CHF. We heve i | Solution I Fy = -1TA2N Entre Fone (43M, <0; —DLNQm)+D,Q.8m)=0 D,=007N i | By =O; A,-7007N=0 A,=7007N | HBR <0: A,-98LN=0 © Ay =9BIN | Meatber CEE | Me <0; “DRL Nm) ~ (Hsin 4)0L.6m) = 0 | AYE, = 0; ~ (17342 cos 45°N) = 0 C, = 1226N Ans. | +12, = 0; Cy~ (-1734.28in 45° N) — 98LN = 0 : y= -215N Avs, Since the mageitudes of Kp and C, wore calculated as negative quenfities they Were assumed to be acting in the wrong sense on the free body diagrams, Fig. 6-296. The correct sense of these forces might have been determined “by inspection” before applying the equations of equilibrium tomember CF, Asshowr in Fig.6-29¢, moment equitibriem about point FE on member CEF indicates that C, must actually act dovnuvard to counteract the moment created by the BL-N force about E, Similarly, summing moments about C, it i8 seen thal the vertical ‘component of Fy must actuslly net upward, and 50 Fy rust act upwvard and to the right. “The above calculations can be checked by applying the three ‘equilibrium equations to member ABCD, Fig, 6-29,298 + CHAPTER 6 Structural Analysic ‘The smooth disk shown in Fig, 6-20e is pinned at D snd has # weight of 20, Neglecting the weights of the other members, determine the horizontal and vertical components of reaction at pins B and D. Solution Free-Boce Qegiams, By inspection, the three components of | reaction at the supports can be determined from a free-body diagram of the entire frame, ig, 6-30b. Also, free-body diagrams of the ‘members ace shown ia Fig, 6-30c. Equesions of Eqetitériunn, The cight unknowns can of course be obiained by applying the eight equifibrium equations to each member—three to member AB, three to member BED, and two to the disk. (Moment equilibrium is autometically satisfied for the disk.) If this is done, however, all the results can be obtained only from a simmltaneous solution of some of the equations, (Try it and find out) ‘To avoid this situation, it is best to first determine the three suppoct reactions on the eure frame; then, using these results, the zemaining five equilibrium equations can be applied to two other parts in order to solve successively for the other uoknowns. Enwine Prarie | (+EM, = 0; -20NG em) + C,G.5em)=0 C= 1721N BER, 0; Ay ~ YIN =0 HtER, = 05 Ay~ 20N=0 Member AB BER, = 0; TIN B,=0 Ans. (HEMg = 05 © 20N(G em) + ¥p(3-em) = 0 +T3F, = 05> 20N-40N+B,=0 Ans. Disk Ans. D,=20N Ans.Fig. 6-314, Fig 31 Solution Free-Rede Diagram A free-body diagram of each pulley including its pin and a portion of the contacting cable is shown in Fig, 6-31, Since the cable fs cowtinuots and the pulleys are frictionless, the cable has a constant tension P acting throughout its length (ee Example 5:7).'The fink connection between pulleys B and C is a two-force member, and therefore it has aa unknown tetsion T acting on it, Notice thet the principle of action, equa! but oppasite reaction must becarefully observed for forces P and T when the separate free-body diagrams are drmwn. Equations of Equiltbciars. The thee unknowns ere obtained ax follows: Pulley A HERG 3P-600N-0 P= 20N Aas. Paes HMER=0 T-2P=0 7 =400N Aas Pulte C 4fER,=G R-2P-T=6 R=800N Ans Seenow 6.6 Feamas and Machines » 299300 + CHAPTER6 Structural Analysis +6) = — 2 3 i > ‘A man having 2 weight of 750 N (= 75 kg) supports himself by means of the cable and pulley systemshown in Fig 6-226. I treseat has a weight £75 N (75 kg), determine the force that he must exert on the cabFe st A and the forcehe exeris on the seat. Neglect the weight of the cables and pulleys, Soluiion | Fvee-Body Diagrams, ‘Tao tree-body diagrams of the man, seet,and pulley C are shown in Fig. 6-42), The two cables are subjected to tensions Ty and Tg, respectively. The ovan is subjected to three forces: his weight, the tension T, of cable AE, and the reaction Ny of the seat Equations of Equilivrium. The thee unknowns are obteined xx follows: Hon = TAtN,-TON=0 a Tr +N,-7SN=0 Oy Pulley C +13F, Ty -T.=0 8) Here 7, can be determined by adding Eqs. 1 and 2 to eliminate N, and then using Eg. 3. Tae other unknowns atc then obtained by resutstitution of Zp. Ty~ SSON “Ans 25N Ans. Solution Feee-Body Bagrass, By Using the blue section shown in Fig, 6-32a, the man, pulley, and seat can be considered az a single system, Fig, (-S2e. Here N, and Ty are interna? forces end hence are not included op this “combined!” tree-body diagram. Equorions of Equilibrtam. Applying ZF, = 0 yiokls a divect solution for Te. WBF, =% - 3%_,—7SN-750N=0 Tp=275N “The other mknowrs can be obtained from Egs.2 and 3.Smee “The hand exerts a foree of 35 N on the grip of the spring compressor shown in Big, 6-33a, Determine the foree in the spring needed to maintain equilibrium of the mechanism, Soliton Aree-ody Dingrams. By inspection, members £A, ED, and EF are j ee eels aae ker oly dagen orgie Beand 456 } ace shown in Fig. 6-334. The pin at Z hax also been included here |, since tivee force interactions ocur on tis pia, They represent the effect of members ED, fa, md ZF, Note cally how equal end opposite fore rotons oscar between each ofthe past Equations of Equtlibriwn, By studying the free-body diagrams, the most direct way to obtain the spriug force is to apply the equelions of equilibrium in ihe following sequence: Lever ABG (t2My = 0; Fe4(25 mm) - 35 N00 mm) Fea = 140.N Pin E TEE, Fan sin 60° ~ Fer sin 0° = 0 Fra = Fre =F AEE, = 2F cos 60° — 140N = 0 Fo i40N Aniv BC (+2Mp = 0; ~F,(350 mm) + 140 cos 30° N{75 mm) F,~ 6062N Atte StcTow 6.6 Frames ané Machines « 304302 + CHAPTER 6 Structural Analysis ‘The [OOekg block i held in equilibrium by means of the pulley and contiguous cable system shown in Fig. 63a, If the cable is attached to the pin at B, compute the forces which this pin exerts on each of its connecting members, Solution Free-Body Dingrams. A free-body diagram of each member of the frame is shown in Fig. 6-346. By inspection, members AB aad CB are two-force members. Furthermore, the cable must be subjected to @ force of 44.5 Nin order to hold pulley D and the-block in equilibrium. A iree-body diagram of the pin at B is needed since four interactions ‘occur at this pin. These are caused by the attached cable (490.5 N), member AB (F,,), member CE (Koy), aed pulley B (B, and B,). Equations of Eguiliériam, Applying the equations of force equilibrium to pulley B, we have 0; B,~ A905 cos45°N #0 Bp = 3d68N Ans, F, = 0; B, ~ 4905 sin 45°N ~ 4905N = 0 B, = §8S13N Ans. Using these rest, equilibrium of the pin requizes that 412K, =0; Hcg ~S373N~ 4905 Reg = 1600N Ans EF «0; Fyy ~ HAGGON) ~ H68N 0 Ege = HN Aas. It may be noted that the two-forcs member CB is subjected to ‘bending as caused by the force Fog. From the standpoint of design, It would be better to make this member siraight (from C to B) so that the force F-» would create orly tansfon in the member. a eo dos 49058 : © Before solving the following problems, it fs suggested that a brief review be made’of all the previous examples. his may be done by covering each solution, trylag to locate the Iwo-force members, drawing the free-body diagrams, and conceiving ways of applying the equations of equilibrium to obtain the solution,Promems + 303 PROBLEMS 666. In each case, dotermine the force P required to © *8-48.Delermine the force P needed to support the smuintain equilibrium. The block weighs 100.N (+ 10g). 100.N (-- 10-eg) weight. Pach pulley has a weight of 10N (#1 Kg). Also, what are the cord reactions at A and 5? @ oY o Prob, 6-46 Prob. 68 6-62, "The eye hook ns « pesitive lockinglatch wheait 669, "Taclink is wed to hold the rod in place, Detesmine supports the load because its two parisare pin-connected the scquired axial force on the screw at E ifthe largest force at and they bear against one aothor along the smooth _t¢ be exerted on the rod at B, C or D is te be 100 N. Ako, surface at B. Determine the resultant force at the pin end find the magritude of the force reaction at pin A. Agsurne the normal force af 2 when the eye hook supports loud all suriuens of contact are smooth, of BOON.300 CHAPTER 6 Structural Analysts 6-10. The principles of a differential chaia Hock are indicated schemetically in the figure, Determine the magnitude of forec P needed to sopport the 800-N force. ‘Also, find the distance x where the-cable rsust he attached to bar AB 0 the bar remains herizontel. All pulleys have a radies of 60 mm, Prob, 0 6-71, Determine the force P nesded to support the 20-kg mast using the Spantdt Burton rig. Also, what are the reactioasat the supporting looks 4, B, and C? rod, 6-71 $602 The compound beam fsfited of A and supported by a roccer at 8 and C.’Ihere are hinges (pins) at D and E, Determine the reactions at the supports 1skN 673, The compound beam is pin-supported at C and supported by a roller at A and B. There isa hinge (pin) Brncbbre Limbs! Prob 6-73 674, Determine the greatest force P that cax be opplicd to the frame if the largest force resultunt acting at A can hhave & raagnitude of 2 kN.675, Determine thehorizontelané vertical conpoceats force at pins A and C of the twowmertber frame. 2o0 Wm TTT Prob, 6-15 6-16. The threchinged arch supports the leeds Fy = 8ANaad Fy = SEN. Determine the horizontal and ‘vertical components of reaction atthe pin supports 4 and BTake h=2m. Prab, 6-76 Promuems + 205 6-71. Determine thehorizontal end vertical components of force at pins, B, and C, and the reactions to the fixed, suppott D of the three-member frame, 2RNQEN2EN 2 Prob 6-77 478, Detemnine the horizontal and vestcal components of fone at C which member ANC exerts on member CEP. Pek O78306 + CHAPTER 6 Structural Analysis 6-19, Determine the borizontaland vertical components of force that the pins # 4, B, and C exert on their connecting members. te — sow Peab, 679 26-80, ‘The hoist supports the 125-kg engine. Determine, the force the load creates in member DB and in member FB, which coateins the hydraulic eyinder H. 681, Determine the force P ox the cord, and the angle 0 that the pulley-snpporting link AR makes with the vertical. Neglect the roass of the puleys ane the link, he block has weight of 200 N (=* 20 ka) and the cord is attached to the pin at B.The pulleys eve redii ofr, ~ 2m, aud 7 = 1 em. Prob. 68h 682. ‘The front of the car isto be lifted using # smooth, rigid 3.5 m long board. Tho car has a weight of 17,5 EN aida centcrof gravity at G.Detezsnine the position xof the fulcrum so that am epplied force of S00 Nat Z will life the front wheels of the cet.683. ‘The wail cmee supports a load of 7H N. Determine the horizoatal aud vertical components of reaction at the ping A and D. Also, what is the foree in the cable at the wineh 17? Prk 6-3 °684. Detesmine the force that te smooth roller C everts on beam AB, Also, what ave the horizontal ard vertical components of reaction at pin A? Neglect the ‘weight of the frame ard roller. Frob. 684 Proweus + 307 685. Determine the horizontal ané vertical comporonte of force which the pins exert ou member ABC, Prob, 6-85 686, ‘The engine hoist is used to support the 202-kg engine. Determine the force aeting in the hydtaulfe cylinder AB, the horizontal and vertical components of foros atthe pln Cand the reactions at the Sxed suppor: D.308 + CHAPTER 6 Structural Analysis G81. Detonnine the horizontelandverifcalcomponeats 689. Detecmine the horizantaland yerticalsompoaents of force at pins # aad C. of force at exch pin, The suspended cyltuder has @ weight of 800 NE (= 80 ke). reo 6-37 Peat 689 6-88. The pipe cutter is clamped around the pipe P.1f 6.90. “The togple clamp is subjected to a foros F at the fhe wheel at 4 exerts anormal forecof F, = 80Noathe kandle.Deterinine the verscal stamping force aoting at E. pipe, determine the normal foreos of whools B and Coa the pipe. Allo compute the pin reaction on the wheel at "The three wheels each have a zadivs of 7 mm and the pipe has an outer redius of 19 mn. Feob. 6-88 Prob. 6-90691, Deteraniue the horizontal and vertical components of force which the pins at A, Band C exert on meniber ABC of the frame, Feob, OO ¥692. The derrick is pin-connected 10 the pivot at A. ‘Determine the largest mass that can be supported by the derrick if the maximum force that cau be sustained by Prosems + 309 693, Determine the requiced mass of the suspended oytinder if the wosion in the chain wrapped around the Geely twrzing gear is to be 2 KN. Ako, vhat is the magnitude of the resultant force on pin A? 694. “The pamping unit i used to recover oll. When the vialking beam ABC is horizontal, the force acting in the ‘wiretine at the well head is 2000 N. De‘eamine the torque M which mast be exerted by the motor in order fo ‘avercame this lead. The horse-head C weighs 240 N and Isa center of gravity at Ge. The walking beam ABC Ens ‘a Weight of S20/N aad a center of gravity at Gp, arid the counterweight hes a weight of 800 N and a center of gravity at Gy. The pitman, AD, ispin-connected af itsends ‘and has negligible weight. the pin at Ais 18KN, 2 & 2 Ise 2D @ ok ead. 692 Prob. 6-94340 + CHAPTER 6 Steuctural Analysis 695. Determine the force F on the cable if the spring, is compressed 0 mm when the mechanism is in the position shown. The spring has astifiness of = 121N/n, 50 2 , 10 695 Determine the force that the jaws J of the metal cutters exert on the sriooth cable C if 100-N forces are applied to the handles, Tac jaws sre pinned at Band A, ard D aud B, There ig also a pin at F. how Fro. 6-96 697. ‘The compound arangednent of the pan scale is shown, If the mass on the pan is 4 kg, determine the hhorizontal and vertical components at pins A, B, end Cad the distance x of the 25g mass to keep theseale in balance. Poon pee FREE |, = [ Prob. 6.97 698, “The scissors It consisis of tv9 sets of cross ‘members and two hydrauke cylinders, DE, symmetrically located on each side of the platform. The platform has a ‘uniform mass of 60 kg, with a center of gravity at Gy. The oad of 85 kg, wil center of gravity at Gp, is centrally located between each side of the platform, Determine the force in each of the hydrantic cylinders for equilibrium. Rolloss are located at 2 and D. aan o | [a fise—pisn| Pub 6-98,659. Detormine the horizontal and vertical compononts of force thal the pins at 4, B, aud C exert on the frase, ‘Tae cylinder has a mass of 80g. The pulley has a radius oft m. Prob 9 6-100, By squeeziag on the hand brake of the bieycle, the ridor subjects the bruke cable to a tension of 200 N, ifthe caliper mechanism ix pinconnected 10 the bleyele frame at B, determine the normal force each brake pad exests ox the rim of the wheel. Is this the force thal stops the wheel from toning? Explain. A, ai “ Prob, 6-190 Provtsas + 314 GAOL If» force of P = 30 N is upplied perpendicular tothe handle ofthe mechanism, determice the Tagnitude of force F for equilibriam. The members are pin: connected at A, B, C,and D. rob. 6-101 G02, The bucket of the backhoe and its contents have a Weight of 3000 N (= 300 kg) and a center of gravity at G. Determine the forces ofthe hydraulic oyfinder AB and in inks AC and AD in erdar to hold the toed in the position sown. The bucket is pinned at #, Prob. C102,312+ CHAPTERG Structural Analysis 6103, Two smooth tubes A and B,each having the same ‘weight, W, are suspended from a common point @ by means of equablength cords A thicd tube, C, is placed between A and . Determine the greatest weight of C “without upsetting equilibrium. ° Prob, 6-105, 6104. The double lnk giip Is used 10 It the beam. If the beam weighs 4 KN, determine the horizontal and vertical components of force. acting on the pin at A and the horizontst and vertical components of force that the lange of the beam cxerts oa the jaw at B. Prob, 6104 6405. The compound bets is fixed supported at C and supported by rockers a¢ A and B. If there are binges (pins) at D end E, determine the components of reaction st the supports. Neplect the thickness of the beam. ae Prob. 6-105 6406. Determine te hocizomtal and yestical components of force at pia 8 and the normal force the pin at C exerts oa the smooth slot. Also, determine the ‘moment and herizoatal and vertical reactions of foree at A. There is a pulley at B. Prob, 6106Prowsus + 312 6.4107. The symmetric col! tong supports the coll which 109. IF each of the three uniform like of the hhasa mass of 800 kg and center of mass at @.Deteriaine mechanism has a leagth Z and weight W, detesuine the the horizontal and verlical components of force the angle jorequilbriura, The spring, which always remains linkage exerts on plate DA/H at points D and B,The vertical, isuasteetched when 9 = 0°, coil exerts only vertical resetions at K and L. Prob. 109 Prob. 6-107 at bed trailor hase wight of 35 #6108, Tha force of 40 N is applied to the grip of the (oomon) sncenter olay Gy Te peste clamp, determine the comprenive force Fthit the wood (g yecab st. The sab ls 4 Welt OF30KN (= 300 ke) ‘Dlock exerts on the clamp, and center of gravily at Gc. Determine the range of values {for the poston ofthe IOAN (+ 10004) fod Fo that tshon tt placed over the rear axle, no ane is subjected to tore than 27.5 RMT Toad bas acenter of aviy al Cp, Prob 00314 «CHAPTER 6 Structural Analytic G-LUL. The three pincomected members shown ia the. 10p view Support & downward force of 60 N at G. If only vertical forcesare supported atthe connections & C, Hand ped aupporis A, D, P,determine the reactions st each pad. Prob 6-111 46:12. The airersftchangar door opens and closes slowly by means of a motor which draws in the cable AB. Hf the door is made fa 10 sectons (bifold) and cach section hs a uniform weigh! W and length L, determine the force in the cable rsa fiction of the door's postion 6. The sections are pin-connected at C and 2 ond the bottom i attached to a roller that travels along the vertical track. Prob. e112 6-11 A man having a welght of 750 N (* 75 kg) attempts to Hft himself using one of the two metheds shown, Delermine the totat foree he must exert on bar ABin euch case and the acrmal reaction he exerts on the platform at C. Neglect the weight of the platform, 6434, Aman having a welght of 790N (= 75 kx) attempts to Hf bimsef using one of the two methods shown, Determine the (otal force he raust exert on ber ABin esch cease aad the aoemal reaction he exerts on the platform at G.The platform has.a weight of 150 N (~ 15 kg) ow wo Prods, 6-1V Ld 6-115. The piston C moves vertically between, the two smooth walls If the spring has 4 sliflaess of k = 15’Nfcm, and is unstreiched when § = 0°, cetermfae the couple M ‘that must be applied to AB to hold the mechanism in equilibria when 0 = 30° Peo 115*6:116. The pomember frame aupporte the 200N (© Weigh cylinder aud 250 Nm couple moment. Determine the force ofthe roller at B on member AC and the horizontet end vertical components of force which the pin at Cexeds on member C3 and the pin at exerts off ‘member AC.The roller C dove not contact member CB. rob, 6-118 6.117. The trector boom supports the aniform mass of 50 kg ia the bucket which has a center of mas at G. Determine the force in each hydraulic cylinder AM and CD and the resultant force et pins # and ‘the load is supported equelly on each side af the trastor by a sicsilar mechenism, rok. 617 Prostems + 315 6-18. Themechonismis used tohide kitchen appliances under a cabinet by alowing the ste to rotate downward, If @emixer weighs SON (~ 5 kg),iscentered on the shelf, and has 2 mass center at G, determine the stretch in the ‘spring necessary to hold the shelf in the equilibrium postion shown Thereis a similar mechacism on exch side oof the shelf, so that each mechanism supports 23 Nv (~2.5 kg) of the load The springs each kave a sifiness of Jes UNinom spring, Sian RD Bela soan/| mous 6X19, ‘The Hnkage for a hydraulic ork fe how. If the toad on the jack 10 KN, determine the pressure acting on thefiid wien the jackisin the pestionshown All etlevec ‘points are pins.'Ihe piston at H has a cross-sectional ares fA = (250m. Hint Hirt find the forse Pactng slong link £71 The pressor in Ihe Guidis p = FIA.316 + CHAPTER 6 Structural Analysis 6120, Determine the requived force Pthit must be 6122. The hydraulic crane is used to Fil the L400-N applied at the plade of the proning stears so that the (= 140-g) load, Determine the foree in the hydraulic lade exerts a normal foros of 100 Non the twig at . cylinder AB and the foree in inks AC and AD when the {cad is hold in the position show, 1875 mm 1875 Pro. 6-120 Pook. -i2 6.123, The kinetic sculpture requires that eath of the three pinned beams be in perfect bafance at all tines during és slow motjon. If exch mambor has a uniform weight of 2 kN/m and length of 3m, determine the 6-121, ‘Ihe thrte power lines exert the forces shown on necessary comterweights 1¥4, Wa, and Wy vhick must be ‘the truss joints, which in turn are pinconaezted to the added to the erds of cach member to ketp the system in poles AH and EG, Determine the fores in the guy cxble balance for any position, Neglect the size of the “Al und (he pia reaction at the support HZ. ccounterweights 6m 6m atc bof om 5m pa toubouboet—om 4 Prob. 6-124 Prob. @L3"6-24, Tho three-member frame iseonnected et. ts onde using Dullundsockot joiuls Deteraine the x, yz components of reaction at B aud Ue tension In member ED-'the force acting at 11351 + 200) ~ 180K) EN. Prob, 6-124 6425, The foursomes “A” frine is mpported at A and Evy smooth collars and at @ by a pia. Al the otter joints ar ball-and-sockets If the pin at G vill fit when the resultant force there is 800 N, determine the largest rerticat foree P that can be sapporied by the frame. Also, wi are the x, ¥£ forse components which member BD exetts on members ADC and ABC? The colats at A and # and the pin at G only exert force components on the érame. vor Prob, 6-128 Proms = 317 64126, The structure is subjected to the loading shown. Member AD is supported by a eable AB snd roller at C anc fits throug? asmooth circular hole at D. Memser AD is supported by a roller at D and a pote tha: fits it a smooth sug clreular hole at £. Determine the x, 2 components ofreactiog at Z and the tension in cable AB. xO 05m, Pef-asein— OL rub. 126 6127. The structure is subjected to the force of 45 KN which Has in a plane parallel to the y-2 plane. Member AB is supported by a balhand-socket joint at A and fits trough snug hote at B. Member CD is supported by 2 Fin at C, Determine the x,y, z components of reaction at Amd €. Prob, 6127318 = CHAPTER & Structural Analysls CHAPTER REVIEW © Tress Anelysis. A simple truss consists of triangular elements connected together by pin joints, The foros within it members can be determined by assuming the members are all two-toree members, connected concurrently at each joint. + Method of Joints, fa truss s in equilibrium, then cach of its joints is also in equilibrium, For a coplanar truss, the concurrent force system at each joint must satisfy force equilibrium, BF, ~ 0, EF, = 0. To obtain a numerical solution for the forees in the members, select a joint that has a free-body diagram with at most two unknown forces and one known ferce, (This may require first finding the reactions at the supports) Once « member force #8 determined, use its value and apply it 10 an adjacent joint, Remember that forces that are found to pull on the joint ace in feasion, and thoxe that push on the joint are in compression. To avold a simultaneous solution of two equations, try (o sum forces in a direction that is perpendicular to one of the unknowns. This will allow a direct solution for the other unknown. To further simplify the analysis, first identify all the zero-force members + Method of Sections, if « tras isin equilibrium, then each section of the truss fs also in equilibrium, Pass a section through the member whose force isto be determined. Then draw the free-body diagram of the cectionod part having the least number of forces on it, Sectioned members subjected to pulfeeg ate in censors, ad ‘those that are subjected to pushing are in compression. ifthe force system is coplanar, then three equations of equilibrium are available to determine the unknowns. If possible, sum forces ina direction that is perpendicular to two of the three unknown forces. “This will yiold a direct solution for the third foree, Likerdse, sam moments about a point shat pastes through the line of action of woof the three unknown forces,so that the third unknown force can be dotorminod directly, + Frames and Machines, ‘Ihe forces acting at the Joints of a frame or machine can be determined by drawing: the free-body diagrams of each of its mombors or parts, The priaciple of actlon-reaction should be carefully observed when drawing these forces on each adjacent member or pit. For a coplanar force system, thore are throo equilibrium equations available for cach member.Review Prowsus + 319 REVIEW PROBLEMS 6728 Determine the resultant forees at pins B ard C ‘on member ABC of the four-meniber frema, Prob. 6-128, 6129, ‘The mechanism consists of identical meshed gear A and B and arms which are fired to the gears The spring atiached tothe cnés ofthe gers hus an unstretched engih of 100 mm snd a sifiness of & 250 Nim, If 8 torque of M = 6N+m is applied to gear A, determine the angle @ theough which each arm rotates The gears are cosch pinned to fisnd supports at thair centers. 180 Prob, 6 129 6.130. Determine thohorizoate! snd vertical components of foree at pins A and C of the (wo-member fimo, 500Nin ec, oo ‘SOUT “OND Prob, 6-130 6:21, The spring has an unstretched Length of 0.3 m. Detsrmine the angle 0 for equilibrium if theuniform links conch Lave a mars of 5 kg. Prob. 138320+ CHAPTER 6 Structural Analysis 6.15% The spclag hes an unsiretched length of 0.3m. GAB, Determine the horizontal and _veitieat Determine the-mass mi of enc uniform Unk if tre angle _componenis of force that pins A and B exect on the 10+ 0 = 20 for equilibrium. member framte, Set F = 500 N. Prob, 6-132 Prob, 6-238 GAB, Determine the horizontal and vertical. «6-135, ‘The two-tar mechanism consists ofa lever arm AB ‘components of force thai the pins A und Betert on the and. smooth link CD, which has a fixed collar at its end C tvounember frame, Set P= 0. and u roller ut tho othe: end D. Determine the fore P neeiled (o hold the lever in the postion 0."The spring has 2 stifiness & and unstretched Jength 2L. the role: contacts either the top or bottom portion of the bocizontal guide, Pro. 6-133 Pro6-135,%6:436 Determine the forcein cath member of the uss and state if the merabers are In tension or compression, sobised sen y 10kW Prob. 6136 Desion Proseers + 321 6137. ‘Determine the foyce in members AB, AD, aad AC of the space truss and state If the members ate in tension or comgression, ob, 6187 DESIGN PROJECTS GAD DESIGN OF A BRIDGE TRUSS ‘A briege having » horizontal top cord is to span between the two piers A end having on arbitrasy height. Tt is required that a pin-connected truss be uscd, consistingot sie] members bolted together to steel gusset plates, el as the one shown in the figure. The end supports are assumed to be a pin at A and a roller at R.A vertical leading of 3 KN is to be supporied within the middle Sm of the span. This load can be applied in part to several jcinis on the top cord within this region, or to a single joint at the mille of the top cord. The force of the wind and the weight of the members are to be neglected. Assuuue the maximum tensile foree in each member cennoi exceed 4.25 aN; and regardiess of the length of the member, the mazimum compressive force cannot exceed 35 KN. Design the most economical trass that will support the loading, The members cost §3.50m, and the ‘gusset plates cost $8.00 cach. Submit yous cost anlysis for the materials, slong with a scaled draving of the tus, icentitying on this drawing the tensile and compressive force in each member. Also, indlude your calenlations of the complete foree analysis. Prob 61D,322 + CHAPTER 6 Structural Analysis 62D DESIGN OF A CART LIET ‘A tnund cart is used to move a load from one loading dock tosnother, Any dock will avea diferent clevatioa relative tothe bed of a turk that backs up tot. Itis necessary that the lording platform on the hand cart will briag the load reatiag on itp to the clevation ofeach truck bod as shovm. ‘The maximum elevation diifeccace between the frame of the baad cart aud 1 tuuck bed is 0:3 m, Design a hand. ‘operated mechanical system that will allow the Toad to be liked thie distance from the frante of the hand cart Assume the oparater can exert a (cornfortable} force of 100 N to ‘make the lit,and that the maximum [oad, centered on the loading pladorm, is 2000 N. Submit a scaled drawing of your design, and expla how it works based on a fovee saulysis. 63D DESIGN OF A PULLEY SYSTEM “The stee] beam Af, beving a length of Sm and a mass of “700 kx ts to be hoisted in its horizontal position fo aheight of dm, Design 2 pulley.ard-rope system, which can be suspended from the overhend beam CD, that will allow a Slagle worker to hoist he beam, Assume the the ‘maximum (comfertabic) force that be can apply to the rope is 180N. Submit a drawing of your design. specify ite approximate material cost, and douse the sefety aspects of ils operation. Rope costs $1.2%m and each piley costs $3.00. 93 m (mnt)6-4D_ DESIGN OF A TOOL USED To POSTTIONA. ‘SUSPENDED LOAD Fleavy loads are suspended from an overhead palley and each load must be positioned over a depository. Design tool that can he used to sherten o: lengthea the pulley cord AB a sul! amount in order to make the location adjustment, ASsume tae Worker ean apoly 2 maxim (comfortable) force of 100 N to the tool, and the maximum force alowed in cord AB is 2000 N. Submit 2 scaled drawing of the ‘ool, and a brief paragraph to ‘eaplaix how it works using a foree analysis Include a discassion om the safety aspects otis use. 6-5D_ DESIGN OF A FENCE-FOST REMOVER ‘A farmer wishes to remove several fice posts, Bach post isburied 0.5 ma the ground and will require a maximum vertical pulling force of 700 N10 remove it, He can use his truck to develop the fores, out he needs to devise a method for their removal without breaking the posts Design a method that can ve used, considering that the only materia: available are a stiong rope and several pisces of wood having various sizes andl lengths. Submit fa sketch of your design and discus the safely and reliability of is ase, Alo, provide a Force analysis to show how it works aud why it will eange minimal damage to a ost when it removed. Proms = 323 Prob. 64D 700 asian Prob. 6-5‘The design and anahsis of any siructural member requires krowledge of the internal loadings actina within &, not orly wher it in place and subjected to service foads, but also when itisbeing heisted as shawn heve. In this chapter, we will discuss how enginears determine these loacings.Ec CHAPTER Internal Forces Rae eau + Toshow how to use the method of sections for determining the internal loadings in member. * To genesalize this procedure by formulating equations that can be plotted so that they describe the internal shear and moment throughout a member, « To analyze the forces and study the geometry of cables supporting a load. 7A Internal Forces Developed in Structural Members The design of any structural or mechanical member requires an invootigation ofthe loading acting with- in the member in order to be sure the materiel can sesit this Londing, These internal loadings can be determined by using the method of sections. Toillus- trate the procedure, consider the “simply support. ed” beam shown in Fig. 7-La, whicia is subjected to ‘the forces F; and F, and the support reactions A. Ay, and B,, Fig. 7-10. If the intertal loadings acting fon the croxeseelion al Care tobe detennined, then an imaginary seotion is passed through the becm, cutting It {nto two segments, By doing this the internal loadings at the section become evterna! on the free-body diagram of each segment, 25326 + CHAPTER? Internal Forces To rave on material te term: sed to suppor the roof ofthis shelter were taperec since the roof losdiag will produce » ger fntemal moment atthe beams? centexs Haz at theit ends. Fig 7-1 Fig. Ic. Since both segments (AC and CB) were in equilibrium before the beam was sectioned, equilibrium of each sepment is maintained pro- vided rectangular force components Ne and V¢ and a resultant couple moment Mc are developed at the section, Note that these loadings must be equal in magnitude and opposite in direction cn each of the segments (Newton's third law). The magnitude of each of these losdings cm now be determined by applying the three equations of equilibrium to either segment AC or CB. A direct solution for Nc is obtained by applying Zu, ~ 0; Ve is obtained directly from EF, = 0;andMcisdetermined by summing moments about point C, ZMc = 0, in order to eliminate the moments of the unknowns No and Ve.Stenow 7.1. internal Forces Developad in Structural Members + 327 4 [Bending moment Jecraponents i * ® Hig 7-2 Ta mechanics, the force compoaents N, acting normal to the beam at the cut section, and ¥, acting tangent to the section, are termed the normal or axial force and the shear force, respectively. The couple tomcat M is rolerred to a5 the bending »oment, Fig. 72a. In three dimensions, a generat intemal force and couple moment resultant Will act at the section, The 2, x, z components of these loadings are shown in Fig. 7-2. Horo N, is tho normal force, and V, and V, are shear force components. M, i8 & torsional or twisting moment, and M,, ad ly are bending moment components. For most applications, these resstant Jondings will act at the geometzic center or centroid (C) of tho section's cross-sectional area. Although the magnitude for each loading generally will be different at various points along the axis of the member, the method of sections can always be used to determine their values, Free-Body Diagrams, Since frames and machines ere composed of utiforce members, each of these members will generally be subjected to {intemal normal, shear,and bending loadings Forexample, consider the frame showmin Fig. 73a, the blue section is passed through the frame to determine the internal loadings at poin's H, C, and F, the resulting froe-body diagram of the iop postion of thissection is shown in Fig. 7-32. At each pointwherea imemaber is sectioned there is an unknown nommal force, shear force, ard bending moment, As a result, we cannot apply the Jiree equations of ccquilibrium to this section in order to obtain these rite unknowns *lustead, tosolye this problem we must frst dismenzber the frame and determine the reactions at the connections of the members using the techniques of Sec.66. Once this is done, cack member may then be sectioned at its appropriaic point, and the three equations of equilibrium can be applied to delemine N, ‘Vand M.Por example, the fiee-body diagrarn of segment DG, Fig, 7-3e,can beused to determine the internal loadings at G provided the reactionsof the pla,D, and D,, ate known. “Recall eat his method of analysis workeu well for tustes since trust members are Senigt te force menibers which sépport sly 2a axial of nota load, By % Vs pa By Np Ng328 - CHAPTER? Internal Forces Tn oneb case, the firk en the backhoe is a two-foree mamber. In the top phato it i¢ subjected te both bendiag sud axial load at fis center, By making the marebor steaight, 2s in the bottom photo, then only wa asial foree acts within the member. PROCEDURE FOR ANALYSIS ‘The method of sections can be used to determine the internal loading: at a specific location in 2 member using the following procedure, Support Reacttons. © Before the member is “cut” or sectioned, t may fist be necessary fo determine the member’s support rections, so that the equilibrium equations are used only 10 solve for the internal loadings when th member is sestioned. Jf the member is part of a frame or machina, the reactions at its connections are detemninsd using the methods of Seo. 6.6. ‘Free-Body Diagram!* + Keep all distributed loadings, couple moments, and forces actingon the member in thefr exact locations, then pass aa imaginary scction through the member, perpendicular (o i's axis at the point where the infernal loading is to be determined. ‘+ After the section is made, draw a tree-body diagram of the segment that has the leas! mumber of loads on it, and inicate the 3) @ components of the force and couple moment resultants at the section. + Ifthe member is subjected to a coplanar system of forces, only N,V, and M act at the section. + Inmany cases it may be possibie ¢o tell by inspection the proper seuse of the unknown loadings; however, if this seems cifficut, the tenxe can be assumed. Equations of Equttibrin, + Moments should be summed ¢t the section about axes passing theoughthe cersroid or geometric center of the member's cross- sectional area la ordcr (eliminate the unknown normal and shear forces and thereby obtain direct solutions for the moment components, + {fthe solution of the equilibrium equations yields a negative scalar, the assumed sense of the quantity is opposite to that shown on the free-body diagram.Secnow 7.1. internal Forces Developed in Structural Members + 229 ee ‘The bar is fixed at its end and is loaded as shown in Fig. 7-4a. at points Band C. wn fen Imp : Ne , { A ain } Oy » © Support Reactions, A free-bocy diagram of the entire bar is shown Fig. 74h. By inspection, only a normal force A, acts at the fixed support since ti loads ere applied symmetrically along the bar’s ris. = 0,M,=0) A, — IGEN + 12KN-4kN=0 A, =8KN Free-Ged} Diagrams. ‘The internal forces at B and C will be found using the free-body diagrams of the sectioned bar shown in Fig, 7c No shear or moment act on the sections since they are not required for equilibriun, In particular, segments AB and DC will be ciosen hhere, since they coutain the least number of forces. Equations of Equttibriuim. Seyynent AB +fzr= 0 SEN- p= 0 Np=8kN Ans. Segntent OC FDR =G Ne 4kN = No=4iN | Ans. ‘Tey working this problem in the following manner: Determine Np from segmeat BD. (Note that this approach does not require solttion for the support reaction at A.) Using the resnit for Ne, isolate segment BC to determine No. ——_, Fp 74330 - CHAPTER 7 Internal Forces ‘The circular shaft is subjected to three concentrated torques as shown in Fig, 7-Sa. Determine the internal torques at points 8 and C. Solution Suppoit Heactions, Since the shat is subjected only to collinear torques, @ torque reaction occurs at the support, Fig. 7-5. Using the right-hand rule to defipe the positive circetions of the torques, we require BM,= 0; —10Nem+ ISNem + 20N-m~Tp=0 t Tp = 25N-m xy ven x > x CU (GB (ee oN 4. wox-m Hem ane te cy @ | rigs * Free-Biocks Hogeeeis The internal torquesat Band Cvill befound | ‘sing the free-body diagrams of the shaftscgments AB and CD shown | in Fig. 75. ' . Hquerions of Eyuiltociesn. Applying the equation of moment | ‘equilibrium along the shatt’s axis, we have Seger AB IM, = 0;° —10Nem +15 Nem — Segment CD Bie Re 25Nm-0 Fe=25Nem Ans. Ty=5Nem Ans | ‘Try lo solve for Ze by using segment CA. Note that this approach does not require @ solution for the support reaction at D.a BR Secnow 7.1. Internal Foreas Developed in Structural Members = 331 ee eS ‘The beam supports the Joading shown in Fig. 76a. Determine the interned normal force, shear force, and bending moment acting just to the left, point B, and just to the right, point C, of tae G-KN force. Be Solution Support Reactions, "The Sree-body diagram of the beam is shown in ig, 7-60, When determining the external reactions, realize thal the S-N m couple moment is a free vector and therefore itcen be placed anywhere on the free-body dicgram of the entire beam. Here we will only determine Ay, Since segments AB and AC will be used for the analysis. [HEM = 05 9EN+m + (6 KN}(6m) — A,(9m) = 0 SkN A y Free-Bouy Diagrams, The free-borly diagrams of the left segments AB and AC of the beam are shown in Figs 76¢ and 7-64. In this cage the 9-KN-m couple moment is not inckided on these diogren:s since it must be kept in its arightal position until after the section is made and the appropriate body is isolated. In other words the free- ‘body diagrams of the left sogmeats of the beam do not show the couple moment since tis moment does not actually act on these segments, Equartons of qultibvivin, Seguent AS BERG Ng =0 Ans, Fig 7-6 4+12R,-0; SKN-Vy-0 Vg- SEN Ans. (+3Mp= 0; -{SEN}(3m) + Mp =0 9 My = 15kNem Ans Seger AC Brno Ne=0 Ate. +125-0 | SkN-6kN + Ye=0 Vom AKN Ans GFEMe— 05 —(SEN)(3m) + Me -0 Mg = 1SKN-m Ans, Here the moment arm for the S-kN fore in both cases is approximately 3 m since 5 end C are “almost” colacident,382 + CHAPTER 7 Internal Forens o Rig 7 Determine the internal nommal force,shear foree, and bencing moment ecting at point B of the twomember frame shown in Big. 77a. Solution Support Kenetions, A free-body diagram of each member is shown in Fig. 77h. Since CD is a two-fore member, the equations of equilibsium reed to be applied only to member AC. EB Ma ~ 0; —400 ENF m) + Q)Fpc(@ m) — 0 Fe ~ 333.31KN 43K, = 0; —A, + ($3333 KN) =0 Ay = 266.7 KN +12K,= 0; Ay 400KN + (395.3 KN) Ay = 200kN Eree-Body Diegroms, Pessing ea imaginary section perpendiculer to the axis of member AC through polnt B yields the free-body diagrams of segments AB end BC shown in Fig. 7~7c, When constructing these diagrams it is importan{ to keop the distributed loading exactly as it is until afier the sectidn is made, Only them can it be replaced by a single resultant force. Why? Also, notice thal Np, Vp, and Mz act with equal magnitude but opposite direction on each segment—Newton’s ‘hid Lew. Equotions of Equilibviva. Applying the equations of equilibrium to segment AB, we have HER = 0; Np— 2667N =0 Ng = 267KN Ans. +135 = 0; 200 KN — 200KN-Vp=0 ¥,=0 Ans. #BMy = 0; Mg — 200KN (4 m) — 200 KN (2 m) = 0 Ans. As an exerize, try to obtain these same results using segment BC.Stcnox 7.1. Interna! Foreas Developed in Structural Mombers + 333 Determine the normal force, shear force, and bending moment acting, at point E of the ireme lonced as shown in Fig. 7-84. } @ Sinpoes Reactions, By inspection, members AC and CD are two- force members, Fig. 7-85. In order to determine the internal loadings aL E, we must figs determine the force R at the end of member AC. "To do this we must analyze the equilibriam of the pin ac C, Why? ‘Summing forces in the vertical disection on the pin, Fig, 7-85, we have aten =o Rsin4s* — ON = 0 R= 485N free-Bedy Diagram. ‘The free-body disgram of segment CE is shown in Fig 78. Equations of Equilibria, | Solution BSR =O BBS COs 4S°N - Ve = 0 Ve = GOON Ans, +TEK.- 0; -8485sin 4S°N + Ne =O Ne = GOON Ans {+ EM ~ 05 848.5 cos 45°N(0,5 m)— Mg = 0 Mg = 300N +m Ans. ‘These results indicate » poor desiga, Member AC should be saight (from A to C)so that bending within the member is eliminated. If AC is straight then the internal force would only create tension in the member. See Example 621,CHAPTER 7 Internal Forces ‘The uniform sign shown in Fig. 79a has @ mass of 650 keg and is supported on the fixed column. Design codes indicate that the expected maximum uniform vind Joading that will cccus in the area here it is located is 900 Pe, Determine the internal loadings st A. Solution ” ° “The idealized mode! for the sign is shown in Fig. 79. Hore the necessary dimensions are indicated, We can consider the free-body diagram of a section above point A since it does not involve the support reactions Free-Body Biegeant, The sign has a weight of W = 650(9.81) = 6376KN, and the wind creales a resultant force of Fy — 900 N/m’ 6m\(2.5m) = 13.5 KN perpendicular to the face of the sign. ‘These Joadings are shown on the tree-body dlaghams, Fig, Equations of Eyeiibriaa, Since (he problem is three dimensional, # vector analysis will be used SF = 0; Ty - 13.51 - 837k = 0 Fr, = (13.51 + 638k} KN Ans. EM, Mgt 4x (Ry + W)=0 took Ma+| 0 3 525|=0 : 135 0 6374 Hy = (-19.44 + 70.94 + 40.54} Nm Ans. Hose B,= {638K} KN septesents the acral force N, whereas Fy,= {13.51} XN is the shear foree, Also, the torsional moment is M4,> (405k) KN ‘m, and the bending moment is determined from its components M.s,= (-19.]i}kKN-m and M4,= {-70.9)} kN+m: ie, af, = Wate + M3,Promuene 6 335 PROBLEMS "TAL. ‘The cotamn is fee to the floor and is subjected 0 the fords shown. Determine the internal normal force, shear fore, and moment at pointe A and B. en 6a Prob. 7-4 72, The wodissubjected to the forces shown. Determine the internal normal force at points A, B, and C. 590 Probe 7-2 73. The forces sei on the shaft shown. Determine the internal normal lorce at points A, 8, and C. ‘ska 4k Peed 7-3 $4, "The shalt is supported y the two sincoth bearings A tnd B. The four pulleys atiached tothe shal are used fo transmit power to adjacent machinery. If the torques applied to the pulleys are at shown, celermine the internal forques at points G D,and E. 7 ‘The shal is supported by = journal bearing at and a thrist bearing et #. Determine the normal force, shear force, and moment at a section passing through (a) polat C, which is just to the right of the bering at A, and (2) point D, which is just to the loft of the 3C00N force,336 + CHAPTER 7 Internal Forcas 76, Determine the internal nomnal force and sheer ‘force, aad the bending moment in the beam at points © and D, Assume the support at 8 is a roller. Point C i Jecated just to the right of the 8 KN lozd. 77. Determine the shear force snd moment at points Cand D. s00eN seen #78, Determine the normal force, shear force, and moment at a section passing through point C. Assume the supportal A cin beapproximated by apin and B as ardile. Prob 7-8 7. Determine the normal force shearforce, and moment ata section passing through point D. Take w = (50.N/m, FAO. The beam AB will fai If the maximum internat moment at D reaches 800N-m or the normal force in member RC becomes 1500. Determine the largest load w ie can support, robs. 7-910 7A, Determine the shear force and moment acting at & section passing through point Cin the beam. Fron. HL,97:12 The boom DP ef the jib crane and the Specily separate coordinates x having an origin at the beam's left end and extending ‘0 regiors of the beam between concentrated forces and/or couple moments, or where there is no discontinuity of distributed loading, # Section the beam perpendicular to its axis at each distance x and draw the fiee-body diagram of one of the segments Be sure V and M are shown acting in their positive sense, in accorcance with, the sign convention given in Tig, 7-11. # ‘The shear V is obtained by summing forces perpendicular to the beam’s axis + The moment M is obtained by summing momeats about the sectioned end of the segment. Shear and Moment Diagrams, + Plot the shear ciagram (V versus a) and the moment diagram (bf versus 1). computed values of the fumetions describing ¥ and Ad are positive, the valves are plotted above the x axis, whereas negative values are plotted below the x axis + Gonerslly, it is convenient to plot the shear and bending- moment dliggrams directly below the free-body diagram of the beam. ‘Beam sign cenveotion Fy 7344 + CHAPTER 7 Internal Forces 2mexsim © sat a © = 25un asm ¥oay vas Boe= 5 A= 25x) | @ Fig 7-12 Draw the shear end beading-moment diagrams for the shaft shown in Fig. 7-12a."The support at A is a thrust Dearing and the support at Cis a journal beating, Soluiton Support Reaettons, The support reactions have been computed, as shown an the shaft’s free-body diagrain, Tig, 7-124. Skew ead Maniewt Fexctivas. The shaft is sectioned at an arbitrary distance x from point A, extending within the region AB, and the free- body diagram of the left segment fs shown in Fig, 7-12b,The unknowns Y and M are assumed f0 act in the positive serse on the right-hand face of the segment according to the established sign convention. ‘Why? Applying the equilibrium equations yields +12, = 0; Vv =25KN a) EM = 0; M = 2.52 Nom @ A free-body diagrant, for a left segment of the shaft extending a distance x within tho region BC fe shown ia Fig, 7-12c, As always, V and M are shown acting in the positive sease, Hence, i128, 2.SKN - SEN ¥ = V = -25 KN @) aM M+ SEN(x — 2m) - 25KN() = 0 M = (40 - 25x) Nem © Sheer end Moment Diegrems, When Egs & through 4 are plorted within the regions in which they are valid, the shear anc bending- moment diagrams shown in Fig, 7-12d are obtained, The shear diagram indicates that the intemal shear force {8 always 25 KN (positive) within shalt segment AB, Just to the cight of point B, the shear force changes sign and remains at a constent value of ~2.5 KN tbr segment BC, The moment diagram starts atzero, increases linearly to point B at x= 2m, where Mage = 2.5 KN(2m) = 5kN'm, and thereaiter decreases bask to zero. Jt is seen in Fig, 712d that te graph of the shear and moment dizgrams is discontinaous at points of concentrated force, i.e, points A,B,and C, For this reason, as stated earlier itis necessary fo express both the sheersand bending-moment functions separately for regions etween concentrated loads, It should be realized, however, that all Toeding iscoutinnittes are mathematical, arising from the ideslication of a concentrated force and couple moment. Physically, toads sre always applied over a finite area, and if the load variation could actually be accounted fox, the shear end bending moment diagrams would then be continuous over the shaft's eatire length,Secnon 7.2. Shear and Moment Equations and Diagrams - 345 Draw the shear and beadiag-moment diagrams for the beam shown in Fig. 13 _ Solution Supper Reactions. ‘The support reactions have been computed as shown on the beam’s iree-body diagram, Fig. 7-13c. Sheor eid Moment Fenctions. A free-body diagram tor 8 left segment of the beam having 2 length x is shown in Fig. 7-135. The distributed loacling acting on this segment has an intensity of fr at its end and is replaced by a resultant force afier the segment is wolated a « fee-body diagram. The mngntude ofthe resultant Fores ix equal to HxjGr) = fa% This force acts through the centroid of the distributed loading area, a distance Lx from the right end. Applying the two equations of equilibrium yields 412K, = 0 9-sx~V=0 wo EM = 0; @ Shear and Moment Diograws, The shear and bending-moment iagrams shown in Fig, 7-13c are obteined by potting Fast and 2 “The point of zero sheer can be found using Eq, tz 520m It-will be shown in Sec. 7.3 that this value of x happens to represent the point on the beam where the maximum moment occurs. Using Fa, Q), we have (3207 Mas = (x30 ~ cer) Nem sL.2 KN“ Mm, 1 I L — atanay Be 7s vex346 + CHAPTER 7 Internal Forces PROBLEMS For eachof the following prebleras establish the x axis with the origin atthe left side of the beam, and obtain the internal shear aud moment as a function of x. Use these results to plot the shear and moment lagrams. 7-42 Draw the shear and moment diagrams for the ‘beau (a) in terms oF the parameters shown; (b) set P — 600 Na = 51,5 = 7m, Proh 7-42 3. Draw the shear and moment diagrams for the cantilevered beam. 7a¥4, ‘The suspender ber supports the 3000- {~ 300.3) engine. Draw the shear and moment diagrams for the bar Pro HS 748. Draw the shear aud moment diagrams for the ‘beam (2) in terme af the parameters shown; (b) tet My = 500 Nom, L = 8m. 746. HZ = 91, the beam will fal when the meximum shear force if Vgge = SKN Or the maximum bending, moment is Mee = 2KN+m, Detemine the magnitude ‘My of the largest couple moments it will support. Prob, Ta8 Prob BASHG7-41. ‘The shaft ie sapooeted by a thrust bearing at A and ‘ajoumal bearing et B.If L = 10m, the shaft willfail when the maximum mommel is Myge = SKN» m. Determine the Jargest unifomn distributed load w the shaft will suppart, Prowueus + 247 ‘250, Draw the shear and moment diagreme forthe beau. Th AUOUOETET, po rob, 147 #148, Draw the shear and moment diagrems for the beam 7-49. Draw the shear and beading-maoment diagsauns for the beam. soNim ATE _ 5 ee ee Prob. ea pee Prob. 7-50) 751. Draw the stearand momen’ diagrams forthe beam. 250 TLL ) fee 24 ————_| Prob. 7-5 97-82, Dravitheshearand moreent diagrams or the beam, (UT a ash 753. Draw the shear and bending-moment ciagrams for each of the two segments af the compouad heen. 130 Nien340. + CHAPTER 7 Internal Forces 784, Draw the shear and bendinganoment diagrams for beam AEC. Note that there isa pin at B. Tt 75% WH=1.8m,che beam will ail when the mexinum sheer force 18 Vgay = 80.N, oF the maxigwum moment is ‘Meso = 121N «1 Determine the largest intensity w of the distributed foading it will support ZL I + Prob 54 758, Draw the shear and moment diagrams for the compound beam. The beam is pin-connected at and F. 67.56, Drawthe shearand moment diagrams forthe beam. — 7-58, The beam will fail when the wneximam intemal moment if Mpa. Detormine the position x of the concentrated force P and ils smalest magnitude that will use fare, rob, 7-53 759, Drow the shear and moment diagrams for Uhe-beamn, 41000 12 — 'am—| Peab 7-89Prosieus + 240 97.60, Draw the shear and bending-moment diagrams 7-63, Express the 3,» ¢ components of intemal Ioading for the beam. Iw the rod as a function ofy, where 0 = y <4, am {soon Prob. 7-63 *T-4, Determine the normal force, shear force, and ‘moment in the curved rod as @ function of 6. Prob, 7-6 Pe 7-64 762 Drow the shear and moment diegrsms for the 7-68 Fxpress the internal shear and moment components bbeasn (aj in terms oF the paremeters shown; (b) set acting in the rod ae a function of y, where 0 y <4 mn S00N,a=5mL- 12m x 41in Et Prob. 242350. + CHAPTER 7 Internal Forces *7,3 Relations between Distributed Load, Shear, and Moment In cases where a beam issubjected to several concentrated forces, couple moments, and distributed loads, the method of constructing the shear and bending-moment diagrams discussed in See. 72 may become quite tedious In this section a simpler method for constructing these diagrams is discussed—a method based on differential relations that exist between the load, shear, and bending moment. replaced by a resultant force AF w(Q)is uniform, k +158, = 0; ¥ — w(x) Ax — (V+ AY) =0 AV = w(x) dx LEM AM = ¥Ax — w(x)k(AxP become ee) Slope of _ Negative of distributed :| shear diagram oad intensity Bp a ae | Stope of eeram 7 Shear moment diagram Dividing by Ax and taking the Fimit as Ax—>0, these two equi Distributed Load. Consider the beam AD showa in Fig, 7-14a, which js subjected to an arbitrary ad w = w(x) and a series of concentrated forces snd couple moments. Inthe foliowing ciscussion, the distributed * load will be considered postive whea the loading acts downward as chown. A free-body Giagram for a smatl segment of the beani having a length 4.x is chosen at a point x along the beam which is not subjected to a concentrated force or couple moment, Fig. 7-145, Hence any results obtained will not apply at points of concentrated loading. The internal shear force and bending moment shown on the free-bocy diagram are assumed to act in the pouitive sense sccording to the estat convention, Note that both the sheer force and moment acting on the Tight-hand face must be increased by a small, finite amount cep the segment in equilibrium. The distributed toading bas been w(x) Ax that acts at a fractional distance fe(Ax] from the right end, where 0 < k <1 [for example, if 4]-Applying the equations of equilibrium, we have ished sign n order to —VAx — M+ w(x) Ax[e(Ax]] + (M+ Aa) = 0 (7-4) 02)Secnon 7.2. Relations between Distributed Load, Shea, and Moment + 35 “These two equations provide aconvenient meds for plotting te shear and moment diegrams for a beam, At a specific point in a beam, Hg. 7-1 states that the slope of the shear diagram is eqtal to the negative of the intensity of the disrdbnaed load, white Pq. 7-2states that the slope of the mount diagrant is equat to the shear. In particular, ifthe shear is equal to 2010, dfx = 0, smd therefore a pobu of 2er0 shear eorresponds ta a point of reaximums (or possibly mininin) moment. “Flquations 7-1 and7-2 may also be tevritea ia theform dV = w(x) dx and dit = V dv. Notivg that (x) dx and V dk represent differential areas, under the distribotedoading and shear diagrams, respectively, we can. integrate these areas between (wo paints B and! C along the beam,Fig, 142, and write Vee = — f w(a) ax oy Change _ Negative of area under inshear leading curve and aatge [ae co) Change _ Area under in moment ~ shear diagram Equation 7-3 states that tho change iu sheav behreen paints B ond Cis equal to the negative of the area under the disinbuted-tonding curve between these points. Similarly, from Eq. 7-4, the chmge it moment between B and C is equal to the area under the shear diagram witkint region BC. Because two integrations ae involved, first to determaine the change in shear, Eq. 7-3, then to determine the change in moment, Eq.7- 4,6 can state thet if the loading curve w = w(x) is a polynomial of degree n, then Y= V(x) will be a curve of degree m+ 1, and M = M(x) willbe a curve of degree n + 2 ‘As stated previously, the above equations do not apply at points where a conceniraied force of couple moment acis, These two Special cases teste discontinuities in the shear and moment dizgrams, and as a result, each deserves separate troatment. “This concrete beara is wed fo support the root. Hs she and the placement of steel reinjorzement within i can de deterrtaed ‘nce the shea: and moment diagrams have Deen established.352+ CHAPTER 7 Internal Forces cae vray ® Mo cig” vray o ips Bach outrigger aich as AB supporting this crane sats e8 a beam which is lived 10 the frame of the crace al one end and subjected to a force F on the footing at its olher end. A proper design requires thal the outrigger {sable to resis its maximum inlecnal shest ted moment. The shear andl moment iagraras indivaio thal the shear wall be coostant throughout ite lenglh and the ‘maximum moment oscurs at the support A, Force. A tree-body clagram of a small segment of the beam in Fig,7-14a, teken from under one of the forees,isshown in Hig, 7-15a, Here it can be seen. that foree equilibrium rocuires +158, = AV =-F (75) Thus, the change in shear is negative, so that on the shear diagram the shear will “jump” downward when’ F acts dowmvard on the beam Likewise, the jump ia shear (AV) is upward when F acts upward. Couple Moment, If we remove 2 segiment of the beam in Fig, 7—14e that is located at the couple moment, the free-body diagram shown in Fig. 7~156 ‘results To this case lotting Ax — 0, moment equilibrium requizes L431 =0, AM = My . (7-6) Thus, the change i motient és positive, ot the moment diagram will jump" upward if Mg is clockvise, Likessiso, the jump 4M is downward ‘when Ma is counterclockwise, The examples whichfollow ilustrate applicetion of the above equations for the construction of the shear anid moment diagrema After working through these examples, {fis recommenced that Examples 7-7 and 7-8 bbe solved using this method, > ‘The slope of the shear diagram js equal to the negative of the intensity of the distributed loading, where positive distributed loading is downward, i, d/dx = w(x). = Ifa concentrated force acts downward on the besm, the shear will jump downward by the amount of the force, + The change in the shear AV between two points is equal to the negative of the area under the disiributed-loading curve between the points, » The slope of the moment diagram is equal to the shear, Le., ditfax =v. . © The change in the moment AMF between two points is equal to the area uhder the shear diagram between the two points. * Ifa clockivise couple moment acts on the beam, the shear will not be affected, however, the moment diegram will jump upward by the amount ofthe moment. 2 Points of zero shear cepresent points of maximtunt oF miniraum moment since dM/dx = 0.Section 7.2 Relations between Distributed Load, Shear, and Moment + 353 Draw the shear and moment diagrams for the beam skown in Fig. H6a, Sogn 20Nim lon worn f Fig 736 a(n) shore'=0 ~ Linesy deenasng slope 710 TO topes +1000 @ Sobstion Suppori Zeautions, The reactions at the fixed support have been calculated: and are shown on the free-body diagram of the beam, Fig. 7-166. Shear Bagram. ‘The shear at the end points is plotted first, Fig. 7-i6c. From the sign coavention, Fig. 741, ¥ ~ +1000 at x = 0 and V = Oatx = 2, Since dVidy = —w = 300. straight, negative stoping line camnects the end points. Moment Diagram. From our sign convention, Fig. 711, the moments at the beam’s end points, M = ~1000 atx Dand Af ~ 0 atx = 2, are plotted firsi, Hig. t-167. Successive values of shear taken from the shear diagram, Fig. 7-16c, indiente that the slopedM /dx = V of the moment diagram, Fig. 7-i6d, is always positive yet tineariy decreasing txom diidx = 10001 x = Oto dia = O aly = 2, Ths, due to the integrations, w a constant yields V a sleping line (first degree curve) and Af a parabola (second-degree curve}.354 + CHAPTER? Internal Forces ta) Mn} mr fo D ay nme LA svn rs ip ta Draw the shear and moment diagrams for the cantilevered beam shown in Fig. 7-17. Sotution Support Reactions, The reactions at the fixed support have boon cafculated and are shown ou the fcee-body dlagrant of ihe beam, Fig. 7-17. Shear Siagrans, Using the established sign convention, Fig. 7-11, the shear at the ends of the beam is ploited first; ie,, x 0, V — +1080; X= 2,V = +600, Fig Hi7e. . Since the uniform distsbated load is downward and constaut, the slope of the shear disgram is dVidx = —w = —400 for 0 =x < 1.2 as indicated. “The magnitude of shear al x = 1.2 Ss V = +600, This can be determined by first fiading the erea under the load clagram between x ~ Q and x - 1.20This represents the change in shear. That io, AV = —fw(x) dy = —400(12) = 480, Thns Vlyei2 = ¥ leno + (-480) = 1080 — 480 = 60). Also, we can obtain this value by using the method of sections, Fig. 7-17e, where for equilibrium V ~ +600. Since the load between 1,2 3, jl > [ om Lene! 1m In 025.n Pooh 777478. Tac beam will fail when thé maximum momentis ae = S0KN -ra.07 the muximum shea is Verge = 5 KN, ‘Determine the largest distributed load w the beam wall Promeus + 359 7-81, ‘The boom consists of two segments piaconuceted a B. Draw the shear aud moment diagrams for the bearn. sora rox - » 210Nin aT TT, | fh. sm—24—— 6 4 in — spon} Pro rob. 7-81 799. ‘The beam consists of two segments pin connected aC. Draw the shear and momeat diagrams for the beam. 70m 150; jt ita BE eee oe | Prob. 1-79 7-8). Draw the shear and moment disgrams for the been. oki 7.82. Draw the shear and moment dingrams for the boom 26m 2kNlee Stel, « Lo} Prob. 7-82 7-83, Draw the shear and coment diagrams for the beam, Prob, 9-83 7-84, Draw the shear and morment diagrams for the beara,360 + CHAPTER 7 Internal Forces 7-45, Draw the shear and moment diagcams for the 7487. Draw the shes and moment diagrams for the bean. fe Po beam. 3k 3k Prob }-87 7-86, Draw the shear and moment diagiams for the *7.88, Draw the sear and moment ckagrams fot the beam. weet 1s . an section, which cuts eable BC, Fig, 7-21c, | (t2Me = 9; A,(12m) — 12KN(8m) + 4KN(Sm) = 6 3m : «= By = 633 kN { e Tre 005 One — 6.33 KN = 0 T2KN 4 EN = Tye sin Bae Fig. it | Bre = S16" Tac = 102 KN Ars.Secrow 7.4. Cables 363 tain aww ain Tee S16 Boo < 7 653 a FU, Ps wt Tas ial Teo “ © ® Proceeding now to aralyze the equillbrium of points 4, Cand Ein sequence, we have Poist A, (Fig. 721d) SEF, = 05 Tay 605 Gas — 8.33 KN — 0 Aer, =O —Taa Sin Ban + 12KN =O Ban — 622° Tag ~ 13.6 Ans. iar C (Fig, 7 he) DR = 05 atEn, Te tos Bcp ~ 10.2c08 51.6" KN = 9 Tep sin Gp + 102 sin S1.6°KN — 15 KN = 0 Ben = 479" Top = 944 Ans ae B. (Fig. 7217) EF = Or 633 KN — Tgp ces gp = 0 HeH=0 KN Typ sin dyy =0 Oxo = ST Tip 1,8 kN Ans, By comperison, the mastmum cable fonsion is in segment AB since thissegment has (he greatest slope (9) and il is sequined that for any left-hand cable segment the horizontal component T'cos 9 = A, (a constant), Also, since tho slope angles thai the cable segments make with the herizoutal have now been determined, It ts possible 10 determine the sags yp and yp, Fig. 7-21a, using trigonometry,364 CHAPTER 7 Internal Forces Cable Subjected to a Distributed Load. Coasider the weightless cable shown in Fig, 7-22¢, which is subjected to a lozding function wy = W(x} as meastired in the x direction. The free-body diagram of a small segment of the cable having a length As is shown in Fg. 7-226. Since the tensile force in the cable changes continuously in both megaitude and direction along the cable's length, this change is denotedon the free-body diagram by AT. The distributed load is represented by its resultant moan #49-4force w(x) (Az), which acts al a fractional distance K(A.x) from point Q, where 0 < £ < L.Applying the equations of equilibrium yields BERG Pees d+ (74 AT} cos(0 + 40} =0 41ER,=0; —T sind — w(x)(Ax) + (T + AT) sin(o + 48) {FEM = 0; w(x)(Ax)k(Ax) —Teose Ay + Tsing Ax = 0 Dividing cach of those equations by A.x and taking the limit as Ax —> 0, and hence Ay-0, A0—> 0, and AT 0, we obtain aC cos 9 oe om ar sing EAD) wey 0 (8) dy = ane 8 Tategrating Bq, 7-7, we have T cas = constant = Fy (10) ‘Hore Fy represonts the horizontal component of tensile force at any polar along the cable. Integrating Ea. 7-8 gives Tsing = puoae 4) Dividing Eq. 7111 by Eq. 7-10 eliminates 7, Theo, using Bq.7-9, we cat obtain the slope dy 1 wag 2 a fmonas Performing a second integration yields (7-12) ‘This equation is used to determine the curva for the cable, y = f(x). ‘The horizontal force component Fy and the two constants, say C, and C,, restiting from the integration are determined by applying the boundary conditions for the cable. Secon 7.4 Cables + 365 ‘The cable and suspenders are wed to suppor the uniform lead of aga pipe which cerostes the river,256 + CHAPTER 7 Internal Forces ‘The cable of a suspension tridge supports half of the uniform road surface between the two columns at A and B,3s shown in Fig. 7-230. AE this distributed loacing is wp, determine the maximum force developed in the eable and the eable’srequired length. The epen leagth Z and, sag h arc known. By. 729 solution We can determine the unknowns ia the problem by fint finding the cae that defines the shape of the cable by using Fy, 7-12. For reusons of symmetry, the origin of coordinates has been placed at the cable's center. Noting that w() = wo, we have raf fone Performing the two integrations gives . 1 (8 ) ~E(M tare 1 7a torre 0 “The constakts of integration may be determined by using the boundary conditions y= at x= 0 aud dyjdx =O at ¢=0. Substitating into Eq. 1 yields Cy = C; = 0."the curve then becomes y* oR! @),by using the boundary condition y = i at x = L/2. Thus, wel? fan Ee ® ‘Therefore, Eq. 2 becomes 4h re ® ‘Since Fi is known, the tension in the cable may be determined using Fg, 710, written as 7 = Fiy/cos 6. For 0 0 F,);inatoed,itwill begin tostide ‘with increasing speed, Fig. 8-20, The drop made ia the frictional force magnitude, from F, (static) to F, (kinetic), can be explained by again examining the surfaces of contact, Fig, §-2b. Here it is scet that when P > Fy then F has the capacity to sticar olf the peaks al the cottact surfaces and cause the black ta “lift” somewehat out ofits settled position and“ride* on top ofthese peaks. Oace the block begins to slide, high local temperatures at the points of contact cause momentary adhesion (welding) of these points. The continued shearing of these welds is tie dominant mechanism cresting friction. Since the resultant contact forces AR, are aligned slightly mare tn the vertical dicection than before, they thereby contribute sitallerfrictional components, AF, that when the irtegalarities ‘are meshed. Experimenss with siding biacks indicate that the magnitude of the resaltant frictional force F's directly proportional to the magnitude of (Ge resultant normal foWe-N, This may be expressed mathematically as [Aan a ‘Here the constant of proportionality, up, 1s called the eoefficiont of kinetic friction. Typical values for wy are approximately 25 percent smafter than ‘those listed in Table 81 for s, ‘As shown fa Fig. &-Za,in thls casc, the resultant Ry bes a line of action defined by #y. This angle is referted 10 as the angle of kinedc fiietion, ‘here (e4¥) N By comparison, = dy. ‘The above effects regarding friction can be summarized by reference to the graph ia Fig. 8-3, which shows the variation of the frictional force F versus the applied load P, Here the frictional force Is categorized in three different ways: namely, F is a stedie-fictional force if equilibrium is maintained; F is a Koniting statte.ftetional force F, when it reaches a maximum value needed to maintain cquilibrium;and faatty, Fis termed a kinetic frictional force F, when sliding occurs at the contacting surface. ‘Notice also from the graph that for very large ‘aiues of P or for high speces, because of actodynamic effects, #, aad likewise ja, begla to decrease.Srerion 8.2. Problems Involving Dry Frltton Characteristics of Dry Friction, Asa reaul of experiments thal pertain to the foregoing discussion, the following rules which apply to bodies subjected to éry friction may be stated. + The frictional fores acts ‘agent to the contacting surfaces in a direction opposed 10 the relative mtion or tetdency for mation of one surface against anoilrer. + The maxinnim steti frictional foxes F, that can be developed isinde- peadent of the area of contaci, provided the normal pressure fs not very low nor greet enough to severely deform or crush the contact- ing surfaces of the bodies. + The maximum static frictional foree is generally greater than the inetic frictional force for any 10 surfaces of contact. However, if one of the bodiesis moving with a very fow velocity over the surface of another, F, becomes approximately equal (0 Ty i jy * Japs + Whea stipping at the surface of contact is about ‘o occur, the maxi- rum static frictions! force is proportional to the normal force, elt thet = py. + When slipping at the surface ef coatact fs occtem ig, the Kinetic trie- tional force is proportional to the normal force, sub thal Fi, = pV. 383 in equilibrium when it iecubjected to. eystem of forces that includes the effect of friction, the force system must satisfy not only the equations of equitibrium bat also the lews thet govere the frictional forces ‘Types of Friction Problems. In general, there are thice typos of mechanics problems involving dry friction. They can eastly be classified once the free-body diagrams are drewa and the totel aumber of unknowns are identified and compared with the total aumber of available equiliorium equations Each type af problem will now be explained end illustrated graphically by examples In all these cases the geometry and dimensions for the problem are assumed to be koown.34 CHAPTER 8 Friction Egquilibsium, Problomsin this cetegory are strictly equilibrium problems ‘shichrequize te fotal number of unknowns o be equal io the roial tuonber of available equibibritan equations, Once the frictional farces are éetermined from the valution, however, their numerical velues must be checked to be sure they satisfy the inequality Fs 42,.V; otherwise, slipping will occur and the body will not remain in equilibrium. A problem of this type is shown in Fig. 8-4a, Here we aust determine the frictional forces at A and C to check it the equilibriun position of the two-member frame car be nraintained. Ifthe bars are uniform and have knawn weights of 100 N each, thea the free-body diagrams arc as showa in Fig, 8-4b. There ore six uaknown ferce components whic can be determined sérfcwy from the six equilibrium equations (three for each member). Once Fy, Ns, Fe, and Ne are detormined, shen the bars will remcin én equilibrium provided Fg = O3N, and Fe % O.5N, aresuttsfied, Tnpending Motion al All Points. In this case the ‘oral mmber of etkrowns will equai the total nuanber of available equilibrivon equations plus the ‘o1al number of available frictional equations, F = nN. in particular, if motion is impending at the points of conteet, then F, = Ns whereas if the body is slipping, thon F, = j4,iN. For examiple, comer the problem of finding the smallest angle @ at which the 100-N bar in Fig. 8-5a can be placed against the wall without slipping, The free-body diagram is, shown in Pig. 8-Sk. Here there are five unknowns: Eq, Nia, Fg, Ng, 0. For the solution there are éhree equilibrium equations and fvo stati frictional equations which apply at bot paints of contact, so that F, = 0.3N4 and Fa ~ O4Ng. Fiy8-sSeen 8.2 Problems involving Dry Friction + 385 Jwpendiug Motion af Soar: Points, Here the fotal number of unknowns will be tess thant the number of avaitabte equitibrium equations plus the totat mnuaber of frictional equations or conditional equations for fipping. As a result, soverad possibilities for motion or impencing motion will exist and the problem will involve a determination of the kind of motion which actually Gocus, For example, consider the two-member frame shown in Fig, 8-6a.In this problem we wisls to determine the aorizontal force P needed (oceuse movement If eacit member has a weight of LOD N, then the free-borly dingcams are as shown in Fig. 8-65. There are seven unknowns: Nas Fas Nex Fey Bes By, P. For a anique solution we must satisfy the six ‘equilibrium equations (three for each member) and only one of two postible static frictional equatiors. This meark that as P increases it will either cause slipping at A and no slipping at C,0 that Fy = 0.3Nq and Fo = O5iNc; or slipping occurs at C and no stipping zt A, in which case Fe = 05Ne and Fy = 03N,. The actual situation can be detenrined by calculating P for each case and thea choosing the case for which Pis sradler. ‘Win both cases thesame value for P is calculated, whiica in practice would be highly improbable, then slipping at bath points occurs simultancously: i.e, the seven snaknowns will satisly eight equations, Consider pushing on tho uniform ecate that las @ weighl TY and sts on the rough surface. As shown on the frst e-Lody diegromy, ifthe magnitude of P ts sul, the crate will remain in equilibrium. Ag P increases the erate wil elther be on ihe verge f sipping on the surtace (= j,1¥), or Uf the sutaze is very rough (large a) then he sesullact noumat force will shift to the eoaner, x = b/2,a8 shown on the second (Gee body diagrams and the evate will ip over. The rate hasa greater chante of ipoing ifP copied ata preater height Aabove thesurface,orif the crate’ width issmller. peepee] o386 CHAPTER @ Friction Equllibrium Versus Frictional Equations. It was stated carlier that the frictional force alvays acts s0 as toeither oppose the relative motion or impede the motion of # body orer its contacting surface. Realize, however, that we can asmune the sense of the frictional force in problems which requite F tobe an “equilibrium force” and satisfy the inequality F < j1,N. ‘The carrectsense is made known afer solving the equations of equilibrium for F-For example, if Fi a negative scalar the sense of Fis the reverse of that which was assumed. This convenience of assuming the sense of F is possible because the equilibrium equations equate to zero the contponents of vectors actingin the same dircetion. In cases where the frictional equation F = als nsediin thesolution of a problem, however, the convenience of assunring the sense of Fis fas, since the frictional equation relates only the magnitudes of two perpendicular vectors. Consequently, F mtust ahvays be shown acting wilh ils correct sense on Ihe Iree-body diagram whenever the frictional equation is used for the sohition of a problem. PROCEDURE FOR ANALYSIS Equilibrium problems involving dry frietion can be solved using the following procedure. Free-Body Diagrams, + Drav thenocossary free body diograms, and unless itisstated in the problem that impending motion of slipping occurs, afvays show the frictional forces as unknowns;i.e.,do not arstme F = nN. ‘+ Determine the number of unknowrs and compare this with the number of available equititrium equations # if there are moce unknowns than equations of equilibrium, It will bbe necessary to apply the frictional equation at some, if not all, poinis of contact ‘0 obtain the extra equations nocded for a complete sojution. + Ifthe equation F — pis to be used, it will be nocessery 10 show ¥ zeting in the proper direction on the free-bodly dlagrans, Equations of Equttibrinm and srictiox, * Apply the equations of equilibrium and the necessary frietional equations (or conditional equations i ippingis possible) and solve for the unknowns, «Ifthe problem involves a three-dimeasjanal force system stch that it becomes difficult to obtein the force components or the necessary moment arms, apply the equations of equilitrium using Cartesian vectors.Secnon 82. Problems Involving ry Friction + ‘The uniform crate shown in Fig. 8a has a mass of 20 kg, Ifa force P~80N is applicd to the ctate, determine if it remains in equilibrium, The coefficient of static friction is = 0.3. Solution Free-Body Diagrem As shown in Fig, 87b, the resutiant normal fotco Nc must act a distance.x from the ctate’s center line in order to counteract the tipping effect caused by P. There are tizee unkown, F, No, and x, which can be determined strictly from the three equations of equilibriam, Equations of Eguitibriuas LER, = 6; 80.05 30°N— Fm 0 +438, ~80.sin 30°N + Ne - 1962N = 0 [+E Mo = 0; 80 sin 30° N(O.4m) — 80.c08 30° N(O2 m) + Nox) =0 Solving, Fr O3N Ne > 236N x = ~0,00908 m = —9.08 mm Since xis negative it indicates the resultant normai force acts (slighily) to the /eft of the orate’s center fine. No tipping will occur since = 5 0.4m, Also the maxiinaen frictional force witich can be developed at the surface of contact i8 Fig 0.3(236 N) = 70.8 N. Since F = 693 <70.8N, tho ciate will not slip, although it is very close to doing 0. 307 eo39@ + CHAPTER ® Friction Teis observed that when the bed of the dump truck is raised to an angle of = 25° the vending machines begin to slide off the bed, Fig, 8-Ba. Determine the static coefficient of friction between them and the surface of the truck. Solutton An idealized model of a vending machine resting on the bed of the truck is shown in Fig. 8°85. The dimensions have heen measured and the ceater of gravity has been locaied. We will essume that the machine weighs W. Free-Body Diagram. Asshown in Mig. 8-8¢, the dimension x is used. to locate the position of the resultant normal force N. There are four unknowns, NF, jug) and x. Equations of Eqaitibriam, Wsin25°- F =0 ay N ~ Weos2s° = 0 Q -W sin9 (05m) + W cos 0(x)~0 @) Since slipping impends at @ = 25*, using the first two equations, we hare Be pis W sin 25° = pp (W cos 25") 1B, = tan 28° = 0.466 Ans. ‘The angle of 0 = 25° is referred to as the angle of repose, and by comparisony‘it is equal to the angle of static friction 0 = $,. Notice from the calCulation that #isindependent of the weight ofthe vending machine, and so knowing 6 provides a convenient methed for determining the voelticient of static Fiction. ‘rom Eo. 3, with # = 2%, we find x ~ 0.233 m, Since 0.233 m < OS m, indeed the vending machine will slip before it ean tip as observed in Fig. 8-81Srerion 82 Problems Involving Dry Felon + 389 “The uniform rod having « weight W and length / is supported at its ends against the surface at A and B in Fig §-Sa. Hf the rod is on the yerge of slipping when @ = 30°, determine the cveificient of static friction g, at A and B, Neglect the thickness of the rod for the calculation, | Sotstion Fres-Bodly Diegeout. As shown in Fig. 8-9b, there are five unknowns: F4, Nyy Fp, Np, and jy, These ean be determined from the ‘taree equilibrun equations and tve frictional equations applied at points A and B.7The frictional ‘oroes must be drawn with their correet sense so that they cppose the tendency for motion of the sod. Why? (Refer to p. 386.) Equations of Frtestou end Bquittbctem, Writ equations, Fat Fy = asta Fy tN ‘Using theve rosults and applying the equations of equilibriam yields ABER, = 0; usNa + weNp cas30° ~ Npsin 30° a | TIBBRG Han We Ryooss0" + wtp sage = @ (+3M, = 0; Nol — (5 )eosa0e =0 @ ™ | | | i | | ® Ng = 0.4330 W | Fits | From Eqs.1 and 2, BN, | Ns By division, 92168 W (03750 Wy, 16259 W ~ (9.2165 Wty 0.625041, ~ 0.2165p3 = 02165 ~ 0375p, #2 469u,11=0 Solving for the smallest root, by = 01228 Ans,390 + CHAPTER ® Friction ‘The concrete pipes are stacked in tie yard as shown in Fig. 8-100. Determine the minimum coefficient of static friction at cacia point of ‘contact so that the pile does not collapse. Solution Feee-bady Diagrams Recognize that the coefficient of staiie fri betivcen two pipes at A and B, and botween a pipe and the ground, at will be different since the contacting surfaces are different. We will isume each pipe has an outer radius r and weight W. The froe-body diagrams for two of the pipes are shown ia Fig, 8-10b,"There arc six unknowns, Ny, Fa, Np Fn No, Fe. (Note that when collaase is about to occur the normal force at D is zero.) Since only the six equations of equilibrium are necessary to obtain the unknowns, the sonsc of direction of the frictional forces can be verified from the sotution. Equations of Equilibrima, For tae top pipe we have GE By = 0; ~Fyir) + Fy) = OF F SEF, = 0; Nysin 8° — Foos30® — Nysin20° + Peos3 -0 | Na=Np=N | +1EK, = 0; 2Ne0s30° + 2F sin 30 - W = 0 ay For the bottom pips, sing Fy = F and Ny = N, we have, WEMy =O; Refe) PU) =O) Fen F DUR = —Nsin3 + Foos3h + F = @ ATEH = 0 No W = N cos 30° — F sin 30° = 0 @ From Eq.2, F = 0.2679, so that between the pipes i FP (esdaia = 59 * 0.268 Ans, Using this raul in Fg 1. | N05 | From Fq.3, Ne W ~ (05 W) cos 30° — 02679 (05 1) sin 30° = 0 | Ne= 15 W. ‘Atthe ground, the smallest required coelfcient of siti fiction would be . F _ 0267905 W) (ain =e sw 0898 ‘Ans. Hence a greater coctiicient of static friction is required betwteon the pipes than thet réquiredat the ground;ard so itistikely that itslipping ‘would occur between the pipes the bottom two pipes would roll away fcom one enother without slipping as the top pipe falls downward.Section 82 members and the thickness of the post. Sotution Hree-Hody Diagredws, The free-body diagram of beam AB is shown in Fig. 8-115. Applying 24f, = 0, we obtain Ny = 400N. This result is shown om the free-body diagram of the post, Fig. &11e. Referring to this member, the four unknowns Fp, P, fc, and Ne ate determined from the three equations af equilibrium and ane frietional equation applied either al B or C. Eguctions of Equitibrlun and Brtetion. UR, = 0; P-Fy-Fe=9 a MERA G No —400N = 0 @ WEMe~ 0; —P(O25 m) + Fyx(dm) = 0 © (Cost Stips Cals #7 8) This requires Fo weNe and Fg = Ng: Fa = 0.2(400 N) = 80N Using this result and solving Eqs. 1 through 3, we obtain P= 320N Fo = 240N No = 400N Since Fo = 240N > acNo = 0.5(00N)} = 200N, the other ease of movement must be investigated. (Cox Slips Oaly af Cy Here Fy ppp an Fem eles Fo 05.Ne o Solving Eqs 4 through 4 yields P= 267N Ans. Ne = 4008 Fe = 200N Ey = 66.7N ‘Obriously this case occurs fist.since i requites » smutfer value for P. Problems Involving Dry Frictlon + 39% re A j— = Ki Fae pa] “4 Na = 490N_ ©392 + CHAPTER 8 Friction Determine the normal force P that nmust be exerted on the rack to begin pushing the 100-kg pipe shown in Fig, 8-120 up the 29° incline, ‘The coefficients of static friction al the points of contact ate (da = 045, and (1,)p = 04, Selution ey 2 Asshown in Fig. 8126, the rack must exert a force P on the pipe dus to force equilibrium iu the x direction, Thee are fout unknowns P, Fa, Na, and Fe acting on the pipe Fig. &-!2e, ‘These can be determained from the tee equations of equilibrium and one frictional equation, which apply either at Aor B. Atslipping begins to occur only af B, the pipe will begin to roll up the incline; wheress if slipping occurs only at A, the pipe will begin to slide up the incline. Here we must nd Np. ie (for Pig, 8? Fegurcetenns of Equtiibatsns ened Fei +ABR, = 0; rat P - 98tsin 20°N = 0 @ FRE, = 05 Wa '— Fy — 981 cor 20°N @ (42Mo= 0; Fs(400mm) ~ F,(400 mm) = @ (Pipe Rolls np Tucfine.) Tn this case Fy O,15Ny and (Ele = (dass Fy = OAP @) ‘The direction of the frictional force at B must be specified correctly. ‘Why? Since the spoo! is being forced up the incline, ,, acts downward 10 prevent any dockwse rolling motion of the pipe, Fig, 8-12c. Solving Eqs. 1 throug 4, we have Na IGN F,=24N Fy=Q4N P= SSON ‘The sssumption regarding no slipping at A should be checked. 4 Ex (u)aNe 2AN 5 O.15(16N) = 172N ‘The inequality ¢oes ot apply,and therefore slipping occurs at A and not at B. Hence, the other case of motion will occur. juz.) Tm this case, P = O.4Np and (Pie Stides ng Cla = Ct) Nas Fa= O15, @) Solving Eds 1 through 3 and 5 yields Ny= ISSN Fy=1GN Fy =163N P=498N Ans. “The validity of the solution (? = 498N) can be checked by testing the assumption tht indeed no slipping occurs at B. Fa = (as)aPi GN <0498N) ~ 199N (chock)+ 39a PROBLEMS 441. The mine car and its contents have a total mass of GMg and aceater of gravity at G. Ifthe coefficient of static fiction beween the wheeis api the wacks is pz = 04 whon the Wheels are locked, find the normal force acting, on the front wheels at B and the rear wheels at A when the brakes at both A and B are locked Does the car move? }-asm-| tere Probst B If the Horizontal force P = 80 N, deterntine the normal and frictionat forces acting on te 300-N (-> 90-kg) 03, ug = 02. 83, The unifomm pole has 8 weight of 150 N(~ 15 kg) and a length of 7.8m. If it is placed against tre smooth ‘wall and on the rough floor in the postion d = 3m, will it remain in this position when it is released? The soeflicient of stati fiction is; ~ 03, *84, The usiform pole has a weight of 150 (~ 15 ke) and a iengti of 7.8m. Determine the maximum distance 4 itcan be placed irom the smooth wall and not slip. The Coeflicient ofctaticfriction between thefloor andthe pole ing” 03, Probe 8-34 BS. The union 100N (= 10-kg) ladder resis on the rovgh floor for which the coefficient of static friction is 4, * (8 and against the smooth wall at B. Determine the botizoatel force P the mas must exert onthe ladder in order 10 cate it 19 move, 86, ‘The uniform 100-N (~ 10-kg) ladder rests on the rough floor for which the cocfficient of static tiction is #, = 04 and against the smooth wall at B. Detenmie the Inorirontal force P the man rust exert on the adder inorder 46 case it to move,208 + CHAPTER 8 Friction 8-7. An auiel foe of 7 = 4000 N is applisd to the bar, if the Coefticient of static friction at the jaws C and D is a, > 05, determine the smallest normal force that the serew at A mus; exert om the arzoath surface of the inks at Band Cin order to hold the bar stationary. The inks ae pinconnected a: F and G. Pro5-1 788. The winch on the ruck s used to hots the gasbege bin onto he bedol ibe truck. the loaded bin tasa weignt (of 40000 N m= a tonne) and center of gravity at G, detecmioe the force in the enble apeded to begin te Hi The cceficients of sate frition at A and B are yy, 03 and Hy = 02, respectively. Neglee: she belt of the support 4, ron 85 89, The San ladder has a uniform weight of 400 N (#40 kg) and rests against the smooth walt at B.If the Coefficient of static friction at A is u, = G4, determine if the ladder will slip. Take 4 = 60° 8410. The Lock brake is used to stop the whee! from, soteting when the wheel is subjected to a couple moment ‘Mp. If the coefiiient of static fiction betweea the wheel and the block is y., determine the smallest force P that should be epplied. B11. Show thst the bralze fa Prob, 8-10 jo self Yocking, 1 PO, provided Ufc = iy 812, Solve Prob. 10 if the couple moment My is applied counterciocevtise Prods. 8-108 8413. The block brake consis of a pin-connected leve and ftictiou block at B. The coafiicieut of static fretion between the mbeel ead the lever is py = 0.3, anda torque (of 51N- mis applied t0 the wheel, Determine if the brak: can hold the wheal stationary when the force applied t the lover i (a) P = 30N, (b) P = 70N. S44. Solve Prob. 8-13 if the S-A+m torque is applic. counter clackwiee,BAS, The tmcio: basa weight of 22 500 N (-> 2250 kg) with center of gravity at G. The driving traction Is developed at the year wheels B,while the front wheels at ‘A are free ta roll, Ifthe enetficient of stetic friction between the wheols ot B and the ground is 4, = OS, Aetermice if t is porsble to pull at P = 000 N without ceuing the wheels at B to skp or the front wheels at 4 to lift off the ground, Prob 45 B16, The car bas @ n1085 of 1.6 Mg and center of mass at G. If the coefficient of static fricion between the shoulder of the road and the tres is 4, = 0.4, datermine te greatest Sope 9 the shoulder can have without causing the car to sip or tip over if the car travels along the shoulder at eonstent velocity. Prob, 8:36 Proaiens + 395) SALT. The drum has a weight of 500 1 (= 50 kg) and rests on the floor for whieh the coefficient of staticitietion itu, = 06. Ie = 06 m and 6 = 0.9 m, determine tre smallest magnitude of the force P that will cause impending motioa of the drum. 848. ‘The drum has a weight of $00 N (= 50 ke) aad restson the Qoor for whieh the evetficient ofstticftiction is 4 = 05. ie = 09m and «= 1.2m, detemfne the smallest magnitude of the force P that will cause impending otic of the dram. Prov 78 B19, "The coeifieient of static friction between the shoes at A and B of the tongs and the pallet is ui = 0.5, and between the pallet and the floor xy = 0.4. If¢ horizontal towing foree of P ~ 300 N js applied to the tongs, determine the ‘argest mass that can be towed.396 + CHAPTER 8 Friction °820, “The pipe is hoisted using the tongs. If the eoaffiient of static friction at A anc B is 7, deter the smallest disension b so thet any pipe of Alaneter d can be lifted. Prob, 20 21. Determine the mszimum weight W the man can Tif with coustent velocity using the pulley system, without and then withthe “leading block” or putley et A.The man has a weight of 800 N (= 80kg) and the coefficient of static fiction beteen his feet and the grounds 1, = OS. @ » Prob. 8-24 | 822. The uniform dresser has a weight of360.N (36) | aud cests on a fle Floar for which ji, = 025. 1 the may pushes on it in the horizontal diection 0 ~ O°, determine the smallest magnitude of force F needed to move the dresser. Als, ifthe man has a weight of 600. (> 80 kg), determine the sinalestcozffcient of static ‘rition between Ihc hees and the floor so that he doesnt sip 82% The uniform dresser hat aweight Of 360.N (2-36 kg) and rests en a fle floor for which 4 ~ 0:25. 1f the man pistes on it fo the direction 6 = 30°, determine the smallest anagnitule of force F needed 10 move the dresser. Also, ite man has # weight of 600 N (~ 80%), Actermice the smsilest Yoofficioal of static fiction between his shoes and the Hoor so that ke does not slip, Prot 2203 “E74. The kg oyfinder is suspended from (wo equal lenggh cords. The end of each cord isattached toa ring ot negligible mass, which passes alonga horizontal shat. f the coefficient of sate friction between exch ring and the shat fsa, ~ 05,deternine the greatest distance d by which the rings can be separated and stil support de oylinder, Pa 600 ae Prob 524825 The board con be adjusted vertically by iting it up enc siding tesmooth pin A along the vertical guide G. When placed horizontally the botiom C then bears alorg the erige of the puide, where 12, = O4. Determine the largest dimension d which will support eny applied Fore: F without causiag the board to slip downward. 4 = “ion 20:0 826 The homogeneous semicylindar hag a mass m ard mass center al G. Deiermine the largest angle @ of the incfined plane upon which it ests so that it does cot sip donn the plane. The coofficient of static friction between, the plane end tc eylinder ie 4, = 0.3, Also, what is the ange @ for this exse? Prob, 26 Proms 307 827. CarA hasa mass of 14 Mg aud mass center al G. Tear B exerts a horizontal force on A of2 KN, determine if this foxe is greet enough fo move car A. The coeificlents of siniicand kinetic friction between the tires and the road are y= 0.5 ond py = 035, Assume D's bumper is seuooth. ee oa Tas Prob. 5-27 #808, A 3S-he disk rests on an inclined surface for which jx, = 0.2. Determine the mazimum vertical force Phat maybe applied to link AB without causing the disk. to sipatc. rab, 5-28 829. The crate has a weight W aad the cvofiicont of static Iiction af the suriace is 42, = 03. Determine the orientation of the cord and the smallest possible force P ‘that has to be applied te the cord so that the crate i on tke verge of moving, Prob, 829398 + CHAPTER ® Friction 8-30, The 4000-N (-> 400-kg) concrete pipe Is being Towered from the truck bed when it is in the position shown, If the coefficient of static friction at the points of support A and B is p, = Od, deterraine where it begins toslip fist. at A or Byer both at A and 3. Prob, 8-36 8.31, “The friction paw is pinned at 4 and rests agsinst the wheel at B, [tallow ireedom of movement when the ‘whee! is rotating ccuntereiockwise about C. Clodewise rotation is prevented duo 10 friction of tho pawl which (ends 10 bind the wheel If Gi.)p = 06, determine the design angle 9 which will prevent clockwise motion for any value cf applied moment M. Hn: Neglect te weight of tho pawl 20 that it becomes & twe-foroe member. 132. The semieylinder of mass m and radius rItes on tie rough Inclined plane for which = 10° anc te coefficient of satic friction is y, = 0:3. Detecmiue if the semieylinder slides dewa the plane, aad if not, find the angle of tip @ of its base AB. 832, ‘The somicylinder of mass nt and radius r fies on the rough inclined plane. If the inclination = 15%, determine the smalies! coefbicient af stati friction Which vill prevent the somioylinder frora slipping, 8 robs. 8-3283 B34, “The door brace AB is to be designed to preven opening the docx. If the brece forms 2 pin connection wader the decrknob and the coofficient of static friction with the Mloor is, = 0, deteriaine the largest length 2 the brace can have tw prevent the door rom bein, opened. Neglect the weight of the brace.835, ‘The man has 2 weight of 900 N (= 90 kg), and the Coefficieal of static fsetion between his shoes and the floor is 4_ = 0.5. Determine where be should position ‘center of gravity G at d in order to exert the maximum hhovieoutal farce on dae door. What is this force? 8:36, ‘The 4NG-N (c* €0-kp) boy stands om the beemand pills on the cord with a force large enough to just ctase him te dip. If (,)p = O.4 between his shoes andl the beam, deterniae the reactions at and B. The beam is ‘unit ane has a welght of SOON (+ 50 xg)-Neglect the sire of the pulleys and the thickness ol the beam. 837, ‘The 400.N (= 40-kg) boy stards on the beam and poll wih 2 fore of 200 NIE (Jp = O4, determine the frictional force berweea his slioes and the beam aad Ihe reactionsat A and B.The beam js uniform and haya weight (of 500 N (= 50 kp), Neglect tbe size of the pulleys en the thickness of the bean. Promens + 200 838, Two blocks and B have weight of10N (* 1 kg) and 6 N (- 0.6 kg), respectively. They are resting on the incline for which the coetficients of static friction are Ha = 015 ard tty = 0.25. Determine the incline angle 8 {or which boti: blocks begin to Wide. Alo find dhe ‘eqaired stretch or compressiow in the connecting spring, for this to ocour.‘The spring bas a stiffness of k = 2 N/m. 839, “Two blocks A aad Bhave awelght of10N (= 1k) and 6N (~ 0.6 ke), respectively. They are resting on the incline for which the coefficients of statis friction are p47 0.15 and pz ~ 0.25, Determine tse angle & which ‘alt cattse metion otone ofthe blocks, What isthe cretion force under each of the blockswhen this occers? The spring has stiffness of k = 2 Nha snc is exiginally unaretched Prabs. B30 "S40. Determine the smallest force the man must exert fon the rope in order to move the 80-kg erate, Also, what is the angle # at this moment? The coefficient of static friction between the crate aad the floor is wy = 03. Prob.400+ CHAPTER 8 Friction Bell, Thethuee bis have a welght Of Wy = 20N(~ 24), Wy = 40N (eg) ad Wo= GON (= Shp) respectively. If the cocthcients of slate fiction at the susfaces of ‘contact are 28 show, determine the smallest horizontal force P aceded to mere block A, Prob 4 842, The frleiion book is mado from a faed frame Which is stiowa coloted and a cylinder of cepigible weight. A piece of paper is placed betweea the smooth wall and the eylinde, If 9 = 20°, determine the smallest cocBcicat of state frstion js a ell points of contact <0 that ay weight WY of paper p can be beld. 4d. ‘The refrigeratcc bas a weight of 900 1 (~ 90 ig) and rests on a tile floor for which qj = 0.25. Hf the man pushes horizontally on the refrigerator in the direction Shown, determine the smallast magnitie of force needed tomore', Also. ths man has a weight of 750.N (~ 75 ke), deiermiue tte smallest coeticlent of filetion belwween fis shoes and the floor so that he does no! slip, 844, The refrigerator has a weight of 900 N (= 90 ky) andirests on a tie Toor for whick 1, = 0.25. Also.the man bapa weight of 750 N (= 75 kg) end the eoeficiert ofttatie Liietion between the floor and his shoes is py ~ 0.6. IEhe pushes horizontally on the reftigerator, determine if he can. move It. Ifs0 does the refrigerator sip or tip? 09m Probs 844 IS. The wheel weight 100 N (= 10 kg) and rests on a eurfoce for which jy ~ 0:2, A coud wrapped around itis aitached to the top of the ISON (= 15-kg) hornogeneous block. Ifthe eoetficient of static Fiction at D is zp = 03, determine the smalles: vertical farce that can be apatied tungestially to the wheel which will earee mation to imperd.fu6, Each of the cylinders has a ase of $0 kp I te coefficients of stale ficiton at the poinss af contact ate d= 05, Py = O5,u¢ = 05, amd jp = 06, determine ibe couple moment M tteeded to rotate cylinder £. Pron 5-45 8.47. The bean AB has aneglgible nus and thickuess sand is subjected to «triengular distributed foadieg It is ippodted at one end By a pi and atthe ether eud by @ pest having a mass of 50 kg and negligible thickness, Determine the minimum force P nceded to move the pest, The coefficients of satic friction at B and C are ig = O4 and jo = 02, respectively 8:48. “The beam AB has ¢ negligible massand thickness and is subjected to a triangular distributed loadixg, It iz supported at one endl by a pia and et she other eed by a post having 2 mess of 50 kg and negligible thickness. Determine ibe to coefficients afstatic friction at B and a1 Co thal when the magnitude of the applied force is imreased to P = 150N, the post slips at both acd C simpitanec sy, Probe #4748 Promeus + 404 8-4). Tho block of weight Wis being pulled up the ‘ncinod plane of stope e using 2 force P. 1fP acts at the ‘angle § a shown, show thet for slipping to com, P = Wsin(w + a)jcesl ~ 0), where @ is the angle of friction; 8 = tan". 8.80. Deternine the aagle ¢ at which P should act ot the block so that the magnitude of Pis as smal os possible to begin pushing te block up the incline, Waas is ste comtesponding value of P? The block weighs W aud the slope aris known, SL, ‘The beam AB has a nesfigibie mass and thickness and is subjected toa foree Of 200 N. Iti supported at one ‘end by a pin and at the otker ond by a spool having ‘mass of 40 kg. Ifa cable's Weapped around the iter coce of the spool, determine the ainimum cable force P needed to move the speol The coefficienss of static friction at B nd Dare wy 04 and wp > 02, resportivedy. Prob, 8.54402 + CHAPTER 8 Friction “8.52, Block C has a mass of 50 kg and is confined between two walls by smooth rollers JF the biock rests on top of the (kg spool, determine the minimum cable force P needed to move the spoct. The cable is wrapped acourd the «poo''s inner core, The coefficients of Hate Gijon at and B are yy = 03 and wg ~ 0.6. = 858 The uniform 60-49 crate C rests uniformly on & 10-kg dolly D. If the front casters of the dolly at A are lacked to prevent rolling while the esters at B sre free tp roll, detecmuine the maximum force P thet mey be applied whhout causing motion of the ciate, The ‘coefficient of static friction between the casiers and the flocr is wy = 0.35 end between the dotiy and the crate, os. 06m—4 Prob, 8-53 1.54, Two blocks A and B, each having « mass of 6 are comnected by the inkage shown. Ifthe coefficients static fricion at the contacting surfaces are pi 4 = O2 ay itm = O8, determine the largest vertical farce P that rm be applied to pin C without causing the biocks to ai Neglect the weight of the links. Prob. 4 8:55, ‘The uniform beam has a weight W and length. Tests on the Fixed rails tA and B.TEthe enefficient stati Friction at the rails is jz, determine the horizon Jorce P, applied pespendicuta to the face of the bea which Wik cause the beam to move. Pras#886, ‘The uniform 6-hg slender rod sous on the top center of the 34g block. If the socificiens of static friction at the poinls of contact are 44 = 04, pp = 08, and 4c = 03, determine the largest couple snoment M which ean be applied to the 106 withoat esusing motion of the rad. -— 300 een C 160 mee 100 em Fro. 656 847, ‘Tae carpenter slowly pushes the uniform board horizontally oyer the top of the saw horse. The board has a uniform weight of SO Nim, snd the saw horse has a weight of 15 N(~ 7.5 kg) and 4 esatec of gravity at G. Determine if the saw horse wil siay in positon, slip, of tip if the board is pushed forward when d = 3 m. The coefficients of tlic friction are shown in the figure. SR “The cerpenter slowly ptshes the uniform board horizontally over the topof the saw horse. ‘The board has uniform weight Of 30 Nim, en uke saw horse tes a ‘Weight of 75 N(~ 7.5 kg) and a center of graity al G. Determine ifthe saw horse will stay in positon, slip, or Lip ifthe boned is pushed forward when d = 42 m. The ceefficieats of static friction are shown in the igure. w= 03- 03 nl Pros #558 Promems + 403 889, The 45-kg disk rests om the surface foc which the coeificient of static fiction is 24 = 02. Dewermine the largest couple moment M that caa be applied to the bar ‘without cansing motion. 78660. Tho 45:kg dish rosis on te surface for which the cortficient ofstatie fiction is 24 = O.15.1FM =SON+m, determine the irietion foree at A. Peas, 966 8461 The ead C of the twerbar Iinkage rests on the top cenler of the So-kg gylinder, H the coeticients of static friction at Cand E are ye = O6 ard zz = 63, determine the largest vertical force P which can be applied at B ‘without causing motion, Neglect the mass of the bars. P be rae Peed. B-61404 + CHAPTER A Friction @3 Wedges ‘Wedez ore oftenused tondjut the elevation of structural or mechanical parts Alo, they provide satiliy for objects such a thstank. ings @ ‘A wedge is a Smple machine which is often used to transform an applied Forse into much larger forces, directed at approximately right angles to ‘he applied force. Also, wedges can be used to give small displacements co adjustments to heavy loads Consider, for example, the wedge shown in Fig. 8-13a, which is used to fifta block of weight W by applying a force F to the wedge. Free-body diagrams of the block and wedge are showa in Fig. 8-135. Here we have excluded the weight of the wedge since it is umually small compared to the weight of the block, Also, note that the frictional forces, and E, must oppose the motion of the wedge, Likewise, the frictional force Fy of the wall on the block must aet downward so az to oppote the block’s upward motion, The locations of the resultant normel forces are not important in the force analysis since neither the block nor wedge will “tip” lence the monient equilibrium equations will not be considered. “There are seven unknowns consisting of the applied force P, needed to cause motion of the wedge, end six normal end frictional forces. ‘The saven available equations consist of two force equilibrium equations (SF, = 0, ZF, = 0) applied to we wedge and block (four equations (otal) and the frictional equation F = uN applied at cach surface of contact (three equations total IF the block is to be fowered, the frictional forces wi all actin a sense opposite to that shown in Fig. 8-13b. The applied force P will act to the right as shown if the coefficient of Sriction is very small or the wedge angle 0 is farge. Otherwise, F may have the reverse Sense of direction in order to préf on the wedge lo remove it, ITP is not applied, or P = 0, and friction forces hold the block in place, then the wedge is referred to as self-locking, F813Steno 83 Wedges + 405 “The uniform stone in Fig. 8-14a has a mass of 500 kg and is held in the horizontal position using a wedge at B. If the éoefficient of static friction is, = 03 at, the surfeves of contact, determine the minimum force P needed to remove the wedge. Is the wedge sel-locking? | Assume that the stone does not slip at A. Nee o 03% 03% Rpetd Solution The minimum fowe P requires F = j,N at the surfaces of contac with ihe wedge, The free-body diagrams of the stone and wedge are showa in Fig. &-145. On the wedge the friction force opaoses the motion, snd on the stone at A, Fy < j4,Ng, since slipping does aot ‘oveur there. There are five unknowns Fs, Na, Na, No, and P. Three equilibrium equations for the stone and two for the wedge are available for solution, From the free-body diagram of the stone, (43M, = 0; —405 N[OS m) + (Nyoos 7N)(E m) +{03Np sin 7° N)(1m) = 0 Ng = BOL ‘Using this result for ihe wedge, we have ABER, = 05 2383.1 sin 7° N — 0,3(2383.1 cos 7°N) + P—03No=0 HER HG Ne ~ 2583.1 co8 7? N ~ 03(2388.1 sin 7°N) = 0 | Ne = 245256 P= 1149 = LISKN Ans : Sinse P is positive, indeed the wedge must be pulléd out. 1f P was zero, he wedge would remain ln place (sel-Jocking) and the frictional forves developed at 8 and C would satisty Fs < 1p and Fo < pe.406 - CHAPTER 8 Friction 8.4 Frictional Forces on Screws ‘Squerethreaded secows find applica valves, jacks, and vies, where pasioslarly lnyge Lctoes must be developed aloagthe axis of the sere, Fy s4s In most cases screws are used as fasteners; however, in many types of machines they are incomporated to (cansmil power or motion from one part of the machine to another. A squareshrended screw 's commonly used for the fatter purpose, especially when large forces are applied along, itsaxis.In thissection we will annlyze tho forces acting onscuarc-threaded screws. The analysis of other types of screws, such as the V-thread, isbased. ont these same principles. A screw may be thought of simply a9 an inctined plane or wedge wrapped around a cytinder. A nut inttally at position A on the screw shown in Fig, 8-15¢ will move up (9 2 when rotated 360° around the sorew, ‘This rotation és equtvalent to translating the aut up en inclines plane of height fanc length 2ar, whece ris the mean radius of the thread, Fip. 8-15b. The rise / Jor a single revolution is referred to as the lead of the screw, whore the Zead angle is given by @ = tax l/2nr).. Frictional Analysts, Whoa a screw is subjected to large axial loads, the frictional forces develaped on the thread become important if we are to determine the moment M* needed to tum the screw. Consider, for example, the square-hreaded jack screw shown ia Fig. 8-16, which supports We vertical load W. The reactive forces of the jack to this toad are actually disiributed over the ciscumforence of the screw threadin contact with the sorew hole in the jack, that fy within region A shown in Fig. 8-16. For simplicity, this portion of thread can be imagined as beirg unwound from the serew and represented as a simple block resting oa an inclined plane having the screw’s lead angle 9, Fig. 6-172. Here the inclined plane represents the inside supporting thread of te jack base, Three forcesact on the blockor screw. The force Wis Ue Lota sxial ond applied to lhe screw. ‘The horizontal force $ is caused by the applied moment M, such thet by summing moments about the axis of the screw, Ad = Sr, where ris the screw's mean radius As a result of W and S, the inclined plane exerts 2 resultant force R on the block, which issbown to have components acting. normal, N, and langent, F,to the contacting surfaces “Fox application, ME doveloped by applying « bsrizantal force F ata sight angle to the ead ate lever tha! would be fixed to the stew.Secon 4 Fig. 8.16 Upward Serew Motion. Provided M/ ie groal enough, the screw (and ence the block) can either be brought to the verge of upward impending motion or motion can be occurring, Under these conditions, R acts at an anglo (@ + g) from the vertical as shown in Fig. 8-174, where @ = tan *(F/N) = tan(pA/N) = tan pw. Applying the two force equations of equilibrium to the block, we obtain a S- Rsin(6 + 8) =0 =0, Roose +g} - W=0 Hliminating X and solving for S, then substituting this value into the equation M = Sr, yields M~ Wrean(o + #) @) As indicated, Mf is the moment necessary to cause upward impending motion of the screw, provided 6 = 4, = tan’! x, (the angle of static friction). If ¢ is replaced by dx = tan yy (the angle of kinetic friction), Eg.8-3 will give a smaller value Mf névessary to maintain uniform upward motion of the screw, Downward Screw Molton (¢ > $), If the surface of the screw is very slippery, it may be possible for the screw 10 rotele downward if the magnitude of the moment is reduced to,say, M’ 4 For this case, Ea. 8-3 becomes, Mt" = Wrean(o ~ @) e) Frictional Forces on Scrawe + 407 Upward screw axaion @ w Dewawacdscxev rodon a> 9) © rg8a7408 + CHAPTER 8 Friction w _—¥ |\ R aa, Suitlockieg sero (9= 9) (nthe verge afzctting dointnrd) o Self-Locking Screw. If the moment M (or its effect §) ie removed, the scrow will remain self locking; Le, it will support the load W by frlerion forces alone provided g = 9. fo show this consider the necessary timiting case when g = 6, Fig. 8-17c, Here verticalequiibrium ismainteined since Riis vortical and thus balances W. Downward Serew Motion (9 < ¢). When the surface of the sccewis very rough, the screw will nol rotate dowaward as stated above. Instead, the, direction of the applied moment must be reversed in order to cause the motion. The free-body diagram shown in Fig, 8-17¢ is representative of this case, Here $" is caused by the applied (reverse) moment MI”. Hence Eq.8-3 becomes Wrtan(d — 0) es) Each of the above cases should be thoroughly understood before proceeding lo solve problems. Fig 0.17 ‘The turnbuckle shown in Fig. 8-18 has « square thread with @ meen radius of 5 mm anda lead of 2 mm. Ifthe coefticient of static friction between the screw and the turobuckle is u, = 0.25, determine the moment M that must be applied to draw the end screws closer together. 1s the turabuckle self-locking? Solution ‘The moment may be obtained by using Bq. 8-3. Why? Since at two screws must be overcome, this requires Af = 2[Wr tan(9 + 6} a) ‘Here W = 2000 N, y= Sum, 9, = tan”), = tan“"(0.25) = 14,04, and = tan 1(2/2mr) = tan *(2.mm/{2er(5 mm) ]) = 3.64°. Substituting these values into Eg. 1 and solving gives ‘M = 2{(2000 N)(5 mm) ton{14.04" + 3.64°)] = 6374.7 Nomm = 637 Nem Ans. ‘Whoa the moment is removed, the turnbuckle will be self lockin; it will not unscrew sinoe dy > 8Prowieme + 400 PROBLEMS 8.62. Determine the minimum applied force P required to niove wedge A to the right. The spring is compressed a distance of 175 rum, Neglect tbe weight of A and B.The coefiicient of static ‘riction for all contacting seriaees is, B= 035. Negket friction at the rolters. 8.53, Detoresine the largest weight of the wedgo that ‘can be placed between the &-EN (= 800-kg) eslinder and ‘the wall without upsetting equilvium. The coeficient af static friction at A and Cis, = 0.5 and at B, w = 0. Pek 8-65 "864, The wedge bas a negligible weight and a getfiient of static riction ya, = 0.25 with all contacting surfaces. Determine the largest angle 0 so thet itis “self- locking” This requires no slipping far any magnitude of {the foree P applied to the joint. 86S. UL the spring is compressed 60 mm and the coefficient of static friction between the tapered stub S and the slider A is 154 = 0.5, determine the horizontal force F noséed to move the élidar forward, The stub fs free to move without friction within the fixed coller C. ‘The coetficient of static friction between A and surface Histiap = O4. Neglect the weighis ofthe stiderand stub,410 + CHAPTER ® Fei 8-66, ‘The coclfictent of static Irstion between wedges Band Cis u,™ 0.6 and between the surfaces of contact Band A and C md D, p04. If the spring compressed 200 mm when in the position showa, determine the sméllest force P needed tomove wedge C to the left. Negleel the weight of the wedges. 845% "The coctficient of static friction between the ‘wedges Hand C is 2, ~ 0.6 and betwean the surtztes of contact B and A and Cand D, uf =O. 3f P= SDN, determine the Largest allowable campression ofthe spring without cacsng wedge C to miove to the left. Neglect the weight of the wedges. em 00 Wn robs. 66/67 #868. The wedge blocks ere used (0 hold the specimen ina wension cesting machine. Deterenine the design angle © of the wedges so that the specimen will not slip regardless of the applied load. The coethciants of static Grction are yi, = Od at A and ya = Oat B Neglect the ‘weight of the blocks 4 Prob 8 8:@. ‘The beam is adjusted 10 he horizontal posttion by ‘means of a wedge located al is right support, It the ‘coefficient of static friction between the wedge end the lwo surfaces of contact is 14, = 0.25, detcrmine the hhofizonial force P required to pvah the wedge forward, Neglect (ke weight and size of the wedge and te Ubieknese of the bear, 200N) Prob. 849 870, Ifthe beam AD is loaded as shown, detezmine the horizontal fore P whlch mus. be applied fo the wedge in ‘omer to remove it fom under the bean, The ceefficents ‘i sate friction at the wedge’s top and bottom scriaces are ca = 0.5 and s4cy = 035, roopestively If P = O38 the wedge sel focklag? Negleel the weight and size of the ‘wedge and the tbiekness of the beara. (ITI, | TS 4m Prot. 5-708:74, The column is wsed to sopport the upper floar. If a force F = 80 Nis applied perpendicular (0 the bandle fo tighten the screw, deterctine the compressive force int the column. The sqtare-threaded screw on the jack hasa coefficient of static friction of = Ou, mean diameter (0f 25 nun, and a lead of 3 mm. 8-72. If the force F is semioved from the handle of the Jack in Prob, 8-71, determine if the screw is selF-ocking. lL robs TUT 873 Tho square-throsdedserew has amen dicmeter of 20 mim anda lead of 4 mun. Tf the weight of th plate is ‘SON (= 5 kg), cetermine the smallest coefficient of static friction between the screw and the plate so tiat the plate does nottravel down the ssrew when the plate espended as shown. Promes 6 414 B44, Thesqanre threaded serew ofthe amp bas a mean diameter of 14 mm and a lesd of G mm, Ip, = 02 for the threads, and the tarque epplid to the baal is 15N-m, determine the compressive force F on the block. 15Nom [ Sr) 875, "Taedoviec is used o pall the battery cable terminal CC frox the post of « batiery, Ifthe requized pulling force is MON, determine the torque M1 that must be applied to the handle on the serew to ighten i. The screw hassquare threads, a mean diameter of S mm, a lead of 2mm, and the coetticient of static Gietion is yy = 05. dsa2 + CHAPTER @ Friction “B76, The automobile jack is subjected to « vertical loud, of F = SKN, Iu squareshcended seen, having w ead of 5 min and # mean diameter of 10 mmm, 's used in the jack, etecmine the force thet mest be applied pempendicnlar 10 the baxdle to (¢) raise the toad, and (9) Lower che toad; Hy = 02. The supporting plate exerts only vertial forces at Aant B, Prob, #75 8-77, Determine the damping forc: on the board A if the ferew of the “C” clamp is tightened with a twist of AM = EN-m, The single equuro-ibroaded screw hes « mean pactus of 10 mn, ¢ leaf o€3 rum, end the coetfident of static friction ise, = 0.35, 8-78. Ifthe required Lamping force at the board A is to be 50 N, determine the torque iM that must be applied to the kadle ofthe “C* clarap to tighten it down The single squarc-threaded screw bas e nen radius of 10:nn,a lead (of3 rmm,and the eoetfcfent of state trcton is = 0235, et 899. The shalt las a squarerthreaded screw with a lead ‘of § mm and a mean radius of 15 mam. If iis in contact ‘witha plate gear having amean radius of 30 mm, delermine the resisting torque Mon the plate getr which can be ‘overcome if torque Of 7N-m is appliodto the shaft The covificieat of stalle fridion at the screw Is ag = 02, Neglect fristion of the bearings located al A and 8. Pew.) "8-80, The braking mechasiom coasials of two pianed arms end ascuere-threaded screw with lettand righthand ‘threacs, Thus when tumed, the screw draws the two arms together. If the lead of the screw is 4 mm, the mean diamcter 12 mm, and the coefficient of statis friction is = 035, detenmine the tension in the screw when torque of 5 N+m is applied to tighten the screw. If the oelficieat of static friction between the brake peds A and B snd the circular shaft is uf = O05, determine the ‘maximum torque AI the brake an resistSSL The fixture clamp cout of » square-throaded stiow having a coctfigent of slate fiction of ty = 03, meen dlameterof3 nai, anc atead of am. The ive poits Indicated ere yin contectious, Determine the clamping force a the smooth locks D and E when 2 torque of ‘ME = 0.8 N-m is appli to the hands of the sorow. Proh 81 882. The clamp provides pressure from severat 7). Frictional Analysis. A free-bocly diagram of the bet segment in cantact ‘vith the surface is showa in Fig. 8-19b, Hore the nermal force N and the fictional foree F,actlag at diffeteut points along the belt, will vary both ‘in magnitude and direction. Due to this wnknown force disttibution, the analysis of the problem will proceed on the bass of initially studying the ‘forces acting ona differential elernext of the belt. A ftee-body diagtam of a element having a length ds is shown in Fig. 8-19c. Assuming cithet impending motion or motion of the belt, the magnitude of the frictloual foree dF = dN, ‘This force opposes the sliding motion of the belt and thereby increases the magnitude of the tensile foree acting in tho belt by dZ. Applying the twa force equations of equilibrium, we have Sane row() sua er varealit) =o 736 an (r+ aryae( ft) raft) <0 FigoSecnion 8.5. Frictional Forces on Flat Belts Since d6 is of infiuitesiinal size, sin(d0/2) and cos(t0/2) cam be replaced by d0/2 and 1, respectively, Ako, the product of the two jinfinitesimals dF and 6/2 may be neglected when compared 10 infinitesimals of the first order, The ahove two equatious therefore redce to adn = dP and an =Tds Fliniaating av yields Banas Integrating this equation between all the points of contact that the belt makes with the drum, and noting that T +: 7, at 6 = 0 and T= T; at = By yields fm * ‘ar ‘Wy [ao L, T nf Solving for &, we obtain = he? 6) r opposes the direction of motion (or ) of the belt measured relative to the suriace, while 7; acts in the direction of the relative belt motion (or impending motion); because of friction, b> 2= coefficient of static or kinetic friction between the belt and the surface of contact = angle of belt to surface contact, moacured in radians 2.718...., base of the natural logarithm where Fy T= B Note that 7 is iudependent of the radius of the drum and instead itis a function of the angle of belt to surface contact, . Furthermore, «6 indicated by the integration, this equation Is valid for Mat belts on any shape of contacting surface, Por application, Eq. 8-6 is valié only when impending motion or motion oxcars. a516 CHAPTER 8 Friction Inpeesing meno as EG t 500 ) 139" © aay Weng o Fig ‘The maxiunum tension that can be developed in the cord shown in Fig 8-201 is SOON. Ifthe pulicy at A fs frec to rotate and the cocflicient of static friction at the fixed drmns B and C is 4. = 0:25, determine the largest mast of the cylinder that can be lifted by the cond. Assume that the iorce F applied at the ond of the cord is dicected vertically downward, as shown. ” o Solution Lifting the cylinder, which bas a weight 1 = mg, causes the cord to move counterclockwise over the drums at B and C heace, the maximum tension 7; in the cord occurs at D. Thus, T, = SOON. A ‘section of the cord passing over the drum at B is shown ia Fig. 8-206. Since 180° = 7 rad, the angle of contact between the dram and the cord is B = (135*/180} = 3u/4 rad. Using Bq. 8-6, we have Rane, SOON = 7,e0250/091 “Henee, a= Se, - EN onan GH] = 780 Since the pulley at A is free to rorate, equilibriemn requires that the tension in the cord remains the same on both sides of the pulley. ‘The section of the cord pasting over the drum at C is shown in Fig. $-20¢. The weight WW < 777.4, Way? Applying Eq. 8-6, we oblain R= Tens, ATTA N = wel™ACH5 W = 1539N so that Ww _ 1539 mg SSL me = 157 kg Ans,1 Prostests + 417 PROBLEMS 885. A “hawser” is wrapped around a Fixed “capstan” te secure « ship for docking. If the tension in the rope) ‘cused by the ship, is 7300 N, determine the least number of complete turns the rope must be rapped around the capstan in order to prevent slipping of the rope. The szeatest herizontel force that a longshoreman can exert ‘on the rope is 250 N. The coefficient of static tition is Hy = 03. 8.86. The truck, which has a mss of 24 Mg, is to be Iowured dows theslope by a rope thet is wrapped arcund a tee, Ifthe wheels are free (0 roll and thes man at con. resist a pull of 300N, determine the minimum number of turns the rope should be wrapped around the tree to ower the truck at a constant speed. The coefficient of Kinetic fiction between the tree and rope is py = 0.3. Prob £26 87, Determine the maxinmm aad the minimum yaluss of weight 1Y wiich inay be applied without causing th SUN (= Sk) block to dip. The coefficient of static Itiction boswwon the block and the plane ij, = 0:2, and between the rope and the drum Dp = 03. Froh. 5-47 #848. A cylinder having a mass of 250 ig is to be. supposted by tho cord which wraps orer the pipe ‘Determine the smallest vertical force F needed to support the load if the cord pastes (a) once orer the pipe B= 1807, ard (b) two times over the pipe, f= Sa0?. Take p= 02. 8.89, A opfinder having a mass of 250 kg is to be supported by the cord which wraps aver the pipe. ‘Determine the Ingest vertical force ¥ that can be applied to the cord without moving the oyfinder. The cord passes (ome over the pipe, A = 180", and (b) twa times over the pipe, 2 = S40?. Take iy = 02, a Probe, 48/39418 + CHAPTER 8 Friction 850, The boat has aweightof 2500N (= 250 kg} andishetd ‘in pesto off the side of a ship by the spas at A and B.A ‘man havinga weight cf 6901 (~ 65 kp)gcs in the boat, wraps 1 rope sound an overead boom at C,and tes i to the end cof te boat asshown. the boat is discounted Gan the spas, selene the monraat mintber of half ers te rope mst. make arcnd the boom so thet the boalcan be safely lowered {co the water at constaut velocity. Ally wat isthe normal arco between the boa and tho man?The soelficientafkiactic {ction between te rope and the boom is = O15. Hi “The problem requires he uencrral force between the man’s Fest and the boat be es smalls possible Prob. 8.90 B91, Determine the smallest lever force P needed to prevent the wheel from rotating if it is subjected to a torque of M = 250N+m. Teceefficient of stetic friction between the belt and the whee} is 4, = 03. The witeel Is pin-comnected at its center, B, "892. Determine the torque Af that can be ressted by the band brake if a force of P = 30N is applied 10 the handle of the lever. The coetficient of sialic friction between the belt and the wheel is 1, = 03."The wheel i pin-connested auits center, 6. 893 Blocks A end 2 Weigh SOON (~ 50 kg) and S00N (= 30 kg), respectively. Using the coelficiests of state fiction indicated, determine the greatest weight of bos D without causing metion. 894, Blocks A and 2 weigh 750 N (75 kp) each, and D wckghs 300 N (= 30g). Using the cvettislents of static Lbiction indicated, determine the frictional fore between blocks A and 2 and between block A and the floor C. robs 299 895. Show that the {retional relatiouship betwee the belt tensions the corflicient of friction y, and the engular contacts a and fi for the V-beltis hs = Heteer),8.96, ‘Ths smocih beam is being hoisted usieg a zope ‘whlch is wrapped around the beara and passes Carough rag at A shown, Ifthe end of the rope is subjected to tension T and the corfilcent of static friction between the rope and ring is 2, = 03, determine the angle of 8 for equilibrium, Prob, 3-96 897. “The20-ke motor has a center of gravity at Gand is pinconnected at C to maintain a tension in the drive belt. Determine the smallest countirclockivise twist or torque MF wat must be supplied by the motos to turn the disk B if wheel A locks and causes the belt to slip over the dik. No sipping occurs al 4."The coefficient of static Friction between the belt and the dick is 4, = 03. Prob. £97 898. The simple band brake is constcucted so that the ends of the friction strap are connected to the pin st A and the lever arm at B. If the wheel és subjected v0 a terqae of Af = 200. +m, determine the smallest force P applied to the lever that is requized to held the wheel Stationary. The coefficient of static friction between the stop ond wheo! isp, ~ 05. Promiens + a19. Prob 8-98 899. The cylinder woighs 10 N (~ 1 ky) and is held fn equilibrium by the bell and wall. Tslipping does wot occur al the wall, detecmine the minircum vertical force P which mm be ‘applied to the belt for equilibrium. The coefficient of stetic fiction between the belt and the srlindsr is 4, = 0:25. b Prub.3-99 8-100. The aniformemercie pipe hes aweight of 4 LN (G 400 kg) and is unioaded slowly from the (ruck bed sing the rope and skids shows. If the coefiicient of kinetic friction between the rope and pipe ts 14, "03, determine the force the warker rvust exert on the rope to lower the pipe af constant speed, There is a pulley at B, and the pipe does not slip on the skids. The fover portion of the rope is parallel tothe skids.420 + CHAPTER 8 BOL, A cord heving a weight of § Nim (x 0.6 kya) and a wotal fength of 3 a is suspended over a peg P 2s shown. Tf the coefficient of static friction between the peg and cord fs p= 0, determine the longest iength hh which one side of (ie suspended cord cum have without causing motion. Neglect the sizeof the peg and the Jengtit of cord draped over it Prob. 101 8-102. A conveyer belt is used to transfer granatar snaterial aud the frictional resistance on the top of the beltis F ~ SEQ N.Determine the rmalieat stecteh ofthe springattached to the moveable axle ofthe idle putley B so that the belt does not slip at the drive pulley A avhen the torque M is applied, What minimum torque Mie required to keep the belt moviag? The cooffcieat af static friction betieen the belt and the wheel at A i6 eg = 02. 8-108, Biocks A and B have a mass of 7 kg and 16 ky, respectively. Using the cacifisients of static Frictcn indicated, deteomine the largest vertical force P vbich can ‘be applied to the cord without causing motion. Prob. £103 48.104, The belton the portable dryer wraps around (he drum D, idler palley A, and motor palley B. Tf the motoz cen develop @ maximtma torque of Mf —080N-m, determise the smallest spring tension required (0 hold the belt from sipping. The coefficient of static friction between the belt and the drum snd motor pulley is fy = 03, Prob, 8102 Prob, $204SecrON 8.6. Frictional Forces on Collar Bearings, Pivct Bearings, and Disks» 424 BOS, Block A has arass of SOkg and rests on surface c for which 1, = 025. If the coefficient of static trction Between the cord and the fixed peg at Cis w= 03, determine the greatest mass of the sispended cylinder D ‘without causing motion, 84106. Block A rests on the eurtace for which ny ~ 025. Hrhe massof the suspended cylinder D is ky, determine the smallest mass of tock A so thet it docs not slip or tip. The coefficient of static friction between the cord and the fined peg at Cis ps = 03. 2 robs. £-105/106 *8.6 Frictional Forces on Collar Bearings, Pivot Bearings, and Disks Pivot and coliar bearings are commonly used in mactines to support an ‘axial load on a rotating shaft, These two types of support are shown in Fig. 8-21. Provided the bearings are aot briceted, or are only partialy Iubricated, the taws of dry friction may be applied to determine the moment M needed fo turn the shefl when it supports an axial force P. » 03. If the normal pressurc acting completely around the post varies linearly with depth a8 shown, determine the frictional torque HY that aust be ‘overcome 10 rolate the post. Proh 117 Prob, £118 8110, The pulley ha a radius of 3 cm and fits loosely ‘on the 0.5-om-diameter shaft. If the loadings acting en the belt cause te palley to rome with oorstant angular velocity, determine the frictional force between the shaft and the pulley aad ovenpute the enefticient of kinetic friction, The pulley weighs 18 N. 8.120. The pulley haga radics of 3 em and fits loosely ‘on the 0.5-cm-diameter shaft. Ifthe loadings acting oa the belt cause the pulley to rotate with constant angular velocity, determine the frictions! force between the shaft and the pullay and compute the aoefficient of kinetic sy 536 Peet 1197208421, Determine the temsion Tin the belt necded to ‘overcome the tenslon of 20D N created on the other side. Also, what are the nonmal and frictional comporen's of farce developed: on the collar busting? The evefiicent of Static frition is ya, = 021. 8.122, If « tension force T = 215 N is required to pull {he 200-N force around the collar bushing, determine the coefficient of siti friction at the contacting surface. The Delt does not stip on the collar. Probe -12u122 81123, A disk having an cuter diameter of 120 mm fits Iosely over s fixed shaft having a diameter of 20 am. If the coefficient of stalic friction between the disk and the shu is j4g = O15 and the disk as a mass of 50 kg, The centroid represents the geometric center of a body. This point coincides with the center of mass or the center of gravity only if ‘te material composing the body is uniform or homogencous + Formulas used to locate the center of gravity or the centroid simply reprevent a balence between the surn of moments of all the parts of the system and the moment of the “resultant” for the system, > In some eases the centroid is located at a poim: that is not on the object, as in the case of a ting, where the centroid is al its cemter. Also, this point will lie on any axis of symmetry for the body,a2 CHAPTER 9. Center of Gravity and Cartrold PROCEDURE FOR ANALYSIS ‘The center of gravity or centroid of an object or shape can be cetermined by single integrations using the following procedure. Differential Element, » Select an eppropriate coordinate syste, specify the soordinete axes, and thea choose a differential element for integretion, + For lines the clement df is represented 2s a differential line segment, . + Forarcas the clement dA is generally a rectangle heving « finite Jength and differential width, + For volumes che element dV is either acireular disk having a finite radius and differential thickness, or a shell having a finite leagth and radiae and @ differential thickness. + Locete the element af an arbitrary point (x, x, z) on the curve that defines the shape, Size and Moment Arms, «Express the length d., ares dA, or volume dV of the element in tems of the coordinates of the curve used to define the geometric shape. * Determine the coordinates or moment aums ¥, 9, for the centrold or center of gravity of the element. Integrations, « Substitute the fonmulations for ¥, ¥, Z and aL., dA, or dV into the appropriate equations (Ege. 9-4 through 9-7) and perform the integrations" ‘+ Express the function in the integrand ia terms of the samte variable asthe differential thickness of the element in order to perform the integration, + The limitsiof the integral are defined from the 1wo extreme locations of the element's cifferential thickness, so that when the elements are “summed” or the integration performed, the entire region is covered, “Porm for imegration are given in Appeedix A.Secon 9.2 Canter of Gravity, Center of Mass, and Centrold for # Body + 443 Locate the centroid oi the rod bent into the shape of a parabolic are, shown in Fig. 9-9, Solution Differential Element. The differential element is shown in Fig. 9-9. T's located on the curve at the arbitrary point (x; y) Area sud Moment Anus. The differential length of the clement dL ‘can be expressed in terms of the differentials dx and dy by using the Pythagorean theorem. er a = yr Td) aL = V(dx¥ + (ayy \é tidy ‘Since x = y*, then dx/dy = 2y, Therefore, expressing dL is terms of yand dy, we have aL = Vay stay ‘The centroid is located at ¥ = x, F = y. Futzyrations, Applyiag Egg. 9-7 and integrating with respect to y using the formulas in Appendix A, we have fea [ory [yori ~ Sars ie 7 fu [vera [vera Le, 0.6063, _ Taye, = 0110 m : Ans : 1 5. oF fra pe F14y anes t +— 7 1479 fe [Varia h = 054m Ans.AAA ~ CHAPTER 9. Centar of Gravity and Controid Locate the centroid of the eiroular wire segment shown in Fig, 9-10. Solattion Polar coordinates will be used to solve thie problem since the are is circular. Differendtat Element, A di€ferentiel circular exc s selected as shown in the figure. This element intersects the curve at (K, 6}. Leagth and Moment Arma The differential length of the element is aL ~ Rdé, and its centroid islocated at ¥ = K eos 8 and ¥ = R sind. Auegrations. Applying Eqs 9-7 and integrating with respect to 0, we obtain 0 it pra (Reos0)R do Pf exow e080 a0 [run fin | a (Rsino\Rad ef sin 9 do 2R ee Ka Rade Rg ae h Ans.Section 9.2. Canter of Gravity, Center of Mass, and Centrold for a Body + 445 the distance 5 from the « sx to the centroid of the aren of the triangle shown in Fig, 9-41. solution | Differeesial Elewer Consider & rectangular element having thickness dy which intersects the boundary at {x, y), Fig. 9-12. Area and Moment Arms. ‘The grea of the element is dA = xdy b j ak . iit — ») dy, and is centroid is located a distance F = y from the x axis, Jategations, Applying the second of Eqs 9-6 and integrating with respeat to y’ yields foes [oba- Yay 4 “e iA Py I, fie vay Pon a n -t -446 + CHAPTERS Center of Gravity and Centroid Locate the centroid for the area of « quarter circle shown in Big 5-190 Solution | Dlferentiai Element, Polar coordinates will be used since the boundary is circular. We choose the elementin the shape of arriangle, Fig, 9-120, (Actually the shape is ciroular sector; however, neglecting higher-order differentials, the element becomes triangolar.) The clement intersects the curre at point (2, 9). Area aud Montene Arias, "The area of the elemént is x # 4A = XR)(RdI) = 5-40 nd using the results of Baample 93, the centroid of the (tianguler) dlement is located at ¥ = FRe0s0,¥ = 3Rsin 6 Invgrations. Applying Eqs. 9-6 and integrating with respect 10 8, ‘we obtain Ans. AnsStenien 9,2 Canter of Gravity, Center of Mass, and Centroid for a Body + 447 Fig 9-32 ven I Differential Slenens, The differeatial clement may be chosen in the form of a circular arc having a thickness dr as showa in Fig, 9-12. “The clement intersects the axes at points (r,0) and (p, = /2) Avea und itoment Arms, ‘The arenofthe clerentisd A s (2arr/4) dr. Since the ceatroid of a 90° cicular are was determined in Example 9.2, thea for the elerueat'® = 2r/, J = 2r/m. Hnlegraitons, Using Bas. 9-6 and integrating with respect to 1, we fre (CE) ¥ Ans Ans.CHAPTER 9 Center of Gravity and Centrold Locete the centroid of the area shown in Hig, 13a. Solution | Differential Etemest, A difforcntial clement of thickness dx is shovn, in Fig, 9-13a. The clement intersects the curve at the arbitrary point (x, 3). and so it has a height y. Area ravi Moment Aems, ‘The area of the element is dA = yd, and its centroid is located at ¥ - x, ¥~ y/2. Jategratinn, Applying en Integrating with respettox yields ay dx 3 He [ow [ow 0250 0333 a [vax “fee : [ore [eros a co “ho, OoftCO 08 ja [ow [Px I, b solution Ht Differential Element, The ditterentiat clement of thickness dys shown in Fig. 9.13h. The element intersects the curve at the arbierary point (% y} and so it has a length (1 — 2). Area aud Afontent Aes ‘The area of the elementisdA = (1 — x) dy, and its centroid fs located at — rare( ® Imegrations. Applying Eqs.9-6 and integrating with respect to y, we ig. 3 obiain 075m Ans. 03m Ans. fea fiw amd 5S [oe ana 03m Ans,Section 9.2. Conter of Gravity, Center of Mass, end Centroid for a Body + 449 3 X centroid oF the shaded area bounded by the two curves ind y = v4, Fig. 9-14. y Solution | . -}——— 1» ——_| Differentiai Blemont, A differential clement of thickness ds is fm showa in Fig 9-14a, The element intersects the curves at arbivary 1 points (x, 3) and (x, 9), snd so it has a height ()» — 4) MA» | Area aut Momew Ann. ‘The atea of the element is dA = apy m | Gt nbd, and its centroid is loceted ot ¥ ~ 2. yes | dusegration. Applying Ea. 9-6, we have Soliton ti Diffecensial Element. A differential element having 4 thickness dy is shown in Fig. 9-145, ‘The element intersocts the curves at the arbitrary points (x y) and (2, 7), and 80 it has a fongth (1 — x), Avex and Moment Ars, The area of the element is dA = (21 1) dy, and its centroid is located at e ark late | Gam + DLBLNTY ar” 2 Torgratien. Applying Eq, 9-6, we have [rea A fea Is UG savaices = ay POVI+ MAK ~ Nay Ans.450+ CHAPTERS Canter of Gravity and Centroid Locale the 9 centavid for the paraboloid of revolution, which is penerated by revolving the shaded area shown in Hig, 9-15a about the yaxit, Sokvtion | Differential Flanent. An dement having the shape of a thin disk is choten, Fig. $~15a. This clement int « thickness dy. Jn this “dik method of analysis, the elemeat of plauar arza, 4, is always token petpendienlar to the exis of revolution. Here the element intersects the gorerating curve atthe arbitrary point (Oy, z), and eo its radius Brea Araund Women Arn The volume of the element is dV = (arc*) dy, and its centroid is lozated at J = y. Iniegration Applying the second of Eqs. 9-5 and integrating with respect to y yieldsSecrion 9.2 Center of Gravity, Center of Mass, and Centrold for a Boy + 451 100-4 Solution tt Dipferearial Element, As shown in Fig. 9-155, the volume element ccan be choson in the form of a thin cylindrical shel, hare the shells thicknessis dz. In this “shell” metiod of analysis the elementof planar area, dA. is always taken parallel to the axis of revolution. Hare the element intersects the generating curve at point (0, y, 2), and eo the radius of the shell = z Area nd Mowe Ann The volume of the dement & dv = QardA = 2m2(100 ~ y) dz, and its centroid is located at J= y+ (100 = 9)/2 = (100 + p72. Integrations, Applylag the second of Figs. 4-5 and integrating with respect to z yiolds 10 [yw [100 + yy/2i2a2(100 — y) dz - 100 _ f wv [ ‘2ara(100 ~ 3) dz im © { 2(10* — 10424} de =, ——— = 667 mm Ans an [eo ~ 107) ce fb452 + CHAPTER 9 Center of Gravity and Centroid Determine the location of the center of mass of the oylinder shown in Fig. 9-16c if its density varies directly with fts distance from the tonse, .0., = 200e kg/m. ¥ a ” o Solution For rcasons of material symmotry, F=p=0 Ans. Differential Element. A disk element of radius 0.5 m and thickness zis chosea for intogrotion, Fig, 9-164, sinee the dersity of the entire element i constant for agiven value of 2, The ciement is located along the z axis t the arbitrary point (0,0, 2). Yolnme and Moment Arm. ‘The sohume of the element is d¥ = (0.5)! de, and its centroid is located at Z = & Integrations, Using an equation similar to the third of Eqs 9-4 and integrating with respect to 2, aoting that p = 200z, We have [xoav f (200z) #( 0.5)? de, few [ ccoveyncosytae fF : 7 Fig. 9-46 [ ade hs Note; It is not possible to use # shell element for integration such as shown in Fig. 9-160 since the density of the material composing ‘the shell would vary along the shell’s height end hence the location of ® for the element cannot be specified.Peomems + 453 PROBLEMS 9, Determine the distance ¥ tothe center of ass of the omagencons red beul into tho skape show f the forbs amr You uni ength 0 ki, devermine he fesetons a he ized port , e—4 ‘yr? B= reno 9.2. Determine the location (5,3) af the centroid of the Prob. 93, Locate the center of mass ef the homogeneous rod bbent nip the shape of a ckealar are, Fro. 93 4944, Locate the center of gravity ¥ of the homogeneous sod ben; in the form of a semicirzuler are. The rod has 8 weight per unit leagih of $ Nim, Also, determine the orizon‘al reaction & the smooth support B and the x and y components of reaction at the pia A, Prob. D4454 + CHAPTER 9 Center of Gravity and Centroid 9-8, Determine the distance € to the center of gravity of the homogeneous rod beat into the parabolic shape, if the rod has a weight per unit lengthof 05 N/m,detecmine the reactions at the fixed support 0. 96. Determine the distance ¥ to the center of gravity ‘of the homogeneous Tod bent into the parabolic shape. 49-8, Locate the centroid (3, J) of the shaded area Prabs 9.516 941. Locate the cenircid of the parabol area, Pio 7 rob 2-8 99, Locate the centroid ef the shaded area. rob. 9-9